Glendale City Council
May 24, 2022

A G E N D A

GLENDALE CITY COUNCIL

COUNCIL CHAMBERS
613 E. Broadway, 2nd Floor
Glendale, CA 91206
Meetings are broadcast live on Glendale TV, viewable on Spectrum Cable, channel 6, and AT&T U- verse, channel 99. Meetings are also streamed live in high definition (HD) on the city's webpage, glendaleca.gov/live, on YouTube.com/myglendale, and on Apple TV, Roku, and Amazon Fire devices using a free app called Screenweave and choosing “Glendale TV” from the menu. Meetings are also archived on the City Website for viewing anytime at glendaleca.gov/agendas. Call (818) 548-4013 for program schedules. DVDs of the proceedings are available for purchase in the City Clerk's Office.

For public comments and questions during the meeting, call (818) 937-8100. Public comments on a specific agenda item will be taken when that agenda item is discussed. If you have any question about matters on the agenda, or requests for assistance, please contact the City Clerk at (818) 548-2090 during regular business hours.

PLEASE TURN OFF CELLULAR PHONES WHILE INSIDE THE MEETING LOCATION In compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990, auxiliary hearing aids, sign language translation, and Braille transcripts are available upon request. Assisted listening devices are available same-day upon request. At least 48 hours (or two business days) notice is required for requests regarding sign language translation and Braille transcription services. All documents related to open session items on this agenda that are received less than 72 hours prior to this meeting, and are public records, will be available for review in the Office of the City Clerk, 613 E. Broadway, RM 110, Glendale, CA 91206.

Translation services are provided for meetings through the use of bilingual staff for speakers who wish to utilize the service as available. Speakers should state their request by contacting the City Clerk’s office at (818) 548-2090, at least 24 hours prior to the scheduled meeting. Please specify the language for which you require translation. The exclusive use of City provided interpreters is not required and persons are welcome to use their own interpreter or speak in their native language.

MAY 24, 2022 AT 6:00 PM

ROLL CALL

1. CLOSED SESSION – 1:00 PM (To Commence at 3:00 PM)
a. Conference with Legal Counsel – Pending Litigation: Crown Castle Fiber LLC v. City of Glendale, et al., U.S.D.C. Case No. CV 10-08518ODW JCx b. Conference with Legal Counsel – Pending Litigation: Benson v. City of Glendale, L.A.S.C. Case No. 18STCV05002
c. Public Employment – Principal Assistant City Attorney 1 TYPED 5/18/2022 10:15:00 AM
05 24 22
CC

2. REGULAR BUSINESS AGENDA – 6:00 PM
Roll Call
a. Flag Salute: Mayor Kassakhian
b. Invocation: Aram Adjemian, City Clerk
c. Report of City Clerk, re: Posting of Agenda. The Agenda for the May 24, 2022 Regular Meeting of the Glendale City Council was Posted on May 17, 2022 on the Bulletin Board Outside City Hall.

3. PRESENTATIONS AND APPOINTMENTS
a. Agenda Preview for the Meetings of Tuesday, May 31, 2022 b. Proclamation Designating May 2022 as Asian American and Pacific Islander Heritage Month
c. Proclamation Designating June 2022 as Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, Transgender, and Queer Pride Month

4. CONSENT ITEMS (Including Minutes)
The following are Routine and May be Acted Upon by One Motion. Any Member of Council or the Audience Requesting Separate Consideration May do so by Making Such Request Before Motion is Proposed.
a. Glendale Water and Power, re: Amendment to the City’s Existing Contract with Magellan Advisors, LLC for the Purpose of Securing Grant Funding for the Fiber Optic Broadband Network Project, and the Wireless Service Expansion initiative

1. Motion authorizing the City Manager, or his designee, to amend the existing Professional Services Agreement (PSA) with Magellan Advisors, LLC in the amount of $250,000 for grant funding consultancy to secure grant funding for the Fiber Optic Network Expansion project and the Wireless Service Expansion initiative b. Glendale Water and Power, re: Professional Services Agreement (PSA) with Insight Public Sector, Inc.

1. Motion authorizing the City Manager, or his designee, to enter into a four-year Professional Services Agreement (PSA) with Insight Public Sector Inc. to provide Glendale Water and Power (GWP) with remote infrastructure and security monitoring, managed and professional services, and additional direct IT support in the amount of $1,495,300, plus an additional $40,000 for 200 hours of Direct Information Technology (IT) support and advanced specialized services for GWP for a total not-to exceed amount of $1,535,300 per year for four years, with the option for two additional one- year terms as approved in said year’s budget
c. Public Works, re: Adopt the Plans and Specifications for the Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Installation Phase 2 Project

1. Resolution adopting the Plans and Specification for the Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Installation Phase 2 Project, Specification No. 3927, Plan Nos. 50-688, 50-689, 50-690; and directing the City Clerk to advertise for bids d. Public Works, re: Contract Award for the Corporation Yard Exterior Painting Project, per Specification No. 3915

1. Motion awarding a Contract to Polychrome Construction, Inc., for the Corporation Yard Exterior Painting Project and authorizing the City Manager or his designee to execute the contract in the amount of $117,000, plus a 10% contingency of $11,700

5. CITY COUNCIL/STAFF COMMENTS
2 TYPED 5/18/2022 10:15:00 AM
05 24 22
CC

6. COMMUNITY EVENT ANNOUNCEMENTS (3-Minutes)

7. ADOPTION OF ORDINANCES

8. ACTION ITEMS
a. Management Services, re: Authorization for Participation in the Transformative Climate Communities Grant Program

1. Resolution authorizing staff to apply for and to accept a Transformative Climate Communities Grant from the State of California and Authorizing the City Manager, or his/her designee to execute all required documentation for the Grant if awarded b. Glendale Water and Power, re: Contract Award to West Coast Arborists, Inc., to provide Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services for Glendale Water & Power (GWP), Specification No. 3847

1. Motion authorizing the City Manager, or his designee, to enter into and execute a contract with West Coast Arborists, Inc., to furnish equipment and labor for Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services under Specification No. 3847 in the amount of $4,844,130 for three years plus a 15% contingency of $726,620 with an option to extend this contract for two additional one-year terms at $1,614,710 plus a 15% contingency per year
c. Public Works, re: Purchase Order Contract for One Madvac LS125 Electric Vacuum Sweeper

1. Resolution dispensing with competitive bidding and authorizing the Deputy Director of Finance/Purchasing to execute a purchase order contract with Haaker Equipment Co. for the purchase of one Madvac LS125 electric vacuum sweeper and reserving a 10 percent contingency

2. Resolution of appropriation from the Refuse Disposal Fund to provide adequate funding for this recommended procurement
d. Management Services, re: Film Permit Operation

1. Ordinance for introduction amending portions of GMC Chapter 5.92 to allow for third- party issuance and oversight of film permits

2. Resolution removing certain fees from Citywide fee schedule related to film permits

9. HEARINGS
a. Community Development, re: Consideration of Ordinances Amending the Downtown Specific Plan (DSP) and Title 30 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, Regarding Miscellaneous Clean-Ups and Minor Amendments (General Plan Amendment Case No. PGPA2205740 and Zoning Code Text Amendment Case No. PZC2205401)

1. Ordinance for Introduction Amending the Downtown Specific Plan (DSP)

2. Ordinance for Introduction Amending Title 30

10. REPORTS - INFORMATION

11. WRITTEN COMMUNICATIONS

12. ORAL COMMUNICATIONS
Discussion is Limited to Items NOT a Part of this Agenda. Council May Question or Respond to The Speaker But There Will be no Debate or Decision. The City Manager May Refer the Matter to the Appropriate Department for Investigation and Report.

13. NEW BUSINESS
3 TYPED 5/18/2022 10:15:00 AM
05 24 22
CC

14. ADJOURNMENT
4 TYPED 5/18/2022 10:15:00 AM
05 24 22
CC
4a

CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL

AGENDA ITEM
Report: Amendment to the City’s Existing Contract with Magellan Advisors, LLC for the Purpose of Securing Grant Funding for the Fiber Optic Broadband Network Project, and the Wireless Service Expansion initiative.

1. Motion authorizing the City Manager, or his designee, to amend the existing Professional Services Agreement (PSA) with Magellan Advisors, LLC in the amount of $250,000 for grant funding consultancy to secure grant funding for the Fiber Optic Network Expansion project and the Wireless Service Expansion initiative.

COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Consent Calendar
Approved for May 24, 2022 calendar

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The previously approved Fiber Business Plan recommended that the City of Glendale increase its presence in Glendale’s telecommunications market with a service offering for business customers marketed/sold (a) directly to the end user customer or (b) indirectly through resellers and other service providers. The recommended service offerings include Dark Fiber, Optical Wavelength, Metro Ethernet, and Dedicated Internet Access.

Total expenses to complete installation of the fiber broadband network will be upwards of $10 million. This includes about $6 million for constructing the middle mile and $600,000 for the transport network. Additional expenses for items such as the network electronics at the five Point of Presence (PoP) sites, setting up the Network Operations Center, and hiring additional staff to manage and maintain operation of the network are yet to be determined.

The federal Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act (IIJA) designates $65 billion to close the digital divide and invest in broadband. Under the IIJA, the Broadband Equity Access, and Deployment (BEAD) program has $42.5 billion earmarked for broadband infrastructure projects. $1 billion is available in the Middle Mile Grant program for installing middle mile broadband infrastructure.
5 of 325
24 a
3 3
1 3
Staff is seeking approval to utilize the services of a consultant with specific expertise in fiber, wireless and broadband networks to secure grant funding for the City’s Fiber Optic Broadband Network Project and Wireless Service Expansion initiative. Magellan Advisors (Magellan), the City’s existing consultant for the Fiber Optic Broadband Network Project and the Wireless Service Expansion initiative, has the specialized experience and expertise to secure grant funding.

COUNCIL PRIORITIES
Mobility/Connectivity/Safety: The new fiber optic network will result in creating new broadband communications network that will provide business customers, anchor institutions and the City with connectivity to high speed communication services. Expansion of wireless services leverages the existing and new fiber optic network infrastructure by providing flexible, easy to access high-speed internet service via wireless connections that will serve constituents and support City operations.
Infrastructure: The Fiber Optic Broadband Network Project will result in installing of new fiber optic telecommunications infrastructure for delivering broadband network services. The Wireless Service Expansion initiative will result in the implementation of wireless telecommunications infrastructure for delivering wireless network services.

RECOMMENDATION
Authorize the City Manager, or his designee, to amend the existing Professional Services Agreement (PSA) with Magellan for an additional $250,000 to the contract, and add the task of grant fund consulting to secure grant funding from available federal, state and regional programs by researching available grant funding programs, determining City’s eligibility, manage the process for applying for the funds, prepare reports to the grantor and to administer the grant, if approved.

BACKGROUND
The City of Glendale is in the process of implementing the Fiber Business Plan which was approved by the City Council on August 30, 2016. The plan recommended that GWP provide service offerings including Dark Fiber, Optical Wavelength, Metro Ethernet, and Dedicated Internet Access.

The Fiber Business Plan inferred that Glendale’s business market is very comparable to those in other cities that have generated between $2M and $4M annually in new revenues from telecommunications services sold to businesses after roughly ten years in operation. Glendale could achieve similar results, assuming that adequate network, staff, and business processes are in place to provide service performance and customer support that meet or exceed commercial standards.
6 of 325
34 a
3 3
1 3
On August 18, 2018, the City Council authorized the City Manager to enter into a five- year PSA with Magellan Advisors (Magellan) to provide the City of Glendale with fiber optic business plan implementation and support services. Subsequently, PSA #C106909 for $1,592,676 with Magellan was executed on November 14, 2018. In July 2019, working with Magellan, the City of Glendale hired Vantage Utility Systems (VUS) to complete the engineering design for installing the new fiber optic backbone. VUS completed the design in August 2021. To install the fiber optic backbone, the City of Glendale hired HHS Construction LLC (HHS), through a competitive bidding process, and entered into a contract with HHS for $5.6 million following City Council approval on February 1,2022. Construction of the fiber backbone or middle mile of the fiber broadband network is scheduled to start in May 2022.

The once-in-a lifetime pandemic has exposed the digital divide and the shortfalls in access to the Internet and other online communication systems in this country. This has resulted in unprecedented amount of funds being made available by the federal and state governments for installing broadband communication infrastructure. The City’s the Fiber Optic Broadband Network Project and Wireless Service Expansion initiative have a very good chance of qualifying for funding from the billions of dollars made available by the federal government in the IIJA of 2021.

Under the IIJA, the BEAD program has designated $42.5 billion to support broadband infrastructure and deployment projects. $1 billion of BEAD program funding has been designated for the Middle Mile Grant program to install middle mile broadband infrastructure. Additionally, the IIJA includes State Digital Equity Planning and Capacity Grants for states to promote the achievement of digital equity and inclusion.

California SB156 calls out a $6 billion investment over three (3) years to expand broadband infrastructure, increase affordability and enhance access to broadband for all Californians. SB156 designates $3.25 billion to develop, acquire, construct, maintain and operate a statewide “open-access middle-mile” network. Also, SB156 allocates $2.75 billion for last-mile infrastructure grant programs that will be administered by the California Public Utilities Commission. Last mile initiatives and supporting programs include the following:

Broadband Technical Assistance - $50 million total to help prepare local governments & Tribes for broadband infrastructure investments. Funding can be used for public entity or consultant costs to create Joint Powers Authorities, and for other costs to prepare to deploy broadband infrastructure, including for environmental permitting, engineering, and design activities.

Loan Loss Reserve - $750 million to enable local governments & nonprofits to secure financing for broadband infrastructure. A form of credit enhancement, or a type of insurance, that helps lenders control for the risk that loans will not be repaid.

This new funding will provide collateral to local governments for bond financing. The US Department of Energy operates a similar loan loss reserve program. 7 of 325
44 a
3 3
1 3
Federal Funding Account - $ 2 billion funding for last-mile broadband infrastructure projects.

California Advanced Services Fund (CASF) ~up to $150 million per year to assist with broadband infrastructure deployment & adoption in public housing, Tribes, & unserved areas. Broadband Adoption, Consortia, and Infrastructure grants are supported by the CASF broadband grant.

Broadband Public Housing Account - The revamped CASF Broadband Public Housing Account Grants will provide grants to connect qualifying low-income housing, such as publicly supported housing communities, with infrastructure to provide free internet service.

To secure the funds under these programs, the City needs the services of a qualified grant funding consultant who is specialized in the telecommunication industry. Magellan Advisors has that specific experience, and has a proven track record of successfully working on grants for several municipalities, municipal utilities and cooperatives.

The City has a grant writer under contract and staff had a meeting with them.

Unfortunately, this firm does not have the experience and specialized expertise working on telecommunications grants. A considerable amount of work needs to be performed researching the availability of funds, applying for grants, following up on the application, answering questions from the grantor and, if awarded, administering the grant. The City does not have the sufficient staff with the necessary experience and specialized expertise working on telecommunications grants to perform these tasks.

ANALYSIS
Magellan has been helping the City staff with the design of the new fiber optic broadband network since 2018. Magellan has also helped in hiring VUS for the engineering design of the Fiber Optic Broadband Network Project, and HHS Construction LLC for the construction of the backbone. Also, Magellan has helped staff in selecting CCI Systems to install the transport network for the system and to establish connectivity between a pair of City Data Centers and the carrier hotel in downtown Los Angeles.

Magellan has over 15 years of experience in the planning, design, implementation and operation of broadband services for over 400 municipalities and utilities. Magellan has successfully managed the deployment of over 50 municipal broadband networks across North America. Recent clients include City of Portsmouth, VA, City of Rancho Cucamonga, CA, Pasadena Water & Power, City of Pasadena, CA, Newport Utilities, Newport, TN and Riverside Public Utilities, Riverside, CA. Magellan has helped at least ten municipal utilities with grant funding services in the past. Magellan’s proposed scope of work includes three different phases as outlined below. 8 of 325
54 a
3 3
1 3
Phase I will involve identifying what grants are available; determine eligibility of our broadband project and wireless initiative for the grant funding; review program requirements; compliance; reporting and eligible costs; identify time lines and milestones for submission among the top programs; determine the total amount of available funding for Glendale’s projects and initiative, and identify ideal grant size. In this phase, Magellan will optimize fiber and wireless projects to support funding requirements and provide an executive summary to the City with specific priorities, requirements, timeframes and next steps to apply for funding.

Phase II would be actual grant writing/application and exercising due diligence with the funding agency. Most grant applications take 1-3 months to write and have an associated 2-4-month due diligence period.

Phase III would commence upon the City receiving a grant funding award. During this phase, Magellan would manage funds, compliance, reporting and overall program management.

Staff is requesting that $250,000 be added to the existing PSA with Magellan to cover the cost of grant funding consultancy as explained above. Magellan has extensive experience and expertise in telecommunications grant funding consulting, and has been successful in securing grants from federal and state government programs for several clients including municipal utilities. Magellan would pursue grant funding available in IIJA of 2021 and other federal, state and regional government programs. Staff is confident that the subject project and initiative stand a very good chance of qualifying for grants from the billions of dollars available for broadband infrastructure in IIJA and other programs. In the event of getting approved for the grant, it is more than likely that the expenses incurred by the City for using the services of Magellan for grant funding consultancy could be reimbursable under the grant.

Project Description: To secure grant funding for fiber optic broadband network project and wireless service expansion
initiative.

RFP Approved: N/A
Advertisement Method: N/A

RFP Issued: N/A
RFP Due Date: N/A
Company Name(s) and
Proposal Amount(s):

N/A

Selection Criteria
(If SS, list applicable
Provision):

N/A

Consultant(s): Magellan Advisors

9 of 325
64 a
3 3
1 3
New / Existing
Consultant(s):

Magellan Advisors
Procurement Method
(RFP / SS):

N/A

Contract Term:

Five years per existing contract

Project Begins:

TBD

Project Ends:

TBD

Change Orders (When Applicable)
Company name: Magellan Advisors
Original Approved
Contract Amount:
$1,592,676
Approved Contingency: $159,268
Change Order History: N/A
This Change Order
(Increase):
$250,000
New Contract Total (If
Approved):
$1,842,676

STAKEHOLDERS/OUTREACH
N/A

FISCAL IMPACT
The grant funding consultancy amendment to the Professional Services Agreement with Magellan Advisors will cost $250,000. The Water & Power department budget can absorb this cost and therefore no new appropriations is being requested at this time.

The funding is outlined below:

Existing Appropriation
Amount Account String Funding Source
$250,000 GL: 43110-5830-GWP-0020-P0000-
PL: E30072
Electric
Depreciation Fund

ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW
Not applicable. The requested action is not subject to environmental review since it seeks to hire a consultant to assist in securing grant funding.

CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE
In accordance with the City Campaign Finance Ordinance No. 5744, the following are the names and business addresses of the members of the board of directors, the 10 of 325
74 a
3 3
1 3
chairperson, CEO, COO, CFO, Subcontractors and any person or entity with more than ten percent interest in the company proposed for contract in this agenda item report:

Officers of Magellan Advisors LLC:

Full Name Title Business Address City State Zip
John Honker Chief Executive
Officer/President
999 18th St. Suite
3000 Denver CO 80202
Courtney
Violette
Chief Financial
Officer
999 18th St. Suite
3000 Denver CO 80202
Subcontractors of Magellan Advisors, LLC:

Full Name Title Business Address City State Zip
N/A
Ownership Interest in more than ten percent in Magellan Advisors LLC:

Full Name Title Business Address City State Zip
N/A

ALTERNATIVES
Alternative 1: Authorize the addition of the new task and additional funding to the existing PSA with Magellan Advisors, as described herein.

Alternative 2: Not authorize the requested action herein which will delay the City’s ability to secure grant funding for fiber optic network and wireless service expansion.

Alternative 3: The City Council may consider any other alternative not currently proposed by staff.

ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:

Craig Kuennen, Assistant General Manager - Business Services Varghese George, P.E., Senior Electrical Engineer/Fiber Services Manager Approved by:

Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager

EXHIBITS / ATTACHMENTS
None.
11 of 325

M O T I O N
Moved by Council Member ________________________________, seconded by Council Member __________________________________, that the Council of the City of Glendale hereby authorizes the City Manager, or her designee, to enter into an amendment to the existing Professional Services Agreement (Contract No. C106909) between the City of Glendale and Magellan Advisors to add the task of grant funding consultancy to secure grant funding for the Fiber Optic Network Project and increasing the contract amount by $250,000 for a new not to exceed contract amount of $1,842,676. The City Manager, or her designee, is authorized to execute said amendment, subject to approval by the City Attorney.

Vote as follows:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:
12 of 325
4b

CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL

AGENDA ITEM
Report: Professional Services Agreement (PSA) with Insight Public Sector, Inc.

1. Motion authorizing the City Manager, or his designee, to enter into a four- year Professional Services Agreement (PSA) with Insight Public Sector Inc. to provide Glendale Water and Power (GWP) with remote infrastructure and security monitoring, managed and professional services, and additional direct IT support in the amount of $1,495,300, plus an additional $40,000 for 200 hours of Direct Information Technology (IT) support and advanced specialized services for GWP for a total not-to exceed amount of $1,535,300 per year for four years, with the option for two additional one- year terms as approved in said year’s budget.

COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Consent
Approved for May 24, 2022 calendar

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Managed Services Support has been a necessary component of the GWP Utility Modernization Program since 2011. Managed Services Support provides 24x7 remote and security monitoring and management of GWP's business systems and mission critical systems such as SCADA and AMI Backhaul and assets such as firewall, databases, servers, network equipment, and direct technology support as well as onsite 24/7 emergency support.

GWP staff requested proposals to review and evaluate vendor effectiveness in providing GWP with 24x7 remote infrastructure and security monitoring, managed and professional services and found that Insight Public Sector met the minimum qualifications. The recommended contract with Insight Public Sector, Inc. would cost $1,495,300 plus an additional $40,000 for 200 hours of Direct IT support and advanced specialized services for a total not-to-exceed amount of $1,535,300 per year for four years, with the option for two additional one year terms as approved in said year’s budget.
13 of 325
24 b
3 3
3 6

COUNCIL PRIORITIES
Infrastructure: The remote infrastructure and security monitoring, managed and professional services would provide GWP 24x7 remote infrastructure and security monitoring and management of GWP’s Business and mission critical systems and assets, as well as direct IT support and onsite emergency support.

RECOMMENDATION
Authorize the City Manager, or his designee, to enter into and execute a contract with Insight Public Sector, Inc. to provide GWP with 24x7 remote infrastructure and security monitoring, managed and professional services in the amount of $1,495,300 plus an additional $40,000 for 200 hours of direct technology support and advanced specialized services for GWP for a total not-to-exceed amount of $1,535,300 per year for four years with the option for two additional one year terms as approved in said year’s budget.

BACKGROUND
Managed Services Support has been a necessary component of the GWP Utility Modernization Program since 2011. Managed Services Support provides 24x7 remote infrastructure and security monitoring and management of GWP's business systems and industrial control mission critical systems such as Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) and Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) Backhaul and assets such as firewall, databases, servers, network equipment, and direct technology support, as well as onsite 24/7 emergency support. Insight Public Sector, Inc. previously known as PCM, Inc., has successfully provided these services for GWP and City Information Technology Department (IT) since 2013.

On June 13, 2017, following a competitive Request for Proposals (RFP) process, the City Council awarded a four-year Master Services Agreement (MSA) to Insight to provide GWP with remote infrastructure monitoring and managed and professional services.

In March of 2022, GWP issued an RFP to review and evaluate vendor effectiveness in providing GWP with remote infrastructure and security monitoring, managed and professional services. The City's IT and GWP sought a proposer with proven experience in the business and technical aspects of providing 24x7 remote and security monitoring, and management of utility business systems and mission critical assets such as data bases, servers, network and backhaul equipment. The IT and GWP Departments set minimum qualifications to include a minimum of five years' experience within the past ten years providing managed services to a city, government, or utility with staff located within 75 miles. The selected proposer must also provide onsite emergency support for GWP’s two data centers and have experience in network design and architecture with scalability, growth, and the future in mind. GWP takes security and privacy seriously, and the Proposer must implement and maintain stringent security procedures and practices.

The RFP was emailed to six prospective technology and infrastructure managed and professional services vendors, and was posted on the City’s website. GWP received two additional prospective vendors’ inquiries from the City’s website RFP Bid Page and 14 of 325
34 b
3 3
3 6
answered 44 additional questions from prospective proposers. Out of a total of eight (8) prospective vendors only one, Insight Public Sector, Inc., responded. IPS meets all requirements and criteria of the RFP.

Insight Public Sector (IPS) was founded in 1988 and headquartered in Herndon, Virginia. IPS, previously known as PCM Inc. and EnPointe Technology Sales, Inc., is a Technology Marketplace Vendor who brings decades of experience serving the public sector with a capable team of engineers, technology specialists and service delivery professionals including substantial experience with government agencies including eight (8) years of successful experience providing such services for GWP and the City IT departments. It has demonstrated its ability and commitment to continue to meet GWP’s and City’s IT expectations with their proposal.

ANALYSIS
Upon review of IPS’s proposal, the RFP selection committee comprised of GWP and City IT personnel, recommends the selection of IPS to provide remote security and infrastructure monitoring, managed and professional services for GWP.

IPS has provided eight years of successful experience providing 24x7 remote managed and security monitoring, managed and professional services for GWP and the City IT.

IPS has been very responsive and has assisted GWP with most technology and network infrastructure projects including providing a 24x7 Security Information and Event Management (SIEM) platform which provides GWP with next-generation security detection; analytics and response; Database Administration (DBA) services for our data warehouse; VMWare, and SQL Clusters. ISP supports and manages the security, firewalls, network infrastructure and assisted in building out our segregated isolated ICS domain which supports GWP’s critical infrastructure systems and assets for electric and water SCADA systems. IPS has demonstrated its ability and commitment to continue to meet GWP’s and City IT’s expectations.

IPS included full résumés for four essential local personnel and a detailed scope of work covering the RFP requirements. Neither GWP or City IT have available staffing to support the GWP utility network infrastructure, critical water, and electric SCADA systems. GWP would need to hire 3-4 highly skilled IT professionals to perform and provide these specialized services.

The evaluation committee found that IPS meets the minimum qualifications necessary to be considered in the RFP evaluation and recommend awarding a Professional Services Agreement (PSA) to IPS.
15 of 325
44 b
3 3
3 6
Project Description: Remote Security and Infrastructure Monitoring, Managed and Professional services

RFP Approved: February 8, 2022
Advertisement Method: Direct email to six (6) Vendors and City Website RFP Bid Page

RFP Issued: March 3, 2022

RFP Due Date: March 31, 2022

Company Name(s) and
Proposal Amount(s):

Insight Public Sector, Inc.

Selection Criteria
(If SS, list applicable
Provision):

1.Approach and understanding of the RFP’s requirements 20%

2. Qualifications and experience of essential personnel 25%

3. Ability to deliver 20%

4. Overall cost 20%

5. Contract/Security/insurance compliance 15%

Consultant(s):

Insight Public Sector, Inc.

New / Existing
Consultant(s):

Existing
Procurement Method
(RFP / SS):

RFP

Contract Term:

4 Years with the option for two additional one year
terms.

Project Begins:

July 1, 2022

Project Ends:

June 30, 2026

Change Orders (When Applicable)
Company name:

Original Approved
Contract Amount:

Approved Contingency:

Change Order History:

This Change Order
(Increase):

New Contract Total (If
Approved):

16 of 325
54 b
3 3
3 6

STAKEHOLDERS/OUTREACH
GWP implemented technology and systems which has significantly transformed the utility and its personnel, creating a positive impact on utility operations and customer satisfaction. As a result, GWP modernized its grid technology by integrating Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI), outage management system, distribution monitoring, industrial control systems, enterprise data management systems and various customer engagement programs to support present-day interaction with its water and power customers. The professional services to provide GWP with 24x7 remote infrastructure and security monitoring, managed and professional services will provide reliability, stability, security, and support the implementation new technology for GWP and its customers.

FISCAL IMPACT
The proposed cost for professional services is $1,495,300 plus an additional $40,000 for 200 hours of Direct IT support and advanced specialized services for a total not-to exceed amount of $1,535,300 per year for four years totaling to $6,141,200, with the option for two additional one-year terms starting fiscal year 2022-2023. Funding for the contract is being proposed as a part of the Information Technology Department’s FY 22-23 budget. Funding for future years will be requested as a part of the annual citywide budget process.

Amount Account String Funding Source
$1,535,300 43110-6030-ISD-5501-P0000 ISD Infrastructure Fund

ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW
This item is not subject to CEQA review.

CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE
The names and business addresses of the members of the board of directors, the chairperson, CEO, COO, CFO, Subcontractors and any person or entity with more than 10% interest in the company proposed for contract in this Agenda Item Report are attached in Exhibit 1, in accordance with the City, in accordance with the City Campaign Finance Ordinance No. 5744.

ALTERNATIVES
Alternative 1: Approve the staff recommendation to enter into a MSA with Insight Public Sector, Inc. to continue providing GWP with remote Security and Infrastructure Monitoring, Managed and professional Services and direct IT support.

Alternative 2: Not to authorize the requested which will cause GWP to not have 24x7 remote manages services and security monitoring of the utility enterprise and industrial control systems which may leave GWP vulnerable.

Alternative 3: Consider any other alternative not currently proposed by staff. 17 of 325
64 b
3 3
3 6

ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:

Craig Kuennen, Assistant General Manager - Business Services Michelle Nall, Utility Business System Support Administrator Approved by:

Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager

EXHIBITS / ATTACHMENTS
Exhibit 1: Campaign Finance Disclosure for Insight Public Sector, Inc. 18 of 325

M O T I O N
Moved by Council Member ________________________________, seconded by Council Member __________________________________, that the City Manager, or his designee, is hereby authorized to enter into and execute a four-year Professional Services Agreement with Insight Public Sector Inc. to provide Glendale Water and Power (GWP) with remote infrastructure and security monitoring, managed and professional services and additional direct IT support in the amount of $1,495,300, plus an additional $40,000 for 200 hours of Direct Information Technology (IT) support and advanced specialized service for GWP for a total not-to-exceed amount of $1,535,300 per year for four years, with the option for two additional one-year terms as approved in said year’s budget. The form of such agreement shall be subject to the approval of the City Attorney.

Vote as follows:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:
19 of 325
City of Glendale

DISCLOSURE - CAMPAIGN FINANCE ORDINANCE
The City Council adopted Ordinance No. 5744, “Campaign Finance Ordinance,” which became effective on September 9, 2011, and amended it with Ordinance No. 5768, which became effective on March 15, 2012 (“the Ordinance”). The Ordinance prohibits: (1) A contractor* (including a subcontractor**)― who has a contract with the City of Glendale (“City”), Economic Development Department (“EDD”), or the Housing Authority of the City of Glendale (“HA”) and that contract is subject to approval by the City Council, EDD, or HA― from making a contribution to a City Council member, EDD member, HA member, City Clerk, or City Treasurer; and (2) Council members, EDD members, and HA members from voting on matters concerning a contract with a person who has provided a campaign contribution.

The Ordinance applies to a contractor whose contract requires the City Council’s, EDD's, or HA’s approval. A contract with the City, EDD, or HA is known as a “City Contract.” The Ordinance also applies to a subcontractor who has a subcontract through a City Contract. The Ordinance excludes a competitively bid contract awarded to the lowest responsible bidder.

To assist members of the City Council, EDD, and HA before they vote on a matter regarding a City Contract, the Ordinance requires City staff to prepare this report which discloses certain information about: the contractor receiving the City Contract, and the subcontractor(s) working under the City Contract.

A contractor must provide the information listed below when: A subcontractor must provide the information listed below when:
•The City Contract has a total anticipated or actual value of $50,000 or more; or • The subcontract through a City Contract has a total anticipated or actual value of $25,000 or more; or
• A combination or series of City Contracts have a value of $50,000 or more. • A combination or series of subcontract s, for the same or different projects, have an aggregate value of $25,000 or
more. Information that must be disclosed: ● Name of the person, entity, or organization (i.e., the Contractor or Subcontractor) ● Name of the Chief Executive Officer/Pre
siden t
● Chief Operating Officer
● Chief Financial Officer
● Chairper
son
● All members of the Board of Directors
● All persons who own more than 10% of the perso
n, entity, or organi zation
● Name of any campaign committee owned or controll ed by the person, entity, or organization Please complete the following disclosure form:

Contractor(s)*:

Name Address
Full Name Title Business Address City State Zip
Chairperson
Chief Executive Officer / President
Chief Operating Officer
Chief Financial Officer
Board of Directors
More than 10% interest owner
*“Contractor” is the person, entity, or organization that is the party, or prospective party, to the contract with the City, EDD, or HA or any member of that person’s, entity’s, or organization’s Board of Direct ors, its Chairperson, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Chief Operat ing Officer, any person with an ownership interest of more than ten percent (10%) in that person, entit y, or organization, and any campaign committee that is o wned or controlled by that person, entity, or organization. Above please disclose these persons’ name and business address.

Insight Public Sector, Inc.
2701 E. Insight Way Chandler, AZ 85286
Timothy A. Crown
2701 E. Insight Way
Chandler
AZ
85286
Joyce A. Mullen
2701 E. Insight Way
Chandler
AZ
85286
Suma Nallapati
2701 E. Insight Way
Chandler
AZ
85286
Glynis Bryan
2701 E. Insight Way
Chandler
AZ
85286
2701 E. Insight Way
Chandler
AZ
85286
BlackRock, Inc; FMR LLC; The Vanguard Group
20 of 325

Rev. 6/7/12 J:\FILES\DOCFILES\ORD\CAMPAIGN CONTRIBUTION\DISCLOSURE FORM – CONTRACTOR – 6-7-12.doc Subcontractor(s)**:

Name Address
Full Name Title Business Address City State Zip
Chairperson
Chief Executive Officer / President
Chief Operating Officer
Chief Financial Officer
Board of Directors
More than 10% interest owner
** “Subcontractor” is the person, entity, or organization that has entered into a contract for the performance of all or a portion of the work undertaken under an agreement with an architect, design professional, engineer, or gener al or prime contract, usually by a general or prime contrac tor. Subcontractor includes any member of that person’s, entity’s, or organization’s Board of Directors, its Chairperson, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financ ial Officer, Chief Operating Officer, any person with an ownership interest of more than ten percent (10%) in that person, entity, or organization, and any campaign committee that is owned or controlled by that person, entity, or organization. Above please disclose these persons’ name and business address.

Campaign Committee owned or controlled by:

Title Business Address City State Zip

CERTIFICATION
On behalf of the above-named Contractor Subcontractor:
• I acknowledge that I have a continuing obligation to update this disclosure form if I substitute― or if I select additional ― architects, design professionals, contractors, or subcontractors within ten (10) days of the selection or change; and • I hereby certify that:
ƒ I have identified all persons for which the Ordinance requires disclo sure; ƒ The information in this disclosure form (and any attachment to this form) is true, accurate, correct, and complete; and ƒ I have been legally authorized to su bmit this disclosure form.

In total, this disclosure form (including attachments) is pages.

Executed on: , 20 , at: , California.

Signature: Print Full Name:

Address:

Phone Number: E-mail Address:
■
Lisanne Steinheiser
2701 E. Insight Way, Chandler, AZ 85286
480.333.3012
[email protected]
21 of 325

CampaignFinanceDisclosureF
Final Audit Report 2022-04-15
Created: 2022-04-15
By: Danielle Rugg ([email protected])
Status: Signed
Transaction ID: CBJCHBCAABAARa_rwI4AK1zuSZ0y0oIWdPklJSGdDMvf "CampaignFinanceDisclosureF" History
Document created by Danielle Rugg ([email protected]) 2022-04-15 - 10:11:31 PM GMT
Document emailed to Lisanne Steinheiser ([email protected]) for signature 2022-04-15 - 10:12:28 PM GMT
Email viewed by Lisanne Steinheiser ([email protected]) 2022-04-15 - 11:52:49 PM GMT
Document e-signed by Lisanne Steinheiser ([email protected]) Signature Date: 2022-04-15 - 11:53:03 PM GMT - Time Source: server Agreement completed.
2022-04-15 - 11:53:03 PM GMT
22 of 325
4c

CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL

AGENDA ITEM
Report: Adopt the Plans and Specifications for the Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Installation Phase 2 Project.
1) Resolution adopting the Plans and Specification for the Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Installation Phase 2 Project, Specification No. 3927, Plan Nos. 50-688, 50-689, 50-690; and directing the City Clerk to advertise for bids.

COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Consent Calendar
Approved for May 24, 2022 calendar

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Plans and specifications have been completed for the installation of Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) at various locations. Staff respectfully requests City Council adopt the project plans and specification and authorize advertising for bids. 23 of 325
24 c
3 2
3 4

COUNCIL PRIORITIES
Infrastructure & Mobility: This project will significantly improve uncontrolled pedestrian crossing locations and improve pedestrian and intersection safety.

RECOMMENDATION
Approve the resolution adopting the Plans and Specification for the RRFB Installation Phase 2 Project, Specification No. 3927, Plan Nos. 50-688, 50-689, 50-690; and direct the City Clerk to advertise for bids.

BACKGROUND
A major part of road safety challenges involve addressing uncontrolled pedestrian crossing locations. Uncontrolled pedestrian crossing locations occur where sidewalks or designated walkways intersect a roadway at a location where no traffic control (i.e. traffic signal or STOP sign) is present. These crossing types occur at intersections (where they may be marked or unmarked) or midblock locations.

The Public Works Department is addressing uncontrolled pedestrian crossing challenges by implementing the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) guidelines.

These include a variety of safety improvements including, crosswalk visibility enhancements, Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon (PHB), and RRFB, amongst others.

City staff conducted an analysis of the current inventory of uncontrolled crossing locations within the City, and selected three critical and priority locations where countermeasures could be applied. These project locations are as follows:
Wilson Avenue at Belmont Street
Colorado Street at Porter Street
Colorado Street at Lincoln Avenue
The scope of work includes the following:
Installation of RRFBs;
Installation of new curb ramps to meet current Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements;
Installation of Curb Extensions and pedestrian refuge islands; and, Installation of new striping and pavement markings, including high visibility crosswalks and signage.

ANALYSIS
To ensure competitive proposals, the City will advertise the project on multiple plan holders’ web sites who publish requests for proposals for projects and distribute the information to their extensive network of consultant, contractor, and construction industry contacts.

The project will also be advertised in a local newspaper, the Glendale Independent, prior to bid opening, as well as on eBidboard, which is a web enabled data service to 24 of 325
34 c
3 2
3 4
the public sector, for the dissemination of the building and construction project proposals to their large number of member contractors and consultants.

Finally, the project bidding documents will also be posted on the City’s website.

The construction of this project is anticipated to begin in September 2022 and scheduled for completion by March 2023. Material lead times will vary based on the manufacturer’s demand at the time of procurement; therefore, the schedule will be adjusted accordingly.

Project Description: Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Installations Phase 2 Project
Plans/Specs Adopted: May 24, 2022
Advertisement Method: Bid America, The Blue Book, Construction Bid Board, Construct Connect, Direct Connection, PlanIT
Reprographics, Dodge Data & Analytics, eBidBoard,
Glendale Independent Newspaper, City’s website
Specs to be Issued: May 25, 2022 – June 15, 2022
Bids to be Opened: June 15, 2022
Company Name
and Bid Amount:

TBD
Recommended
Contractor(s)
TBD
New / Existing
Contractor(s):

TBD
Procurement Method
(Bid / SS):

Bid
Contract Term:

6 Months

Construction
Phase Begins:

September 2022
Construction
Phase Ends:

March 2023

The engineer’s estimate for the construction of this project is between $400,000 and $500,000.

Funding for this project has been budgeted from the State Gas Tax Fund (4020) and CIP Reimbursement Fund (4090).
25 of 325
44 c
3 2
3 4

STAKEHOLDERS/OUTREACH
The RRFB installation benefits to the community will include the following:
Improved safety for all users; and,
Increased sight distance of pedestrians and users of the crosswalks.

The Public Works Department was able to secure Cycle 10 Highway Safety Improvement Program Local (HSIPL) funds to fund a portion of the construction and construction management of the RRFB Installation Phase 2 Project. Caltrans obligated funds for the construction and construction contingency in the amount of $249,975. This obligation requires a minimum 11.47 percent local match. The City will construct the project and then invoice Caltrans for reimbursement. Caltrans has issued a Finance Letter (E-76) authorizing the City to proceed with the construction phase of the project.

Furthermore, outreach on this project continues to occur through a dedicated website for the project. The website introduces the public to the project and to the project team, explains the scope of work and project locations, highlights the project phase, and provides the public with staff contact information for questions, discussion and/or input.

Citywide Pedestrian Plan
The project locations are also identified in the 2021 adopted Citywide Pedestrian Plan in the short-term phase as pedestrian safety corridors to be implemented within the first five years. Therefore, the project will enhance existing marked crossings in alignment with best practices in order to minimize turning-movement conflicts with motorists, and will include the installation of high-visibility crosswalks, curb extensions, and median refuge islands.

FISCAL IMPACT
There is no fiscal impact associated with this report.

ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW
The Project is categorically exempt from environmental review because of CEQA Guidelines §§ 15301.

CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE
Not Applicable.

ALTERNATIVES
Alternative 1: Adopt the Plans and Specification for the RRFB Installation Phase 2 Project, and direct the City Clerk to advertise for bids.

Alternative 2: Do not authorize the issuance of Plans and Specification for the RRFB Installation Phase 2 Project. Doing so, however, will not improve the uncontrolled crossing locations.

Alternative 3: The City Council may consider any other alternative not proposed by staff.
26 of 325
54 c
3 2
3 4

ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:

Sarkis Oganesyan, P.E., Acting Deputy Public Works Director/City Engineer Marc David, Project Manager
Approved by:

Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager

EXHIBITS/ATTACHMENTS
Exhibit 1: Project Location Map.
27 of 325
RESOLUTION NO. __________

A RESOLUTION OF THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

ADOPTING THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATION FOR THE
RECTANGULAR RAPID FLASHING BEACON (RRFB) INSTALLATION PHASE 2 PROJECT, SPECIFICATION NO. 3927, PLAN NOS. 50-688, 50-689, 50-690; AND DIRECTING THE CITY CLERK TO ADVERTISE FOR BIDS.

BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:

SECTION 1.The Plans and Specification on file in the City Clerk’s office for the Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) Installation Phase 2 Project including the various documents incorporated therein, are hereby approved, adopted, designated and shall hereafter be known as Specification No. 3927, Plan Nos. 50-688, 50-689, and 50-690.

SECTION 2.The City Clerk is hereby directed to advertise for bids for the work, equipment and materials described in these Plans and Specifications adopted by this Resolution.

Adopted this _____ day of ____________, 2022.
____________________________
Mayor, City of Glendale
ATTEST:
__________________________
City Clerk

STATE OF CALIFORNIA )

COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES )

CITY OF GLENDALE )
I, Aram Adjemian, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, certify that the foregoing Resolution No. _____________ was Adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, at a regular meeting held on the _____ day of _________________, 2022, the same was adopted by the following vote:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain: ___________________________
City Clerk
28 of 325

ORANGE GROVE AV

E WINDSOR RDE MAPLE STPORTER ST

E GARFIELD AV

BELMONT ST
E CALIFORNIA AVZERR CTSINCLAIR AVBARRINGTON WYMcHENRY RD

HARVARD STBROADWAYWILSON AV

COLORADO STADAMS STS CEDAR STCHESTNUT STELK AVLOMITA AVS BELMONT STS CEDAR ST

N GLENDALE AV

RICHARD AVHARVEY DRVALLEJO DRHOLLY DRWILSON TERRCALIFORNIA AV

E HARVARD STCAMPUS STCARR DRMAYNARD STSINCLAIR AVLUKENS PLWILSON AV

VERDUGO RD

DIXON STROCKGLEN AVE MAPLE STKENT PL

STSINCLAIR AVELINCOLN AVZINNIA LNGRISWORD ST

N CHEVY CHASE DRSTANLEY AV

CARLTON DROLIVE STFISCHER STWING ST

LANGLEY

NOT TO SCALE
EXHIBIT 1: PROJECT LOCATION MAPRECTANGULAR RAPID FLASHING BEACON (RRFB) INSTALLATIONSPHASE 2 PROJECTSPECIFICATION NO. 3927

LEGENDRECTANGULAR RAPID FLASHING BEACONCITY LIMITS
29 of 325
4d

CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL

AGENDA ITEM
Report: Contract Award for the Corporation Yard Exterior Painting Project, per Specification No. 3915.

1. Motion awarding a Contract to Polychrome Construction, Inc., for the Corporation Yard Exterior Painting Project and authorizing the City Manager or his designee to execute the contract in the amount of $117,000, plus a 10% contingency of $11,700.

COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Consent Calendar
Approved for May 24,2022 calendar

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The advertised scope of work for the Corporation Yard Exterior Painting Project includes the materials, preparation, and painting of the entire exterior of the municipal structure at 541 W. Chevy Chase Drive. The municipal structure is a 73,000 square feet, single story, concrete building with a rooftop parking deck. The current tenants include Public Works Street Maintenance, Public Works Fleet Services and Warehouse, and Community Services and Parks field services. The structure was last painted over 18 years ago and is currently in need of new paint. Maintaining the exterior surfaces of this facility is essential to maintaining the integrity of the structure and aesthetics of the overall property.

The City Clerk received bids from 10 contractors for the Corporate Yard Exterior Painting Project and Public Works staff found Polychrome Construction, Inc. has provided the lowest responsive bid, and they are a responsible bidder. The recommended contract with Polychrome Construction, Inc., is $117,000 with a 10% contingency due to the complexity and size of the intended work.
30 of 325
24 d
3 3
4 0

COUNCIL PRIORITIES
Infrastructure and Facilities: Painting the building, and proper maintenance, will provide at least 15-years of protection for the structure and extend its useful life.

RECOMMENDATION
The Public Works Department recommends City Council authorize the City Manager or his designee to execute a contract with Polychrome Construction, Inc., for the Corporation Yard Exterior Painting Project in the amount of $117,000 plus a 10% contingency ($11,700).

BACKGROUND
The Corporation Yard is located on 541 W. Chevy Chase Drive. The municipal structure includes a rooftop parking deck and houses the main office and shops for the Public Works Department and the Community Services and Parks Department field operations.

Records show that the structure, which is concrete and masonry, was constructed circa 1960 and is located on a 6.5-acre property. Nearly 150 employees report to the Corporation Yard on a daily basis and field operation resources are stored and deployed from this site.

On March 23, 2022, the City hosted a mandatory job walk and twelve (12) contractors attended.

On April 6, 2022, the City received ten (10) bids. [see Analysis section for bids].

ANALYSIS
Upon review of the bid documents submitted, the Polychrome Construction, Inc. bid appears to be significantly less than the current market cost, considering the other bids received and the recent escalation in construction material and labor costs.

Staff checked the State of California Contractors License Board and found that Polychrome Construction, Inc., has the appropriate license which is active and in good standing.

Polychrome Construction, Inc., has satisfactorily performed work on similar projects throughout southern California for many municipalities in the past, and has received positive recommendations from references.

Project Description: Corporation Yard Exterior Painting Project Advertisement Method: city website, eBidBoard, City Clerk, direct invitation Specs Issued: March 1, 2022
Bids Opened Date: April 6, 2022
Company Name(s) and
Bid Amount(s):

1. Polychrome Construction, Inc., $117,000

2. Pacific Construction Group, Inc., $131,000

3. ISR Painting & Wallcovering, Inc., $ 145,000

4. Innovation Painting, Inc., $169,000

5. AJ Fistes Corp., $248,500
31 of 325
34 d
3 3
4 0

6. Prime Painting Contractors, Inc., $265,000

7. Omega Construction Co. Inc., $282,000

8. Color New Co., $295,000

9. US National Corp., $474,950

10.Piana Construction and Painting, Inc., $815,000
Contractor: Polychrome Construction, Inc.

New / Existing Contractor: New
Procurement Method
(Bid / SS):

Bid

Contract Term: 6 Months
Construction Phase
Begins:

July 2022
Construction Phase
Ends:

August 2022

STAKEHOLDERS/OUTREACH
The Corporation Yard is the hub of Public Works and Community Services and Parks field operations. While the onsite administration office is open to the public, most requests for services are received via telephone or online. The Project Manager will work with onsite staff to minimize any interruptions to municipal operations.

FISCAL IMPACT
The Corporation Yard Exterior Painting Project will cost $117,000 plus $11,700 for contingency, which was approved as a part of the FY 2021-22 budget. No new appropriation is being requested at this time. The City Council approved funding is outlined below:

Existing Appropriation
Amount Account String Funding Source
$250,000 43110-6070-PWD-0020-P0000
PWD00592AN
Building Maintenance Fund

ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW
This project is Categorically Exempt under California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) Guidelines as a Class 1 Exemption pursuant to the California Code of Regulations, Title 14, Section 15301.

CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE
Not Applicable.

ALTERNATIVES
Alternative 1: Authorize the City Manager or his designee to execute the contract with Polychrome Construction, Inc., as recommended herein. This would ensure the integrity of the structure and aesthetics of the overall property for years to come.
32 of 325
44 d
3 3
4 0
Alternative 2: Elect not to award the contract as recommended herein. Doing so, however, would delay the maintenance required to preserve the exterior integrity of the building.

Alternative 3: Consider any other alternative nor proposed by staff.

ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:

Arthur Asaturyan, Project Manager
Approved by:

Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager

EXHIBITS / ATTACHMENTS
None
33 of 325
4d
MOTION
Moved by Council Member ,
seconded by Council Member , that the Council of
the City of Glendale finds that, Polychrome Construction, Inc., has provided the lowest responsive bid, and they are a responsible bidder, for the Corporation Yard Exterior Painting Project, as described in Specifications No. 3915, and that the bid of Polychrome Construction, Inc. for the amount of $117,000 is hereby accepted and approved, as recommended by the Director of Public Works, and that all other bids be, and are, hereby rejected. The Council authorizes the City Manager or his designee to execute a contract, subject to approval as to form by the City Attorney, with Polychrome Construction, Inc., in the amount of $117,000.00. The Council further approves a reserve for contingencies in the amount of $11,700.00.

Votes as follows:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:
34 of 325
8a

CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL

AGENDA ITEM
Report: Authorization for Participation in the Transformative Climate Communities Grant Program.

1.Resolution authorizing staff to apply for and to accept a Transformative Climate Communities Grant from the State of California and Authorizing the City Manager, or his/her designee to execute all required documentation for the Grant if awarded.

COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Action Item
Approved for May 24, 2022 calendar

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The California Strategic Growth Council is sponsoring its 4th round of the Transformative Climate Communities (TCC) Program with $35 million in funds available for implementation grant recipients. The vision of the TCC Program is to empower the communities most impacted by pollution to choose their own goals, strategies, and projects to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and local air pollution. These goals are achieved through collaboration between public agencies, community groups, community organizations, local businesses, nonprofits, charities, tribal groups, and/or religious entities.

The City of Glendale has strong ties to its community and takes pride in its civic ownership. Glendale’s success is realized through a community that is safe, prosperous, and rich in cultural offerings. This vision is accomplished with an emphasis on Environmental Stewardship, Housing, and Mobility and Connectivity.

This vision of Glendale aligns multiple strategies included in the TCC Program:
• Equitable Housing and Neighborhood Development
• Land Acquisition for Affordable Housing
• Transit Access and Mobility
• Solar Installation, Energy Efficiency, and Appliance Electrification • Water Efficiency
• Recycling and Waste Management
• Urban Greening and Green Infrastructure
35 of 325
28 a
3 3
1 5
• Health and Well-Being
For these reasons, City staff are confident that the City of Glendale is a great candidate for the TCC Program and intends to apply for the Round 4 Implementation Grant.

COUNCIL PRIORITIES
Environmental Stewardship: Projects in the grant contribute towards climate mitigation, resiliency, and reduction of carbon emissions.

Housing: Projects in the grant application include affordable housing developments and land acquisition for affordable housing.

Mobility and Connectivity: Projects include updates to Glendale’s Beeline buses and outreach further promoting mobility and connectivity in the City.

RECOMMENDATION
That the City Council adopt a resolution that:
authorizes Staff to apply for the TCC grant program, and authorizes the acceptance of the grant funds and execution related documents related thereto, if awarded.

BACKGROUND
The Transformative Climate Communities (TCC) program is sponsored by the California Strategic Growth Council, which brings together state agencies and departments to coordinate activities that support sustainable communities, and emphasize strong economies, social equity, and environmental stewardship. The TCC program is to empower communities most impacted by pollution to choose their own goals, strategies, and projects to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and local air pollution. The TCC program funds development and infrastructure projects that achieve major environmental, health, and economic benefits to California’s most disadvantaged communities.

The TCC program provides funding over 5-years for Implementation Grants and 1-year for Planning Grants. Funding for Implementation Grants ranges from $9 million to $66 million. In the previous round (Round 3), the City of Oakland received $28.2 million, the City of Stockton received $10.8 million, and the City of Riverside received $9 million. This year for Round 4, the California Strategic Growth Council announced $105 million for 3 Implementation grant awards of $35 million each. (Exhibit 1) This program involves community-led, neighborhood-specific projects. Applications into the program require entities and organizations to collaborate as a co-applicant team for each application. Each co-applicant team includes public agencies, community groups, community organizations, local businesses, nonprofits, charities, tribal groups, and/or religious entities. All co-applicants will be involved in executing the projects. Applications also need to demonstrate how the application team will collaborate and work together to execute projects through a Collaborative Stakeholder Structure (CSS). It also highlights how application teams involve communities, community representatives, and community- 36 of 325
38 a
3 3
1 5
based organizations in the program execution.

The CSS is a partnership agreement amongst all groups coming together to apply for the application. The CSS includes a lead applicant who is the point of contact between the application and program team and the California Strategic Growth Council, along with being identified as the grantee who will receive the funds on behalf of the application team. Other groups on the application and program team are co-applicants. The lead applicant will also be responsible for disseminating funds to co-applicants for projects. As part of the TCC program application, if the lead applicant is a public agency City Council is required to adopt a resolution authorizing the public agency to apply, receive, and then execute required documents if awarded the grant.

Additionally, each application includes a variety of projects across applicants. Projects must be within a 5 square mile area that meets Cal Environ's low-income and pollution measures. Projects for the TCC Implementation Grant need to be ready for implementation upon receiving the TCC grant or within 1-year of receiving the grant.

Projects also need to meet at least 3 of the TCC strategies:
• Strategy 1: Equitable Housing and Neighborhood Development • Strategy 2: Land Acquisition for Affordable Housing
• Strategy 3: Transit Access and Mobility Strategy
• Strategy 4: Solar Installation, Energy Efficiency, and Appliance Electrification • Strategy 5: Water Efficiency
• Strategy 6: Recycling and Waste Management
• Strategy 7: Urban Greening and Green Infrastructure
• Strategy 8: Health and Well-Being
• Strategy 9: Indoor Air Quality
• Strategy 10: Community Microgrids
• Strategy 11: Brownfield Redevelopment
A complete description of each strategy can be found in the TCC Guidelines (Exhibit 2).

Though funds are made available for community development and infrastructure projects, the TCC program Implementation Grant can only fund 50% of the total funding required to execute the projects in the application. The lead applicant and co-applicants need to fund the remaining 50%, via donation, grants, loans, or other funding sources. Some projects may receive up to 100% of the grant’s funding or less than 50%. However, 50% of the total funding for the application projects needs to be funded by the applicants. The CSS can include how much each applicant funds for each projects.

The program application is due July 1st, and awardees are announced in October 2022.

ANALYSIS
The City of Glendale is in a strong position to apply for the TCC program. Numerous projects, such as affordable housing and land acquisition, in the City’s pipeline, align with the strategies of the TCC program and fit the project area requirements. The City’s grant 37 of 325
48 a
3 3
1 5
application team is in the process of identifying relevant projects, finding external co- applicants, and formulating the program application.

The areas of Glendale that meet the Cal-Environ measures for low-income and pollution that are eligible for the application are the neighborhoods encompassed by the Interstate 5, the 134 Freeway, and the 2 Freeway. Neighborhoods just North of the 134 Freeway and near the intersection of Interstate 5 freeway and the 134 are also eligible. A map of relevant projects is in Exhibit 3.

The grant application team has identified the Salvation Army and YMCA as external co- applicant organizations. These co-applicants have projects in the eligible project area for the program grant. By working with them, the City builds closer bonds with its community while fulfilling the TCC program criteria.

The City is the lead applicant for the TCC program because many of the projects are City project, and the City has the financial capacity to manage and distribute TCC program funding.

If successful, the $35 million TCC program funds will be distributed to the City over 5- years. The City would distribute funds to co-applicants on a reimbursement basis.

Disbursement of funds from the program commences 6-12 months after announcing the awardees.

Because the TCC program matches project funding, projects in the TCC application are on the City’s development pipeline and have funding allocated. This grant bolsters such funding needs and reduces the City’s allocation.

Co-applicants also have funding allocated for their projects included in the TCC grant application to meet the funding matching criteria of the TCC program.

Next Steps
After City Council adopts the resolution, staff will submit an application and execute the program grant, if awarded. City Council’s adoption of the resolution also allows Staff to submit applications for future TCC grant rounds in the next 5-years.

Completion of the current Round 4 application process of the TCC grant includes:
• Form and define the CSS;
• Showcase how the City, co-applicants, and projects meet TCC thresholds; • Showcase how projects meet TCC eligibilities, strategies, and transformative elements;
• Identify the budget for each project in the TCC application and how much the TCC program will allocate for each project; and
• Engage with community residents for their input into the grant vision and program. 38 of 325
58 a
3 3
1 5

STAKEHOLDERS/OUTREACH
Staff has engaged with multiple departments and their staff informing them of the TCC program opportunity and gauging their interest in applying for the program. In addition, staff engaged with community organizations during the process of finding co-applicants, including the Glendale Continuum of Care Committee, the YWCA, the Salvation Army, and The Campbell Center.

Residents and local business outreach has not yet occurred but will be a part of the TCC program execution.

FISCAL IMPACT
There is no fiscal impact associated with this report.

ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW (CEQA/NEPA)
This item is exempt from the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) because Projects included in the grant application have already completed CEQA review.

CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE
This item is exempt from campaign disclosure requirements.

ALTERNATIVES
Alternative 1: Authorize City Council, or their designee, to apply for the Transformative Climate Communities program, and to accept a Transformative Climate Communities grant and execute all related documents if awarded.

Alternative 2: Do not approve these resolutions, which will result in not applying for, nor accepting State funding via the Transformative Climate Communities program.

Alternative 3: Consider any other alternative not proposed by staff.

ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:

Elizabeth Harris, Administrative Associate
Bryan Salazar, Administrative Analyst Electrical Engineering David Jones, Sustainability Officer
Approved by:

Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager
Review by:

Michael J. Garcia, City Attorney
Gillian van Muyden, Chief Assistant City Attorney

EXHIBITS/ATTACHMENTS
39 of 325
68 a
3 3
1 5
Exhibit 1: TCC Round 4 NOFA Release
Exhibit 2: TCC Guidelines Round 4
Exhibit 3: Map of Relevant TCC Projects
40 of 325
1 RESOLUTION NO. ______

RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF

GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA, AUTHORIZING SUBMITTAL OF AN

APPLICATION FOR THE TRANSFORMATIVE CLIMATE

COMMUNITY PROGRAM GRANT, AND AUTHORIZING THE CITY

MANAGER OR HIS/HER DESIGNEE TO ACCEPT THE GRANT

FUNDS AND TO EXECUTE ANY REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE GRANT IF AWARDED
WHEREAS, the California Strategic Growth Council (SGC) along with its partner agency, the Department of Conservation, are administering grants through the Transformative Climate Communities (TCC) program in furtherance of AB 32 (Nunez, Chapter 488, Statutes of 2006) and AB 2722 (Burke, Chapter 371, Statues of 2016) by funding projects that reduce greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions through the development and implementation of neighborhood-level transformative climate community plans that include multiple coordinated GHG emissions reduction projects that provide local economic, environmental, and health benefits to disadvantaged communities; and
WHEREAS, in furtherance of this authority, SGC is required to establish procedures governing the application, awarding, and management of the TCC program grants, which TCC program grant application procedures require, among other things, an applicant’s governing body to declare by resolution certain authorizations related to the administration of TCC program grants.

WHEREAS, the City has determined that it has projects that are eligible for the TCC Grant Program and is therefore adopting this resolution as required by the TCC Grant Program Procedures in order to apply and participate in the TCC Grant Program.

NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED that the City Council of the City of Glendale, California, that:

SECTION 1. City staff is hereby authorized to submit application(s) to the SGC for all grants for which the City of Glendale is eligible.

SECTION 2.The City Manager, or his/her designee, is hereby authorized and to execute all grant documents, including but not limited to, applications, agreements, amendments and requests for payment, necessary to secure grant funds and implement the approved grant project, the content of which shall be subject to the review and approval as to form by the City Attorney.
41 of 325
2 SECTION 3. These authorizations shall be effective for a period of five (5) years from the date of adoption of this resolution.

APPROVED AND ADOPTED this _______ day of ________________, 2022. _________________________________
Mayor
ATTEST:
_______________________________
City Clerk

STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
) SS

COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES )
I, Aram Adjemian, Clerk of the City of Glendale, certify that the foregoing Resolution No. ________________ was adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, at a regular meeting held on the _______ day of ____________________, 2022, and that same was adopted by the following vote:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:
________________________________
City Clerk
42 of 325
1400 Tenth Street, Sacramento, CA 95814 ● www.sgc.ca.gov ● (916) 322-2318 March 8, 2022

NOTICE OF FUNDING AVAILABILITY
Transformative Climate Communities Program
FY 2021-2022 FUNDING ROUND
TO: All Potential Applicants
FROM: TCC Program Staff, Strategic Growth Council
SUBJECT: NOTICE OF FUNDING AVAILABLITY – A TOTAL OF APPROXIMATELY $105

MILLION FOR THREE IMPLEMENTATION GRANT AWARDS AND A TOTAL OF APPROXIMATELY $1.2 MILLION FOR FOUR PLANNING GRANT AWARDS FOR ROUND 4 OF THE TRANSFORMATIVE CLIMATE COMMUNITIES PROGRAM The Californ
ia Strategic Growth Council (SGC) along with its partner agency, the Department of Conservation (DOC), is pleased to announce the availability of funding for Round 4 of the Transformative Climate Communities (TCC) Program through this Notice of Funding Availability (NOFA). SGC anticipates that approximately $105 million in Implementation Grant funding and approximately $1.2 million in Planning Grant funding will be available for competitive awards in Round 4. The TCC Program furthers the purposes of AB 32 (Nunez, Chapter 488, Statutes of 2006) and AB 2722 (Burke, Chapter 371, Statutes of 2016) by funding projects that reduce greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions through the development and implementation of neighborhood- level transformative climate community plans that include multiple coordinated GHG emissions reduction projects that provide local economic, environmental, and health benefits to disadvantaged communities. Funding for the TCC Program is provided by the General Fund’s Climate Budget.

Funds available include a total of approximately $105 million for three implementation grant awards of $35 million each and a total of $1.2 million for four planning grant awards of $300,000 each for Round 4 of the TCC Program.

Implementation Grant Pre-Proposals must be submitted no later than 5:00 p.m. PST on Friday, April 22, 2022. Final Implementation Grant Applications must be submitted no later than 5:00 p.m. PST on Friday, July 1, 2022 according to the terms of this NOFA.

Planning Grant Applications must be submitted no later than 5:00 p.m. PST on Friday, July 1, 2022 according to the terms of this NOFA.

To be considered for awards, applicants must fill out an application survey and indicate their interest in applying for a TCC Implementation Grant by March 25, 2022, or a TCC Planning Grant by May 16, 2022 (except for Planning Grant applicants from unincorporated communities or tribal communities that wish to have Application Technical Assistance and must submit earlier).

Application Surveys from all applicants using Application Technical Assistance are due Friday, March 25, 2022. Application Technical Assistance is required for all Implementation Grants and available to tribal communities and unincorporated communities for Planning Grants. Surveys will be available on the TCC Resources page under “Current Application Materials”.

After receiving the survey responses, TCC Program staff will provide Implementation Grant and Planning Grant Applicants with a l i n k t o a Microsoft SharePoint folder where the application materials can be accessed and uploaded once they are completed. TCC Program staff will also connect all Implementation Grant Applicants to the SGC -selected technical assistance provider to assist with the completion of application materials. Applicants that are unable to access an online application via a Microsoft SharePoint folder may contact SGC for assistance.
43 of 325
Not
ice of Funding Availability
Transformative Climate Communities Program
March 8, 2022

Information about the TCC Program, including the Program Guidelines, application technical assistance, and other resources can be found at the SGC website: http://sgc.ca.gov/programs/tcc/resources/.

Questions may be directed to the TCC Program by email at [email protected].

PROGRAM SUMMARY
The TCC Program is administered by SGC and implemented by DOC, along with other partnering State agencies. SGC staff and partnering State agencies have worked collaboratively to develop and administer the TCC Program, including developing program guidelines and application materials, preparing agreements and program templates, and coordinating technical assistance for potential applicants.

IMPLEMENTATION GRANTS
Eligible Applicants and Project Types
Eligible applicants for Implementation Grants may include but are not limited to: community -based organizations, local governments, nonprofit organizations, philanthropic organizations and foundations, faith-based organizations, coalitions or associations of nonprofit organizations, community developm ent finance institutions, community development corporations, joint powers authorities, councils of government, and/or California Native American Tribes.

Eligible applicants must form a Collaborative Stakeholder Structure to develop and submit one application based upon a shared vision. The Collaborative Stakeholder Structure shall be charged with overseeing implementation of the TCC Proposal, including each of the requirements outlined in Section II. E, “Transformative Elements”, of the TCC Guidelines
, and led by one Lead Applicant. The Collaborative
Stakeholder Structure must include at least one of the required Project Leads for each of the proposed Projects and Transformative Plans included in the TCC Proposal. The acceptable Project Leads are listed in Appendix B, “TCC Funded Projects by Strategy” and Appendix C, “Transformative Elements,” of the TCC Guidelines.

Applicants must develop a Vision Statement for their proposal that aligns with TCC Program Objectives and identify multiple Strategies and Projects that align with their vision and meaningfully address important community needs within the Project Area. The Round 4 funds will be allocated competitively among eligible disadvantaged community areas, according to the updated criteria which now expands eligibility to the top 25 percent of disadvantaged communities per CalEnviroScreen and includes disadvantaged unincorporated areas and federally recognized tribal territories in the TCC Mapping Tool for Eligible Project Areas and Planning Areas and the TCC Guidelines. The grant term will be approximately five years, with an additional year for evaluation and reporting.

Appl
ication Process
All Implementation Grant Applicants must submit application materials using their assigned TCC Microsoft SharePoint folder, a web -based application. Pre-Proposal Applications must be submitted by 5:00 p.m.

PST on April 22, 2022, and Final Applications must be submitted by 5:00 pm PST on July 1, 2022. No late applications or application revisions will be accepted after the application submittal deadline. No hard copies, facsimiles, electronic transmissions via email, hand- delivered copies, or any other method of submitting complete applications will be accepted.

All applications will be reviewed by TCC Program Staff to ensure that all required documentation is submitted and the application is complete. Applicants that may be missing application information will be notified by TCC Program Staff. If applicants are contacted because of missing information, the application will be deemed incomplete if the applicant does not provide the missing information within two (2) business days.

Implementation Grant applications will be reviewed and evaluated by SGC staff, along with an interagency review panel of partnering State agencies, according to the requirements stated in Section II.A-H of the 44 of 325
Notic
e of Funding Availability
Transformative Climate Communities Program
March 8, 2022

TCC Guidelines. Eligible applications will be scored based on the threshold and scoring criteria in Section II.G, “Application”. Following the initial application review, members of the review panel will conduct site visits with each of the applicants. Based on the interagency review of the applications and site visits, TCC Program Staff will finalize and prepare award recommendations to present to the S GC Council Members for consideration of final approval. The SGC staff will contact applicants recommended for funding. Staff recommendations will be posted for public review ten (10) days prior to the SGC public meeting.

Application resources are available on SGC’s website including how to access and submit an application via the Microsoft SharePoint folder. The anticipated date of announcement for the selection of Implementation Grant recommendations is October 2022. The ultimate awarding of Implementation Grant Program funds is subject to the approval of the Council. The Council decision is final.

Applications must meet all eligibility requirements upon submission. Applications having material inconsistencies will not be rated and ranked. Modification of the application by the applicant after submission is prohibited.

It is the applicant’s responsibility to ensure that the application is clear, complete, and accurat e. After the application deadline, staff from SGC, DOC, or other partnering state agencies may request clarifying information or inquire as to where the application- specific information is located provided that such information does not affect the competitive rating of the application. No information, whether written or oral, will be solicited or accepted if this information would result in a competitive advantage to an applicant or a competitive disadvantage to other applicants.

Application Scoring
Applications will be evaluated according to the process and scoring criteria set forth in Section II.G of the TCC Guidelines. The three top scoring Applicants will be recommended to the Strategic Growth Council to receive TCC Implementation Grants. Applications will be evaluated based on the scoring criteria.

Basis of A
ppeals

1. Upon receipt of a notice that an application has been determined to be ineligible, fail threshold review, or not awarded bas
ed on final scores, Implementation Grant Applic ants under this NOFA may appeal
such decision(s) to SGC pursuant to this section.

2. No Applicant shall have the right to appeal a decision of SGC relating to another Applicant’s eligibility, point score, award, denial of award, or any other matter relat ed thereto.

3. The appeal process provi ded herein applies solely to t he decision of SGC made i n this program NOFA and does not apply to any decisions made with respect t o any previously issued NOFAs or decisions
to be made pursuant to future program NOFAs.

Appeal Process
and Deadlines

1. Process: To file an appeal, Implementation Grant Applicants must submit to SGC, by the deadline set forth below, a written appeal, which states all relevant facts, arguments, and evidence upon which the appeal is based. Furthermore, the Applicant must provide a detail ed reference to the area or areas of the application that provide clarification and substantiation for the basis of the appeal. No new or additional information will be considered if this information would result in a competitive advantage to an Applicant. Once the written appeal is submitted to SGC, no information of
materials will be accepted or considered thereafter. Appeals submitted to SGC at [email protected] according to the deadline set forth in SGC review letters.

2. Filing deadline: Appeals must be received by SGC no later than five business days from the date of SGC’s threshold review or score letters, representing SGC’s decisi on made in response to the application.
45 of 325

Notice of Funding Availability
Transformative Climate Communities Program
March 8, 2022

Appeal Decision
Any request to appeal to SGC’s decision regarding an Implementation Grant application shall be reviewed for compliance with the TCC Guidelines
and this NOFA. All decisions rendered shall be final, binding, and conclusive, and shall constitute the final action of SGC.

PLANNING GRANTS
Eligible Applicants and Planning Activities
Eligible applicants for Planning Grants include but are not limited to: community-based organizations, local governments, nonprofit organizations, philanthropic organizations and foundations, faith -based organizations, coalitions or associations of nonprofit organizations, community development finance institutions, community development corporations, joint powers authorities, councils of government, and/or California Native American Tribes . SGC strongly encourages submittal of proposals comprised of meaningful, actionable internal and external collaboration that demonstrates a commitment to the proposal from multiple organizations.

There must be a minimum of one (1) Co-Applicant in addition to the Lead Applicant. More than one (1) Co- Applicant is strongly encouraged. Priority in scoring will be given to applicants that are able to demonstrate strong and diverse partnerships, including with community -based organizations and other stakeholder groups.

Planning Grants are intended to help communities increase their potential to successfully apply for and to implement future Transformative Climate Communities Implementation Grant awards or other California Climate Investment programs . Planning activities should focus on responding to planning issues or priorities that directly benefit vulnerable communities and that are defined either within an existing regional or local plan, or further the development of an area to be eligible to apply for a future TCC Implementation Grant.

Application Process
All Planning Grant Applicants must submit an application using their assigned TCC Microsoft SharePoint folder, a web- based application by 5:00 pm PST on July 1, 2022. No late applications or application revisions will be accepted after the application submittal deadline. No hard copies, facsimiles, electronic transmissions via email, hand-delivered copies, or any other method of submitting complete applications will be accepted.

All applications will be reviewed by TCC Program Staff to ensure that all required documentation is submitted and applications complete. Applicants that may be missing application information will be notified by TCC Program Staff. If applicants are contacted because of missing information, the application will be deemed incomplete if they applicant does not provide the missing information within two (2) business days.

Planning Grant applications will be reviewed and evaluated by staff from SGC, DOC, and an interagency review panel of partnering State agencies , according to the requirements stated in Section III, “Planning Grants”, of the TCC Guidelines
. Based on the interagency review of the applications, TCC Program Staff will finalize and prepare award recommendations to present to the SGC Council Members for consideration of final approval.

Application resources are available on SGC’s website including how to access and submit an application via the Microsoft SharePoint folder. The anticipated date of announcement for the selection of Planning Grant recommendations is October 2022. The ultimate awarding of TCC Planning Grant funds is subject to the approval of the Council. The Council decision is final.

Applications must meet all eligibility requirements upon submission. Applications having material inconsistencies will not be rated and ranked. Modification of the application by the applicant after submission is prohibited.
46 of 325

Notice of Funding Availability
Transformative Climate Communities Program
March 8, 2022

It is the applicant’s responsibility to ensure that the application is clear, complete, and accurate. After the application deadline, SGC and DOC staff may request clarifying information or inquire as to where the application-specific information is located provided that such information does not affect the competitive rating of the application. No information, whether written or oral, will be solicited or accepted if this information would result in a competitive advantage to an applicant or a competitive disadvantage to other applicants.

Applicant Scoring
Applications will be evaluated based on scoring criteria set forth in Section III.D, “Application” of the TCC
Guidelines, including the extent to which the proposed planning activities will accomplish plan objectives, satisfy State planning priorities and increase the likelihood that Applicants will be competitive for future TCC Implementation Grant funding or other funding programs.

TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
Implementation Grant Applications
All applicants to the TCC Implementation Grants are required to work with no-cost technical assistance, provided by SGC. This technical assistance is provided to support TCC applicants in the development of their project scope, calculation of greenhouse gas emissions, and developing a complete application.

The technical assistance provider will work with each TCC Implementation Grant applicant to create a work plan for the development of their TCC application. The technical assistance provider will be able to provide supportive services, including but not limited to:
• Review of application responses
• Application coordination
• Financial analysis and budget development
• Support for project integration
• Assessment of project readiness
All TCC Implementation Grant applicants will have greenhouse gas calculation services provided by the technical assistance provider. Applicants will be asked to submit data to the technical assistance provider to provide a comprehensive calculation of reductions. Leading up to this calculation, the technical assistance provider will work with applicants to understand the relative greenhouse gas reduction potential of projects and offer suggestions for increasing project reductions.

If you intend to apply for a TCC Implementation Grant, Lead Applicants must complete a survey to indicate their interest and get connected to the SGC -selected technical assistance providers. The Application Survey for Implementation Grant applicants is due by March 25, 2022 and will be available on the TCC Resources page under “Current Application Materials”. An application workshop webinar series providing an overview of the Implementation Grants inc luding program requirements, program framework, the application process, and grant administration will take place in March on the following dates:
• March 11, 10:30 a.m. - 12:00 p.m. | All audiences (register here) • March 18, 10:00 - 11:30 a.m. | Tribal Communities (attendance limited to tribes and tribal- serving organizations - register here)
• March 18, 2:00 - 3:30 p.m. | Unincorporated Communities and Rural Communities (register here)

Planning Grant Applications
Technical assistance is available for applicants from disadvantaged unincorporated areas and tribal communities. The TCC Program will provide this technical assistance at no cost. Planning Grant applicants 47 of 325

Notice of Funding Availability
Transformative Climate Communities Program
March 8, 2022

from disadvantaged unincorporated areas and tribal communities that would like to request technical assistance must complete the Application Survey by March 25, 2022.

All other Planning Grant applicants may direct questions and requests for application assistance to TCC Program Staff. If you intend to apply for a TCC Planning Grant, Lead Applicants must complete a brief survey to indicate their interest and get access to the online application via a Microsoft SharePoint folder.

The Application Survey for Planning Grant applicants is due by May 16, 2022 and will be available on the TCC Resources
page under “Current Application Materials”. An application workshop webinar series providing an overview of the Planning Grants including program requirements, program framework, the application process, and grant administration will take place on March 11 and 18. The information and links are the same as the above for Implementation Grant Applications.

Microsoft SharePoint Folder
Instructions on utilizing the TCC Application Microsoft SharePoint folder will be explained during the application webinar. Those unable to attend the webinar may request application information from TCC Program staff directly. Applicants that are unable to access an online application via TCC SharePoint folder may contact SGC for assistance. If Applicants experience any ADA accessibility issues with application materials, please contact SGC for assistance.

OTHER TERMS AND CONDITIONS
State Prevailing Wages
Program funds awarded under this NOFA are subject to State prevailing wage law, as set forth in Labor Code Section 1720 et seq., and require the payment of prevailing wages unless the project meets one of the exceptions of Labor Code 1720 (c) as determined by the Department of Industrial Relations. Applicants are urged to seek professional advice as to how to comply with State prevailing wage law.

Disclosure Application of Information
Information provided in the Implementation and Planning Grant applications will become a public record available for review pursuant to the Public Records Act. As such, any materials provided will be disclosable to any person making a public records request. Applicants should use discretion in providing information that is not s pecifically requested, including, but not limited to bank account numbers, personal phone numbers and home addresses. By providing this information in an application, the applicant waiv es any claim of confidentiality and consents to the public disclosure of all submitted material. Awarded applications will be posted on the SGC website.

Right to Modify or Suspend
SGC reserves the right, at is sole discretion, to suspend, amend, or modify the provisions of this NOFA at any time, including without limitation, the amount of funds available hereunder. If such an action occurs, TCC program staff will notify all interested parties via email and will post the revisions to the TCC program website.

Conflict
Conflicts In the event of any conflict between the terms of this NOFA and either applicable state or federal law or regulation, the terms of the applicable state or federal law or regulation shall control.

RESOURCES AND QUESTIONS
48 of 325

Notice of Funding Availability
Transformative Climate Communities Program
March 8, 2022

Information about the TCC Program, including the Program Guidelines, application resources, technical assistance, and other resources can be found at the following website: <http://sgc.ca.gov/programs/tcc/ >.

Questions may be directed to the TCC Program by email at [email protected]. 49 of 325

Transformative Climate Communities
Program

Round 4 Program Guidelines
FY 2021–2022

February 24, 2022

Program information can be accessed at: http://sgc.ca.gov/programs/tcc/.

To sign up to receive notices, updates, and information regarding the T ransformative Climate Communities Program (and other Strategic Growth Council (SGC) grant programs and initiatives), visit the SGC website and click on the “E-list” link at: http://sgc.ca.gov/. 50 of 325

This page is left intentionally blank

51 of 325

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION I. INTRODUCTION ................................ ................................ ................................ ..............1 A. BACKGROUND ................................ ................................ ................................ ........................... 1 B. PROGRAM SUMMARY ................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 2 C. PROGRAM VISION ................................ ................................ ................................ ..................... 3 SECTION II. IMPLEMENTATION GRANTS ................................ ................................ .........................5 A. ELIGIBILITY ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ . 5 B. OVERVIEW OF PROGRAM FRAMEWORK ................................ ................................ .............. 12 C. OBJECTIVES AND VISION ................................ ................................ ................................ ....... 12 D. STRATEGIES AND PROJECTS ................................ ................................ ................................ 13 E. TRANSFORMATIVE ELEMENTS ................................ ................................ .............................. 16 F. PROGRAM POLICY PRIORITIES ................................ ................................ ............................. 27 G. APPLICATION ................................ ................................ ................................ ........................... 29 H. GRANT ADMINISTRATION ................................ ................................ ................................ ....... 37 SECTION III. PLANNING GRANTS ................................ ................................ ................................ ... 42 A. ELIGIBILITY ................................ ................................ ................................ ............................... 42 B. PROGRAM OBJECTIVES ................................ ................................ ................................ ......... 43 C. EXAMPLES OF ELIGIBLE PLANNING ACTIVITIES ................................ ................................ . 44 D. APPLICATION ................................ ................................ ................................ ........................... 45 E. GRANT ADMINISTRATION ................................ ................................ ................................ ....... 47 SECTION IV. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE ................................ ................................ ......................... 52 A. APPLICATION TA ................................ ................................ ................................ ...................... 52 B. IMPLEMENTATION TA................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 53 C. EVALUATION TA ................................ ................................ ................................ ...................... 53 SECTION V. GRANT TIMELINE ................................ ................................ ................................ ........ 54 SECTION VI. APPENDICES ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 55 APPENDIX A – TERMS AND DEFINITIONS................................ ................................ ................ A-1 APPENDIX B – TCC FUNDED PROJECTS BY STRATEGY ................................ ....................... B-1 APPENDIX C – TRANSFORMATIVE ELEMENTS ................................ ................................ ....... C-1 APPENDIX D – PROHOUSING POLICIES ................................ ................................ .................. D-1 APPENDIX E – AIR POLLUTION REDUCTION AND MITIGATION ................................ ............. E-1 APPENDIX F – BASIC INFRASTRUCTURE RESOURCES ................................ .......................... F-1 APPENDIX G – POST AWARD CONSULTATION PROCESS ................................ ..................... G-1 52 of 325

APPENDIX H – PUBLICITY GUIDELINES ................................ ................................ ................... H-1 APPENDIX I – PAST PROGRAM AWARDS ................................ ................................ .................. I-1 APPENDIX J – SAMPLE GRANT AGREEMENT (ROUND 3 TCC PROGRAM AWARDS) ........... J-1

53 of 325
Transformative Climate Communities Program
At-a-Glance

ABOUT THE TCC PROGRAM
Administered by the California Strategic Growth
Council (SGC) in partnership with the California
Department of Conservation , the Transformative
Climate Communities Program:
▪ Funds the implementation of neighborhood-
level proposals with multiple, integrated
projects
▪ Empowers communities to choose their own
strategies for reducing greenhouse gas
emissions and achieving community
benefits
▪ Prioritizes California’s most disadvantaged
communities – neighborhoods ranked in the
top 25 percent (25%) of CalEnviroScreen
▪ The TCC program was d eveloped through a
transparent and stakeholder-driven process,
including a Statewide Summit and workshops
held throughout California
ROUND 4 AWARDS
Implementation Grants:
$105,000,000 available for 3
awards ($35,000,000 each)
Planning Grants:
$1,200,000 available for 4
awards ($300,000 each)

CLIMATE INVESTMENTS
The TCC Program is currently funded under the General Fund’s Clima te Budget. TCC began as part of California Climate Investments, a statewide program that puts billions of Cap -and-Trade dollars to work reducing GHG emissions, strengthening the economy, and improving public health and the environment – particularly in dis advantaged communities. For more information, visit the California Climate Investments website at:
www.caclimateinvestments.ca.gov.

CONTACT US
Program information can be accessed at: http://sgc.ca.gov/programs/tcc/.

Email inquiries can be sent to: [email protected].

To sign up to receive notices, updates, and information regarding the TCC Program (and other SGC grant programs and initiatives), visit Strategic Growth Council (SGC) website and click on the “E-list” link at: http://sgc.ca.gov
54 of 325

SECTION I. INTRODUCTION
A. BACKGROUND
The Transformative Climate Communities (TCC) Program is part of the state’s Climate Budget (Senate Bill 170), which funds ambitious measures to build climate adaptation and resilience through planning, research, capacity building, restoration, and sustainable infrastructure.

TCC began in 2016 as part of the California Climate Investments, a statewide initiative that puts billions of Cap-and-Trade dollars to work reducing greenhouse gas emissions, strengthening the economy, and improving public health and the environment — particularly in disadvantaged communities.

Assembly Bill (AB) 2722 (Burke, Chapter 371, Statutes of 2016) established t he TCC Program to “…fund the development and implementation of neighborhood-level transformative climate community plans that include multiple, coordinated greenhouse gas emissions reduction projects that provide local economic, environmental, and health benefits to disadvantaged communities as described in Section 39711 of the Health and Safety Code” (Pub. Resources Code § 75240).

In addition to reducing greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions in disadvantaged communities, AB 2722 includes the following goals:
▪ Maximize community benefits: “Projects shall maximize climate, public health, environmental, workforce, and economic benefits.”
▪ Avoid displacement: “In adopting the guidelines, SGC shall consider whether eligible plans and projects avoid economic displacement of low -income disadvantaged community residents and businesses.”
▪ Comprehensive community engagement : “ SGC shall award grants for projects that demonstrate community engagement in all phases.”
▪ Leverage additional funds: “By making such comprehensive public investments, it is the intent of the Legislature that private resources can be more effectively catalyzed to support innovative community and climate transformation in disadvantaged communities,” and “SGC and all funded entities shall endeavor to identify additional public and private sources of funding to sustain and expand the program.”
▪ Technical assistance: “SGC shall fund technical assistance providers to assist in application development and project development and implementation.” In addition to AB 2722, the following legislation governs the TCC Program:
▪ Assembly Bill 32: Requires California to reduce it s greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions to 1990 levels by 2020 and task s the California Air Resources Board with creating a Scoping Plan, enabling the development of the cap-and-trade program.
▪ Senate Bill 32: Requires California to reduce GHG emissions to 40 percent (40%) below 1990 levels by 2030.
55 of 325

▪ Senate Bill 535 (De León, Chapter 830, Statutes of 2012) : Directs State and local agencies to invest in California's “disadvantaged communities,” – as defined by the California Environmental Protection Agency (CalEPA) a nd CalEnviroScreen1 – by spending a minimum of 25 percent (25%) of Greenhouse Gas Reduction Funds (GGRF) to benefit these communities. ▪ Assembly Bill 1550 (Gomez, Chapter 369, Statutes of 2016): Expands requirements for GGRF to include other Priority Populations based on income. In addition to the 25 percent (25%) of the proceeds required by SB 535, AB 1550 requires an additional minimum of five percent (5%) of funds be invested in projects that benefit low-income households or communities statewide; and an additional five percent (5%) be invested in projects that benefit low -income households or communities that are within a half-mile of a disadvantaged community. Together, SB 535 and AB 1550 prioritize investments to disadvantaged and low-income communities and households in need of assistance.

B. PROGRAM SUMMARY
The Strategic Growth Council (SGC) administers the TCC Program in partnership with the California Department of Conservation (DOC). A $115 million FY 20 21-2022 budget appropriation from the General Fund supports Round 4 of the TCC Program, which will award two (2) types of grants:

Implementation Grants
▪ Implementation Grants fund neighborhood-level proposals that include multiple, coordinated projects that reduce greenhouse gas emissions and achieve other community benefits. ▪ $105,000,000 is available for three (3) grant awards of $35,000,000 each. ▪ Grant terms are six (6) years: a five (5) year Project Completion Period, followed by a one (1) year Performance Period, during which project outcomes will be monitored. ▪ For more information about the program framework, eligibility, application, and grant administration, see Section II. Implementation Grants.

Planning Grants
▪ Planning Grants fund planning activities to prepare disadvantaged communities for future funding opportunities in programs that align with the TCC Program’s objectives. ▪ $1,200,000 is available for four (4) awards of $300,000 each. ▪ Grant terms are two (2) years, with the option to extend on a case-by-case basis. ▪ For more information about the program objectives, eligibility, application, and grant administration, see Section III. Planning Grants.

1 CalEnviroScreen is a screening tool developed by the Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment to help identify communities with high levels of social and economic vulnerability that are also disproportionally burdened by multiple sources of pollution. <https://oehha.ca.gov/calenviroscreen> 56 of 325

C. PROGRAM VISION
Vision for Racial Equity
The California Strategic Growth Council (SGC) is committed to achieving racial equity in its operations, investments, and policy initiatives and to achieving its vision that: All people in California live in healthy, thriving, and resilient communities regardless of race.2 Vision for Transformation
The TCC Program establishes a new framework for achieving California’s climate goals. This framework represents an evolution in the State’s typical funding models in four (4) significant ways. ▪ Place-Based Approach: A place-based approach allows the state to make significant, targeted investments that meet multiple needs of burdened communities. It also empowers communities to tackle climate change and equity challenges at a neighborhood scale. Communities propose systemic solutions to address their neighborhood’s specific needs and assets. ▪ Integrated Strategies and Projects : Implementing multiple, integrated strategies and projects makes the whole of each grant greater than the sum of its parts. Integrating cross-sector activities into each p roposal enables the state’s investments to maximize greenhouse gas reduction goals and other community benefits.
▪ Transformative Elements: Unique focus on ensuring the investment provides direct benefits to neighborhood residents. Robust community engagement and workforce development ensures that TCC proposals are designed with local residents’ and stakeholders ’ needs in mind .

Grantees also implement measures that will avoid displacement of existing residents and businesses so that they may benefit from the state’s investments in the long run. Communities select p rojects that will build resilience in the face of current and future climate impacts on vulnerable populations and the built environme nt. The TCC Program is also a model for catalyzing local, multi -sector partnerships that leverage private and public funds to sustain community revitalization and equitable development. Additionally, long-term indicator tracking allows the state to continually assess program outcomes and apply lessons learned. ▪ Developing Partnerships: The TCC Program enables the development of long-term partnerships at multiple levels . First, Applicants are required to develop “Collaborative Stakeholder Structures” that bring together public agencies, non -profit organizations, residents, and other local en tities in a process that fosters long -term investment in the community’s vision for transformation. Second, the TCC Program requires the state to establish partnerships with Applicants and Grantees through outreach and technical assistance. And l astly, the development of the TCC P rogram has resulted in partnerships at the state level, through consultation with experts from multiple agencies during the development of program guidelines, drafting of grant agreements, and review of applications.

2 California Strategic Growth Council. Updated Racial Equity Action Plan (2019-2022). September 2021. <https://sgc.ca.gov/programs/healthandequity/docs/20211110-REAP.pdf> 57 of 325

Investing in Priority Populations
The TCC Program focuses investment on communities most burdened by environmental, socioeconomic, and health inequities. The CalEnviroScreen (CES) Tool identifies these communities, and the TCC Program developed an additional TCC Mapping Tool to identify disadvantaged unincorporated communities. The TCC Program has set the following thresholds for TCC Implementation and Planning Grants:
▪ Communities in which more than half of the area overlaps with census tracts designated as a disadvantaged community per CalEnviroScreen or the TCC Mapping Tool: within the top 25% of disadvantaged communities per CalEnvi roScreen 4.0 or 3.0, all federally recognized tribal boundaries, or an eligible disadvantaged unincorporated area. The remaining area (49% or less) must overlap with census tracts in the top 25 percent (25%) of CES rankings, or with AB 1550 low-income tracts.

Communities defined as “disadvantaged” can include high populations of people with low incomes and a high concentration of sources of pollution. Residents of these types of communities commonly experience elevated rates of health problems, as well as s ocioeconomic and environmental vulnerability. Many of these challenges are the result of a history of inequitable land use and zoning policies, underinvestment, and lack of meaningful engagement with community residents in planning and policy decisions.

SGC recognizes that the term “disadvantaged” overlooks the many assets these communities also possess, and particularly the community residents for whom these places are home. In many of these communities, organized groups of neighborhood leaders are actively engaged in local planning efforts, policy campaigns, and other activities to make their communities healthier, safer, and more sustainable.

These efforts are particularly important today since these communities will disproportionately experience the impacts of climate change. The TCC Program is structured to provide existing residents and businesses with the tools and resources to drive change and to ensure they are also able to experience the benefits of investment

58 of 325

SECTION II. IMPLEMENTATION GRANTS
The following section describes the eligibility requirements, program framework, application process, and grant administration for TCC Implementation Grants.

A. ELIGIBILITY
Applicant Eligibility
Applications will be submitted by a Le ad Applicant in collaboration with multiple Co-Applicants.

Together, the Lead Applicant and Co-Applicants are collectively referred to as “Applicants.” Eligible Lead Applicants
Organizations eligible to serve as Lead Applicant may include but are not limited to: community- based organizations, local governments, nonprofit organizations, philanthropic organizations and foundations, faith-based organizations, coalitions or associations of nonprofit organizations, community development finance institutions, community development corporations, joint powers authorities, councils of governments, and California Native American Tribes.3 Past Awards
Organizations that were awarded a TCC Implementation Grant in previous funding rounds are not eligible to re-apply as the Lead Applicant in Round 4. However, organizations from the same jurisdiction are eligible to apply, and project partners on current grants may apply as Lead Applicants or be included in Round 4 applications.

Eligible Co-Applicants
Organizations eligible to serve as Co-Applicants include the organizations listed above in the Eligible Lead Applicants section, as well as the Eligible Project Leads described in Appendix B.

Public Agency Support
Either the Lead Applicant or one of the Co-Applicants must be a public agency.

If the Lead Applicant is a public agency, they must provide evidence of a passed formal resolution in the TCC Proposal that includes an authorization to apply for and accept a TCC Implementation Grant, and authority to execute all related documents if awarded.4 If the public agency is a Co -applicant, then the Applicant must provide a letter of support from the public agency in the TCC Proposal.

3 Native American Heritage Commission (NAHC). NAHC Tribal Consultation Policy. <http://nahc.ca.gov/wp- content/uploads/2020/09/Signed-NAHC-Tribal-Consultation-Policy.pdf> 4 A lesson learned from previous grant cycles is to include this streamlining measure - to allow the Lead Applicant to execute agreements without the need to bring the agreement back for Council or Board approval. Otherwise, the final grant execution stage can extensively delay the project start date.
59 of 325

Collaborative Stakeholder Structure
The Lead Applicant and all Co-Applicants must form a Collaborative Stakeholder Structure to develop and submit one (1) application. The Collaborative Stakeholder Structure also should include residents and community -nominated members such a s community -based organizations that are not Co - Applicants. The inclusion of residents and/or other community-nominated members in the Collaborative Stakeholder Structure is a requirement that can only be waived if there are extenuating circumstances and approval is granted by SGC. Applications will be evaluated on the degree to which they incorporate community leadership.

Partnership Agreement
Applicants must develop a Partnership Agreement that is signed by the Lead Applicant and all Co-Applicants that describes the governance, organization, and financial relationships of the Collaborative Stakeholder Structure. Once the grant has been executed, Lead Applicants will be referred to as the “Grantee ,” and Co-Applicants as “Partners.” For more information about the SGC relationship with Grantee and Partners, see Section II.H.

The Collaborative Stakeholder Structure will govern implementation of the entire TCC Grant.

Applicants may design their Collaborative Stakeholder Structure to best align with their needs, but the Partnership Agreement must, at a minimum, define the following:
▪ Identification of the Grantee;
▪ Roles and responsibilities for the Grantee and all Partners, residents, and/or community- nominated members;
▪ Governance of the Collaborative Stakeholder Structure including: processes for handling disputes and procedures to change, add, or remove members; ▪ Legal and financial considerations including: liability provisions, financial relationship s between the Grantee and Partners, the process Grantee will use to reimburse the Partners, and procurement processes;
▪ Transparent decision-making processes;
▪ Non-discrimination clause;
60 of 325

▪ Meeting facilitation procedures including frequency of meetings, minimum number of meetings open to public, means for publishing meeting agenda and notes for public access; and
▪ Process for involving community representatives and community-based organizations in decision-making.

Memorandum of Understanding
Any Applicant whose Project Area cross es municipal boundaries, federally recognized tribal territory boundaries , or similarly relevant jurisdictional boundaries is required to submit a Memorandum of Underst anding (MOU) that outlines how all public agencies and tribal governments in the Collaborative Stakeholder Structure will execute and manage the grant. See the Section II.A for additional detailed requirements.

Applicants may either submit a MOU separate from the required Partnershi p Agreement that outlines the Collaborative Stakeholder Structure or submit an all -encompassing MOU that defines the governance structure for both the a) TCC Project Area with multiple jurisdictions , and b) TCC Collaborative Stakeholder Structure. The MOU must, at a minimum, define the following:
▪ Arrangement and commitment of full-time equivalent positions from each public agency and/or tribal government to implement the TCC grant - including implementing capital projects, conducting planning activities, developing and implementing policies, and participating in collaborative governance.
▪ Systems designed to coordinate successful execution of the TCC grant. This should include the res ponsibilities, expectations, communication systems, staffing plans, and adequate budget for each entity.
▪ Public agency or tribal government responsible for leading coordination among government entities, including resolving any challenges arising from havi ng multiple jurisdictions contained within the Project Area. This entity may be the Lead Applicant, a Co-Applicant, an independent project manager contracted by the Lead Applicant, or another appropriate arrangement.

Applicant Capacity
Applicants must provide sufficient information to demonstrate their management and financial capacity:

Management Capacity
Lead Applicants ’ and Co -Applicants’ ability to oversee, manage , and implement large infrastructure projects, such as transportation, affordable housing , and green infrastructure projects is essential. The Lead and Co-Applicants also must possess the capacity to implement the partner coordination, community outreach, evaluation and reporting components critical to the grant.

To demonstrate management capacity, the Lead and Co-Applicants must:
▪ Identify the Lead Applicant or Co -Applicant responsible for leading the implementation of each Project or Transformative Plan (the “Lead Entity”); 61 of 325

▪ Provide evidence of the Lead Entity having successfully implemented a similar project in scope and size in California within the last 10 years;
▪ Describe the full or part-time staff that will be dedicated to TCC Program Implementation; and
▪ Provide a letter of support from one (1) reference who can speak to the quality and timeliness of work completed by the Lead or Co-Applicant.

Based on previous TCC Grantees, the Lead Applicant should allocate no less than two full-time staff dedicated to implementing the TCC project , and Co -Applicants should allocate sufficien t capacity to grant administration and coordination depending on the size and complexity of the project.

Financial Capacity
Lead Applicants and Co -Applicants must possess the financial capacity to adhere to the reimbursement processes of the TCC Program and defined by the Partnership Agreement. See Section II.H for details about the reimbursement process.

To demonstrate financial capacity, the Lead and Co-Applicants will be asked to provide a current annual organizational budget, and recent financial statements, as specified in the application.

Non-profit organizations must submit a copy of their most recent Federal Form 990 and a copy of the organization’s IRS 501(c)(3) Tax Determination Letter. Any Applicant that had an audit finding in the last five (5) years is required to enclose it in the application in an official letter.

Project Area Eligibility
Applicants must provide a description and map of the Pr oject Area that demonstrate the Project Area meets all requirements below. Applicants can use the TCC Mapping Tool to design an eligible Project Area.5
Project Area Size
Applicants must define a contiguous Project Area that is no larger than approximately five - square miles (5 mi2).

Priority Populations – Incorporated Areas and Tribal Territories At least 51 percent (51%) of the Project Area must overlap with incorporated areas or tribal territories in census tracts designated as disadvantaged communities through one or more of the following criteria:
▪ Within the top 25 percent (25%) of disadvantaged communities per C alEnviroScreen (CES) 4.0
▪ Census tracts scoring in the top 5 percent (5%) of the Pollution Burden indicator but without an overall CES 4.0 score due to unavailable or unreliable data.

5 Governor’s Office of Planning and Research (OPR) and California Strategic Growth Council (SGC). Disadvantaged Communities Mapping Tool for TCC. Version 1 for Public Comment, last updated November 15, 2021. <https://gov- opr.maps.arcgis.com/apps/webappviewer/index.html?id=aad5277a3ff14f64a4e9db7368077887> 62 of 325

▪ Within the top 25 percent (25%) of disadvantaged communities per CES 3.0 ▪ All areas within federally recognized tribal boundaries in California The remaining 49 percent (49%) or less of the Project Area must overlap with either a disadvantaged community per the criteria above or a low-income community as defined by AB 1550.6
While this round expands eligibility to the top 25 percent (25%) of disadvantaged communities per CES , SGC will prioritize investment in California’s most “disadvantaged” communities (please see “Investing in Priority Populations” in Section I.C for additional context regarding this term). Applicants will be aske d to explain how the Project Area meets the goals of the TCC program and justify why the Project Area was selected over other eligible areas, particularly areas with higher CES scores (if applicable). SGC reserves the right to prioritize investment in the most disadvantaged communities.

6 California Environmental Protection Agency. California Climate Investments to Benefit Disadvantaged Communities. <https://calepa.ca.gov/envjustice/ghginvest/>
63 of 325

Priority Populations – Unincorporated Areas
Round 4 extends eligibility for Implementation Grants to disadvantaged unincorporated communities (DUCs).7
At least 51 percent (51%) of the Project Area must overlap with eligible DUC areas. Applicants from unincorporated areas may establish DUC eligibility through one of the following methods:
▪ Verified DUC status through the Local Agency Formation Commission (LAFC o) or another public agency and located within disadvantaged communities designated census tracts per CalEnviroScreen and these Guidelines. ▪ Eligible location per the TCC Mapping Tool8 that overlaps with all the following criteria:
o Cluster of unincorporated parcels at a density threshold of 250 parcels per square mile,9
o Disadvantaged communities census tract per CES (top 25%), and o Hard-to-count census block group (score of 57 or higher) per the California Hard- to-Count Index (CA-HTC).
▪ Self-identified DUC that justifies designation with localized data that identifies population characteristics and density defined by a neighborhood-level assessment. ▪ Previous TCC Planning Grant recipients that included unincorporated areas within their Planning Area. The proposed Project Area must fall within the TCC Planning Area and meet the Priority Population requirements above.

The remaining 49 percent (49%) or less of the Project Area must overlap with either an eligible DUC area or a low-income community as defined by AB 1550.

7 For additional information on the staff consultation and research process that informed the TCC Round 4 DUC eligibility criteria and development of the DUC spatial data analysis included in the TCC Mapping Tool, please see:

California Strategic Growth Council. June 29, 2021. Staff Report: Transformative Climate Communities – Investment Framework for Disadvantaged Unincorporated Communities. <https://sgc.ca.gov/meetings/council/2021/docs/20210629- TCC_DUC_Staff_Report_June_2021.pdf>
8 Due to unreliable data on DUCs, staff developed a spatial data tool to assist applicants from unincorporated areas with determining eligibility for the TCC Program. See OPR and SGC’s GIS Story Map, Identification of Disadvantaged Unincorporated Communities for TCC, for a full explanation of the data layers in the TCC Mapping Tool: <https://gov- opr.maps.arcgis.com/apps/MapSeries/index.html?appid=b7a5970e92924362be70a809d04d0a67> 9 Because Mobile Home Parks are usually clustered together on a single parcel instead of having their own parcel, they are not captured by the parcel density analysis. TCC will accept localized data on mobile home parks that meet thresholds during the application phase.

Certain disadvantaged unincorporated communities may not all be captured by the parcel density analysis, due to the data layers used. TCC will consider localized data and other DUC designation justifications during the application phase, as described in this section.
64 of 325

Priority Populations – Multiple Jurisdictions
A Project Area may contain any combination of incorporated areas, unincorporated areas, and federally recognized tribal territories if the following criteria are met:
▪ Each area (incorporated, unincorporated, tribal territory) within the Project Area must meet the corresponding eligibility criteria.
▪ Each area within the Project Area must be represented by an appropriate public agency or tribal government (e.g. city, county government, local agency, or a tribal government) as a Lead Applicant or Co-Applicant.
▪ To ensure that the grant can be successfully executed within the grant term, Applicants must submit a Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) that defines the terms outlined in Section II.A.
▪ Applicants must submit letters of support and commitment from all relevant public agencies and tribal governments included in the Project Area. As described under Applicant Eligibility, if the Lead Applicant is a public agency, they must provide evidence of a passed formal resolution in the TCC Proposal.
▪ Applicants must demonstrate during the application process that they have identified and are prepared to address any obstacles associated with a Project Area that spans multiple jurisdictions.

Past Awards
Project Areas proposed in Round 4 may not overlap with Project Areas from previous TCC Implementation Grant awards. However, proposed Project Areas may fall within the same municipal boundaries, federally recognized tribal territory boundaries, or similarly relevant jurisdictional boundaries as previous TCC Planning Grant awards.

Threshold requirements related to Strategies and Projects such as GHG emissions quantification and readiness requirements are explained in Section II.D.

65 of 325

B. OVERVIEW OF PROGRAM FRAMEWORK
The Program Framework establishes the structure for all TCC Proposals. Proposals must be designed to address all three TCC Program Objectives and include the following inter-related components: a Vision Statement, Strategies, Projects, and Transformative Elements.

C. OBJECTIVES AND VISION
Applicants must develop a shared Vision Statement that describes how the TCC Proposal will achieve all three (3) Program Objectives, as described in AB 2722:

1. Achieve Significant Reductions in Greenhouse Gas Emissions Applicants must develop a proposal with integrated projects that will reduce GHG emissions and further the objectives of AB 32 and SB 32.

2. Improve Public Health and Environmental Benefits
Applicants must describe how their proposal will improve public health outcomes for community residents and achieve environmental benefits for the Project Area.

3. Expand Economic Opportunity and Shared Prosperity
Applicants must consider how the proposal will contribute to economic opportunities for the community and ensure that improvements are accessible and equitable.

The Vision Statement serves as the investment framework and must articulate how the proposed Strategies, Projects, and Transformative Elements will be coordinated and integrated to achieve the 66 of 325

vision for neighborhood transformation. In addition, the Vision Statement must capture the community resources, assets, and characteristics that make the Project Area ready for transformation.

D. STRATEGIES AND PROJECTS
Applicants will select Strategies and develop Projects that address the TCC Program Objectives.

Strategies
Applicants must select at least three (3) Strategies from the list below. Strategies should be thoughtfully selected and integrated to best meet the community’s needs. Project activities eligible for funding under each Strategy are outlined in Appendix B. The majority of the TCC grant award (at least 67%) will be allocated to direct implementation costs for Projects under these Strategies.

1. Equitable Housing and Neighborhood Development

2. Land Acquisition for Affordable Housing

3. Transit Access and Mobility

4. Solar Installation, Energy Efficiency, and Appliance Electrification

5. Water Efficiency

6. Recycling and Waste Management

7. Urban Greening and Green Infrastructure

8. Health and Well-Being

9. Indoor Air Quality

10. Community Microgrids

11. Brownfield Redevelopment

Projects
Applicants must develop Projects using eligible elements, outlined for each Strategy in Appendix B.

Applicants also must ensure Projects meet the following threshold requirements:
▪ At least three (3) Projects must be both quantifiable AND meet all readiness requirements at the time of application submittal;
▪ Projects that are both quantifiable and ready must account for at least fifty percent (50%) of the requested grant funds; and
▪ All Projects must meet readiness requirements within the first year of the grant term. ▪ All Projects must be completed within the five (5) year Project Completion period. Shorter timelines are also acceptable.

Quantifiable Projects
Quantifiable Projects include elements that are quan tifiable using GHG Quantification Methodologies approved by the California Air Resources Board. Quantifiable projects may 67 of 325

include both quantifiable and non -quantifiable elements. Quantifiable elements are indicated with an asterisk (*) in Appendix B.

Readiness Requirements
Readiness requirements include California Environmental Quality Act ( CEQA) documentation, site control, permits, project maps and designs, project schedules, operations and maintenance plans, and other Str ategy-specific requirements. Strategy-specific readiness requirements are listed in Appendix B . Readiness requirements must be complete prior to beginning project implementation. Some Strategies are eligible for pre -development cost s to meet readiness requirements as defined in Appendix B.

Eligible Costs
In addition to the eligible and ineligible direct implementation costs described in Appendix B, the TCC Program generally funds four types of costs:

Eligible Costs Percent of Grant Award
Direct Implementation Costs At least 67%
(Up to 10% for water/wastewater connection)
Pre-Development Costs Up to 5% (10% of an individual Project) Indirect Costs Up to 12%
Transformative Elements Up to 16% (see next section)
TOTAL 100%

Direct Implementation Costs
Direct implementation costs must account for at least 67 percent (67%) of the total TCC grant award. Applicants that need to meet program policy requirements for basic infrastructure access may allocate up to 10 percent (10%) of the total TCC award to water and wastewater infrastructure connections.

Direct implementation costs are defined as costs directly tied to the implementation of the grant agreement including, but not limited to: personnel costs for project management and grant administration, labor, subcont racts, equipment costs, travel expenses, translation and interpretation, etc. Eligible direct implementation costs are defined for each Strategy in Appendix B.

Travel reimbursements must adhere to the State rates and conditions established on the CalHR website (https://www.calhr.ca.gov/employees/pages/travel-reimbursements.aspx), with the exception of “incidentals” and out-of-state travel, which will not be reimbursable under this grant.

The Lead and Co -Applicants must ensure sufficient resources are allocated to grant administration, which includes indicator tracking in additio n to grant invoicing and reporting . 68 of 325

Based on previous TCC awards, the program recommends allocating 2 to 3 percent (2-3%) of direct costs to indicator tracking activities required for the grant, which includes data collection and participation in focus groups and interviews.

Pre-Development Costs
Pre-development costs may account for up to 10 percent (10%) of an individual Project budget but may not exceed five percent (5%) of the total TCC grant award.

Pre-development costs include, but are not limited to , soft costs for activities such as construction or project plans, specifications and estimates including but not limited to: planning, engineering, architectural, and other design work, environmental impact r eports and assessments, appraisals, legal expenses, and necessary easements.

Pre-development activities and costs can be used to meet readiness requirements.

Indirect Costs
Indirect costs may account for up to 12 percent (12%) of the total TCC grant award, minus any funds for equipment purchases with a per unit cost of $5,000 or more. The 1 2% maximum of indirect cost applies to all entities including University of California (UC) and California State University (CSU) entities.

Indirect costs are costs of doing business that are of a general nature. These costs are not directly tied to the grant but are necessary for the general operation of the organization. Indirect costs include, but are not limited to:
▪ Personnel costs associated with administrative, supervisory, legal, and executive staff; ▪ Personnel costs associated with support units, including clerical support, housekeeping, etc.; and
▪ Operating expenses and equipment costs not included as part of direc t project costs (functions such as accounting, budgeting, audits, business services, information technology, janitorial; and rent, utilities, supplies, etc.).

Documentation related to the determination of the Grantee’s indirect cost rate must be retained by the Grantee for audit purposes.

Reasonableness
All costs must be reasonable. A cost is reasonable if, in its nature and amount, it does not exceed that which would be incurred by a prudent person under the circumstances prevailing at the time the decis ion was made to incur the cost. In determining reasonableness of a given cost, consideration must be given to:
▪ Whether the cost is of a type generally recognized as ordinary and necessary for the operation of the entity or the proper and efficient performance of this Grant Agreement; ▪ The restraints or requirements imposed by such factors as: sound business practices; arm's-length bargaining; federal, state, local, tribal, and other laws and regulations; and terms and conditions of this Grant Agreement;
▪ Market prices for comparable goods or services for the geographic area; 69 of 325

▪ Whether the individuals concerned acted with prudence in the circumstances considering their responsibilities to its employees, the public at large, and the State; and ▪ Whether the cost significantly deviates from the acquiring entity’s established practices and policies regarding the incurrence of costs.

E. TRANSFORMATIVE ELEMENTS
In addition to selecting Strategies and developing Projects, Applicants must include six (6) Transformative Elements as part of a TCC Proposal. Transformative Elements are critical to furthering the TCC Program Objectives and supporting the implementation of Strategies and Projects.

The six (6) required Transformative Elements are:

1. Data Collection and Indicator Tracking

2. Community Engagement

3. Displacement Avoidance

4. Workforce Development and Economic Opportunities

5. Climate Adaptation and Resilience

6. Leverage Funding
Below is a brief description of each Transformative Element. Specific information about eligible activities, eligible costs, and additional requirements can be found in Appendix C. ▪ Some Transformative Elements may be paid for with grant funds, and others are integrated into the proposal or require outside funding.
▪ All Transformative Elements must last for the duration of the entire five (5) year Project Completion Period. Applicants must consider this when developing the Work Plans and Budgets for all Transformative Plans.

Transformative Elements Percent of TCC Grant Award
Data Collection and Indicator Tracking 3% required
Community Engagement
▪ Displacement Avoidance
Up to 8%*
▪ Up to 3% of the total 8% of community
engagement funds can be used for
displacement avoidance activities
Workforce Development and Economic Opportunities Up to 5% TOTAL Up to 16%
Climate Adaptation and Resilience None - No grant funds may be allocated, but applicants must incorporate adaptation
and resilience measures into their
proposed infrastructure projects
70 of 325

Transformative Elements Percent of TCC Grant Award
Leverage Funding None – Grantee must leverage additional funding sources that equate to least 50%
of the total grant award
*Funding requests that exceed the eight percent (8%) cap will be reviewed on a case -by-case basis during the Post-award Consultation.

Data Collection and Indicator Tracking
Applicants must allocate a minimum of three percent (3%) of their budget for data collection and indicator tracking as follows:
▪ Three percent (3%) will be used to hire a pre-qualified third-party Evaluation Partner, which will assist with tracking and documenting the TCC Project’s progress and impa ct (please see Section IV for more information); and
▪ In addition to the three percent (3%) budget allocation, the Lead and Co-Applicants must ensure adequate budget is allocated to costs to gather data and report to the Evaluation Partner and participate in evaluation activities such as focus groups, surveys, and interviews. Based on previous TCC awards, two to three percent (2-3%) of the total TCC award will cover Lead and Co-Applicant costs for indicator tracking and program evaluation activities. The Lead and Co - Applicants can include this in their direct costs.

Program Evaluation Goals
TCC grant recipients are required to work with a third -party Evaluation Technical Assistance Provider (Evaluation Partner) during grant implementation. The Evaluation Partner will develop a Site-Specific Program Evaluation Plan that provides a methodological framework for holistically evaluating the environmental, economic, social, and health impacts of the awarded TCC Project.10 The Evaluation Partner will also develop reporting tools and a technical assistance plan to support grant recipients with gathering and reporting data.

In a ddition to gathering and reporting progress data, the Evaluation Partner will conduct surveys, interviews, and focus groups with TCC Project participants to gather qualitative feedback on project progress and impact. The Evaluation Partner will also develop two brief narrative profiles on project participants and project features annually. The profiles will be used to communicate aspects of the TCC Project not captured by measurable data.

Finally, the Evaluation Partner will develop Annual Process Evaluation Memos that provide internal feedback and recommendations on the TCC Program’s design and implementation process. TCC program staff will use this feedback to identify and make key program improvements on an adaptive basis.

10 The Evaluation Partner will adapt the original TCC Evaluation Plan to develop the Site-Specific Evaluation Plan for awarded TCC Projects: UCLA Luskin Center for Innovation and UC Berkeley Center for Resource Efficient Communities, November 2018. Transformative Climate Communities Evaluation Plan: A Road Map for Assessing Progress and Results of the Round 1 Place-based Initiatives. < http://sgc.ca.gov/programs/tcc/docs/20190213- TCC_Evaluation_Plan_November_2018.pdf>.
71 of 325

Indicator Tracking Plan
TCC grant recipients will be responsib le for gathering and reporting data according to the Indicator Tracking Plan , in addition to participating in other evaluation activities . The Evaluation Partner will support grant recipients with fulfilling this requirement by coordinating data collection , provid ing technical assistance, processing data, and delivering all required reports to SGC. Reporting is required during key stages of the grant cycle, as outlined in the following section.

The Indicator Tracking Plan will include data indicators defined by the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and additional indicators required by the TCC Program and identified by grant recipients.

California Air Resources Board Indicators
The TCC Program follows the California Air Resources Board’s (CARB) Funding Guidelines for California Climate Investments framework to report on the benefits estimated from the GHG Quantification Methodology, employment outcomes for all projects , and actual outcomes for a subset of funded projects. For quantifiable projects, grantees are required to track and report project indicators listed in the reporting template for the applicable project type (www.arb.ca.gov/cci-resources).

TCC Program Indicators
In addition, SGC has worked with academic institutions to develop other indicators to track the overall impact of TCC investments. The TCC Evaluation Partner will also work with grant recipients to apply and develop other indicators relevant to the TCC Project goals.

A sample list of general CARB and SGC required tracking indicators are available on the SGC website11 and in the sample grant agreement in Appendix J. A list of specific indicators will be finalized for each Grantee by the TCC Evaluation Partner prior to grant execution. Tables below summarize the indicator reporting requirements during the grant cycle.

Reporting Timeline
One-time reporting is conducted during the Application and Awarded Phase. Annual reporting is required throughout the TCC grant life cycle during Project Implementation , and final reports are due during Close Out phases.

Applicants will work with a third -party Application TA Provider to collect and subm it inputs needed to calculate greenhouse gas emission reductions and co -benefits for Projects with quantifiable elements using CARB -approved quantification methodol ogies. Estimates are submitted with final application documents and will affect the overall application score.

Awarded Applicants (TCC grant recipients) will work with a third-party Evaluation Partner to collect and submit inputs needed for annual reporting during the life of the grant term. TCC grant recipients will also

11 UCLA Luskin Center for Innovation and UC Berkeley Center for Resource Efficient Communities, November 2018.

Transformative Climate Communities Evaluation Plan: A Road Map for Assessing Progress and Results of the Round 1 Place-based Initiatives. < http://sgc.ca.gov/programs/tcc/docs/20190213-TCC_Evaluation_Plan_November_2018.pdf>.

72 of 325

participate in qualitative evaluation activities needed for other annual reporting deliverables such as narrative case studies and process evaluation memos.

Evaluation Partner Selection
Applicants may propose an Evaluation Partner at application or select from a list of pre -qualified Evaluation Technical Assistance Providers. Upon award, the proposed Evaluation Partner will submit a qualifications package to SGC staff for review and approval. The Evaluation Partner must have the following qualifications:
• Expertise in urban planning, climate resilience infrastructure, and public policy research; • Experience conducting socio -economic, environmental, transportation, and health data collection and program evaluation, or related technical assistance; • Ability to collect and input data for greenhouse gas emissions methodologies, jobs reporting, and other outcomes reporting documents for government programs; • Expertise in conducting both quantitative and qualitative research methods including interviews, focus groups, surveys, socio -economic data analysis, and greenhouse gas emissions quantification;
• Experience providing technical assistance to disadvantaged and low -income communities in California;
• Experience coordinating with public, private, and non-profit organizations; • Demonstrated organizational capacity with a sound project management structure and approach.

73 of 325

Community Engagement
Applicants may allocate u p to eight percent ( 8%) of their budget for eligible community engagement and outreach activities during grant implementation. The SGC recognizes that many effective strategies for conducting community engagement and outreach are cost -intensive. Funding requests that exceed the eight percent (8%) cap will be reviewed on a case -by-case basis during the Post-award Consultation.

To ensure that grant funds provide direct, meaningful, and assured benefits to disadvantaged communities, the TCC Program requires that Applicants work wi th community members and stakeholders through direct engagement. Applicants must involve residents and businesses from the Project Area and key stakeholders in all phases of TCC Proposal development and implementation.

TCC Proposals should be designed to meet residents’ needs that are identified through a documented outreach and engagement process.

Applicants must also use proven methods of engagement to facilitate direct participation of community residents, including ensuring translation of meetings and materials, scheduling meetings at times that are convenient to community members, and engaging community members in information gathering as well as outreach. See Appendix C for a list of recommended activities to ensure meaningful community engagement.

TCC Proposals must develop a Community Engagement Plan with two (2) main sections:

Description of Community Engagement during Proposal Development Priority will be given to TCC Proposals that meaningfully include residents and key stakeholders during proposal development, from the visioning process to selecting Strategies and Projects , using proven methods of community engagement such as Participatory Budgeting or the creation of an Advisory Board. This section of the Community Engagement Plan must describe, at a minimum:
▪ Key stakeholders and residents, including any existing neighborhood organizations or advisory councils serving the Project Area;
▪ Recent history of resident engagement in neighborhood issues of the proposed Project Area, including involvement in any planning or community development activities administered by the local government or other administrative entities; and ▪ Process used to identify the needs of residents and other stakeholders during the TCC Proposal development phase , selection of proposed projects , and if applicable, the relationship of this process to any pending planning activities or public improvements for the Project Area within the time frame of implementation.

Description of Future Community Engagement
This section must describe strategies and methods that will be used to engage residents and key stakeholders during grant implementation. Priority will be given to proposals that include a robust governance structure and combination of activities to meaningfully engage community stakeholders. This section of the Community Engagement Plan must describe, at a minimum:
74 of 325

▪ Mechanism(s) (group, advisory board, process, etc.) established to continuously inform and engage the community as well as to ensure ongoing participation of members of the community during the implementation of the project;
▪ Timeline of proposed community engagemen t activities (see Appendix C for list of recommended activities to ensure meaningful community engagement); ▪ How the public will be informed of implementation progress, including updates on project performance and other Indicators being tracked, as well as implementation progress on the Displacement Avoidance and Community Engagement Plans; ▪ The ways in which community will provide feedback on implementation of the project; ▪ Process that will be used to receive formal feedback from the community; and ▪ How the Collaborative Stakeholder Structure includ ing the Partnership Agreement will support implementation of the Community Engagement Plan.

Displacement Avoidance
Applicants may allocate up to three percent (3%) of the total Community Engagement budget to support displacement avoidance activities performed by technical assistance providers and nonprofit organizations.

TCC Proposals must include a Displacement Avoidance Plan that details the actions Lead Applicants and Partners will take to establish policies and programs to avoid the displacement of existing households and small businesses within the Project Area. Displacement Avoidance Plans must be directly informed by robust community engagement. Applicants will describe how their Displacement Avoidance will be successfully implemented and evaluated to ensure that it has the intended impact.

See Appendix C for a list of example displacement avoidance policies and programs categorized by strategy.

The Displacement Avoidance Plan must include, at a minimum:
▪ Description of displacement vulnerability among existing households and small businesses within the Project Area;
▪ Description of the policies, plans, ordinances, or programs that are already in place to avoid displacement;
▪ Identification of additional new policies or programs that will be pursued to avoid displacement among existing households and businesses within the Project Area. Applicants must select policies and programs from examples provided in Appendix C:
o At least three (3) new policies or programs to prevent the displacement of very low and low-income households.
o At least two (2) new policies or programs to prevent the displacement of local and small businesses.
75 of 325

o Applicants must select a combination of short- and long-term policies for the household and small business displacement avoidance plans (defined in Appendix C). o Applicants are encouraged to define quantifiable goals for selected policies through the community engagement process.
▪ Identification of the entities responsible for and involved in implementing each new policy and program, and whether the implementing entities are the Lead Applicant or Co-Applicants; ▪ For anti -displacement policies that require a vote from the local jurisdiction, the DAP must include a timeline of when a policy is expected to go before an elected body . All DAPs should be detailed and implementable; and
▪ If a project is subject to a relocation plan required by State Relocation Law (Gov. Code, § 7260 et seq.) and Section 6038 of the Relocation Assistance and Real Property Guidelines ( 25 Cal.

Code of Regulations, div. 1, ch. 6, § 6000 et seq.) for the Project Area, Applicants must provide a copy of the relocation plan at application or prior to beginning project work.

Workforce Development and Economic Opportunities
Applicants may allocate u p to five percent (5%) of their budget to support workforce development and economic opportunities.

TCC Applicants must develop a Workforce Development and Economic Opportunities Plan that accomplishes the two (2) goals below . Applicants must develop workforce development training programs that pr epare Project Area residents for high -quality career pathways, with a focus on preparing residents for careers in a future net zero economy. Applicants also must develop an economic opportunities plan for creating local, high-quality jobs in the Project Area.

TCC encourages training and job placement partnerships with small businesses in the Project Area owned by priority populations, including women; minority; lesbian, gay, bisexual, and transgender (LGBT); and disabled veteran-owned business enterprises.

Goal 1: Create workforce development and training programs with career pathways for residents of the Project Area.

TCC workforce development and training programs must include the following features:
▪ Target occupations and industries that support TCC Proposal implementation; ▪ Reduce barriers to employment;
▪ Address the range of employment readiness needs of local residents and individuals with employment barriers;
▪ Be developed in partnership with, or le ad to partnerships with local workforce development boards and other key stakeholders, including organized labor and education providers;
▪ Align and enhance high-performing education and training programs that have a proven record of leading to high -quality, industry -recognized credentials and labor market advancement, and;
76 of 325

▪ Address critical skill issues emerging as industry faces challenges of climate change and environmental sustainability.

Applicants must demonstrate demand for the proposed education and training initiatives.

Applicants will be asked to explain how workforce demand is determined and planned for in their local region. Applicants must explain how, or if, the required skill sets for the proposed workforce sector will be impacted by climate policy.

Education and training initiatives must result in recognized credentials relevant to the selected training sector. Credentialing is a n important mechanism for regional employers to encourage desired skill sets and readily assess the abilities of regional job seekers, a s well as a way for workers to understand the specific skills required for entry and advancement within a field. As benchmarks of skill attainment, eligible credentials can include, but are not limited to , certificates, degrees, licenses, and certifications. The ideal characteristics of a quality credential include being accessible, transparent, stackable, portable, meaningful, and connected to a clear career pathway.

For example, a workforce plan c ould include pre-apprenticeship programs that use industry standard developed curriculum such as the Multi-Craft Core curriculum developed by the North America’s Building Trades Unions (NABTU) and are tied to state-certified apprenticeships.

Organizations leading the workforce development and training programs should use and build upon existing formalized pathways or partnerships with potential employers or industries, and have a demonstrated track record of providing training with sufficiently high rates of completion, post-training job placement, and job retention. Previous experience should be similar in scale, scope, and activities to the proposed TCC workforce development programs. Applicants may be asked to verify the track record of the organization through the Bureau for Private and Post- Secondary Education (BPPE), the Division of Apprenticeship Standards, their local workforce board, or by using outcome data provided by a State Agency funder (ex. ETP or Chancellor’s Office).

If the Applicants propose an education or training initiative that does not result in direct job placement for trainees, such as an entrepreneurship or incubator program, the proposal must clearly explain how it will result in a high-quality career pathway for the program completers. For example, entrepreneurship programs must include the development of a business plan and start-up support (e.g., operational space, seed funding, etc.) . Such programs should target emerging or underrepresented sectors in line with the TCC Program goals.

Applicants’ proposed workforce development and training programs must meet all of the following criteria:
▪ Train participants for jobs and skills that are transferable; ▪ Result in recognized credentials (e.g., certifications, certificates, degrees, licenses, other documentation of competency and qualifications) to support long -term, stable employment and career development. Programs that provide recipients with more than one type of skill or credential should be prioritized;
77 of 325

▪ Reduce barriers to participation through the training program design and recruitment strategy;
▪ Focus job training and placement plans on high-quality employment. Factors commonly considered to influence job quality include, but are not limited to: local living wages; benefits provided: health insurance, paid leave, sick leave, childcare services; opportunities for advancement; geographic accessibility and commute distance; job strain, scheduling, flexibility; working conditions and health risks; and job retention or duration of employment;
▪ Increase capacity of firms and workers to adapt and compete in a net zero economy; and
▪ Recruit trainees who are residents of the Project Area.

Goal 2: Provide economic opportunities through the creation of high-quality jobs.

Applicants must develop a plan that will result in the creation of local, high-quality jobs that offer living wages, benefits, worker voice, predictable scheduling, and opportunities for advancement with clear access points for low-income residents in and near the Project Area. The jobs created may – but do not have to – be tied directly to Projects that are part of the TCC Proposal.

The plan should be informed by regional partnerships, including workers and employers, that identify evolving “skill needs” of local industries and works with education and training providers to align training pathways accordingly. In industries impacted by climate policy, the plan should increase the capacity of workers and organizations to adapt and compete in a net zero economy.

Where possible, regional labor marke t data should be used to demonstrate the current or projected labor demand and skill needs for proposed plans.

Recruitment practices that are beneficial in the context of a TCC grant would use targeted recruitment strategies, consistent with federal and state law, to direct training opportunities to residents and/or businesses within the TCC Project Area, low -income residents, residents of disadvantaged communities, veterans, and/or re sidents displaced or otherwise impacted by project development. Organizations and individuals responsible for recruitment should have proven track records working amongst diverse populations and socioeconomic barriers by providing evidence of previous simi lar experience. Lead Applicant and/or partners can collaborate with local non-profit organizations for successful implementation of targeted hiring.

Tools to support targeted hiring may include, but are not limited to:
▪ Community Benefits Agreement (CBA): A contract between community -based organizations and project proponents or agencies that identifies benefits to be provided as part of a project or program. CB As commonly feature hiring priority for low -income individuals and prevailing wage requirements. CBAs may also include provisions for ongoing community engagement to ensure continued success. ▪ Labor agreements or community workforce provisions: Comprehensive agreements between labor unions and project proponents (e.g., contractors, developers) or local agencies (e.g., transit agencies, cities) to achieve a breadth of objectives including uniform labor standards. These agreements may extend across multiple projects. 78 of 325

Applicants may choose to prioritize projects with established labor agreements or community workforce provisions that contain targeted hiring provisions. ▪ Contract provisions: Contract provisions between a Grantee and Partner or subcontractor that include criteria for targeted hiring that provides quality jobs. ▪ Establishing and/or supporting a Workforce Resource Center in the Project Area to facilitate recruitment for workforce training programs and supportive services to trainees.

Climate Adaptation and Resilience
Climate adaptation and resilience provisions should be integrated into the Vision Statement, Strategies, Projects, and Transformative Plans of the TCC Proposal.

Applicants must describe how the TCC investment and leverage-funded projects will increase resilience of the Project Area to the anticipated impacts from climate change. This includes describing:
▪ Climate change risks and exposures within the Project Area, such as additional days of extreme heat or precipitation, increased average temperatures, wildfire, flooding, sea level rise, a nd drought;
▪ Anticipated impacts of climate change risks and exposures on the community, inc luding vulnerable populations; and,
▪ Anticipated impacts of climate change risks and exposures on the built environment.

Based on the risks and anticipated impacts, Applicants will describe the processes and community collaboration/stakeholder engagement approach they will use to identify and prioritize adaptation measures to:
▪ Address climate change-related impacts and exposures for vulnerable populations; and ▪ Increase resilience and functionality of proposed infrastructure projects.

Applicants must also identify any local, regional, or state climate adaptation plans, vulnerability assessments, or other climate resilience and adaptation frameworks and programs relevant to the project area and specify how the project will support any ongoing adaptation planning and implementation efforts.12 See Appendix C for additional resources to support this analysis.

12 Senate Bill 379 (Jackson, 2015) requires cities and counties to address climate adaptation and vulnerability in the safety elements of their General Plans. For more information on the requirements of SB 379, see Government Code section 65302(g), the State's 2020 Adaptation Planning Guide or the General Plan Guidelines Chapter 4. 79 of 325

Leverage
Applicants must leverage additional funding sources that equal a minimum of 50 percent (50%) of the total requested grant funds.

Applicants must leverage additional funding to support the implementation of the TCC Proposal.

Leverage funds may come from a variety of sources, such as federal, state, local public, private and/or philanthropic. For additional information about eligible funding sources, refer to Appendix C.

Threshold
▪ The chart below illustrates how the 50 percent (50%) leverage funding requirement may be met.

Eligible Projects or Plans Percentage of Leverage Total Dollar Amount Leverage funding for Grant-funded
projects or Transformative Plans

At least 40%

$14,000,000
Stand-alone leverage projects Up to 10% $3,500,000
Total 50% $17,500,000

▪ Applicants may exceed fifty percent (50%) but will not receive additional points for a higher leverage total.
▪ The specific leverage funds and projects that will count towards the 50 percent ( 50%) requirement for the grant will be finalized during the Post-award Consultation process.

Leverage Funding Requirements
▪ Leverage funding must be committed at the time of application submittal. ▪ Leverage funds may come from a variety of sources, such as federal, state, local public, private and/or philanthropic. For additional information about eligible funding sources, refer to Appendix C.
▪ Leverage funding must clearly support the implementation of the Strategies selected to achieve the TCC Program Objectives (see Section II.C).
▪ Leverage funding must be spent within the TCC Project Are a and for the purposes of the TCC Project.
▪ Expenditure of leverage funding will only count towards the 50 percent (50%) threshold if it occurs after the grant has been awarded by Strategic Growth Council and before the end of the grant term.
▪ Leverage funding expenditures and progress will be reported on an annual basis.

Clarifications for “Stand-alone Leverage Projects”
▪ Stand-alone leverage proje cts must be clearly integrated into the overall TCC Proposal, aligned with the TCC Proposal timeline, and within the TCC Project Area. Applicants must demonstrate that the investment was initiated in anticipation of applying for the TCC Program, or that the investment is contingent upon a TCC award. 80 of 325

o Existing stand-alone investments (on -going investments that were not initiated in anticipation of or contingent upon a TCC award) will not count towards the 50 percent (50%) leverage requirement. Applican ts will describe existing stand -alone investments that make the Project Area ready for transformation in the application narrative, and that will be scored under the “Vision for Transformation” criteria. ▪ To ensure that stand -alone leverage projects are com mitted at the time of application and implemented during the project timeline, Applicants are required to include the leverage partners and scope of work in the TCC Project’s overall Partnership Agreement. ▪ Leverage projects may not be removed from the TCC Proposal scope of work after the grant has been awarded by the Strategic Growth Council. SGC may consider the failure of a stand- alone leverage project to adhere to the terms of the Partnership Agreement and constitute a Grantee’s non-performance under the Grant Agreement.

F. PROGRAM POLICY PRIORITIES
In addition to the TCC Program Framework, the following program policy p riorities will be evaluated during the application process:

High Speed Rail Connectivity
This section is only applicable to Applicants from cities with planned High Speed Rail stations along the initial “Silicon Valley to Central Valley Line”.

The California High Speed Rail Authority’s 2018 Business Plan describes the plan to complete construction of the initial “Silicon Valley to Central Valley Line” from San Francisco to Bakersfield and begin providing passenger service by 2027. To leverage the State’s investment in High Speed Rail and support its successful implementation, as well as to help ensure that economic benefits, job opportunities, and environmental improvements accrue to neighborhoods immediately surrounding the High Speed Rail station area, Applicants from cities with planned High Speed Rail stations along the initial “Silicon Valley to Central Valley Line” must assure that the TCC Project Area includes:
▪ Multimodal connectivity to the High Speed Rail station area; and ▪ Affordable and mixed -income housing (if proposed) is connected and accessible to the High Speed Rail station area.

Consistency with Existing Local Land Use and Transportation Plans Applicants must demonstrate that TCC Proposals are consistent with all relevant land use plans including climate action plans, designations, zoning, building intensity and density requirements, design guidelines, and applicable goals, policies, and programs. Consistency shall be demonstrated by submittal of a letter from the local jurisdiction’s Planning Department and Public Works Department describing the proposed TCC projects’ consistency with all relevant plans. Applicants with unincorporated Project Areas must demonstrate that the TCC Proposal is consistent with local growth and conservation planning elements and will not result in unmanaged greenfield or leapfrog development.
81 of 325

Access to Basic Infrastructure, Regional Services, and Job Centers Applicants must demonstrate that the TCC investment will provide long-term benefits to the community.

Applicants must demonstrate that residents in the proposed TCC Project Area have existing access or have developed plans and secured support/funding to implement:
• Basic environmental infrastructure including water supply and wastewater services, with long- term operations and maintenance plans, in compliance with State Water Board standards; and • Transit connectivity to regional service hubs and major job centers through affordable, clean transportation projects.

SGC recognizes th at the lack of this infrastructure is an existing barrier in many disadvantaged communities. TCC staff and technical assistance providers will work with potential Applicants during the pre-proposal phase to help make connections to other funding programs or resources that may help them meet the minimum requirements. Applicants can request up to 10% of requested funds to support projects that will connect residents to basic environmental infrastructure. Please see Appendix F for a list of resources to support applicants in meeting this requirement.

Air Pollution Reduction and Mitigation Policies
The TCC program will provide points for applications located in jurisdictions that have demonstrated substantial progress towards preventing future and mitigating existing stationary sources of localized air pollution by adopting policies or programs that rectify environmental justice issues. Points may also be awarded to applications that will reduce or mitigate pollution through their proposed TCC funded strategies and projects.

Examples of policies and programs that reduce or mitigate sources of pollution include, but are not limited to, the following: enforcement programs ensuring compliance with point-source emission limits; programs with clear implementation actions related to reducing pollution from existing heavy industries; and land use restrictions related to separating polluting land uses from sensitive receptors. For these policies to be eligible, each policy must include clear implementation actions and timelines, or dedicated activities related to the passage of such policies or programs. A list of qualifying Air Pollution Reduction and Mitigation policies are listed in Appendix E.

Prohousing Policies
The TCC program will provide maximum points for applications located in Prohousing designated jurisdictions. Partial points will be awarded to applications from jurisdictions that have applied for Prohousing and while not receiving the designation yet, have been determined by HCD to have adopted the VMT -reducing Prohousing criteria . A l ist of VMT-reducing Prohousing policies that qualify as Prohousing policies and further information on the Prohousing program are listed in Appendix D.

The Prohousing policy incentive wi ll not apply to applications located in federally recognized tribal boundaries, and the TCC program will provide maximum points in this category for those applications.

82 of 325

G. APPLICATION
Application Components and Process
Implementation Grants will be evaluated and awarded through a competitive process. Applications will be submitted electronically and SGC will provide instructions with the Notice of Funding Availability and Application materials.

All applications and submi tted materials will be treated in accordance with Public Records Act requirements and certain information subject to those requirements will be publicly disclosed. SGC will post a summary of all applications received prior to funding decisions.

Staff recommendations will be made available for public review 10 days prior to SGC’s public meeting where the Strategic Growth Council will consider staff’s award recommendations.

Application Review Process
▪ TCC Program Staff will first evaluate Proposals using the Program Thresholds below.

Program Thresholds are based on eligibility and TCC Program requirements. If an Applicant is unable to meet the Program Thresholds, their Proposal will not proceed to the next step of the review process.
▪ If a Proposal meets all Program Thresholds, TCC Program Staff and an interagency review panel will evaluate the Proposal using the Scoring Criteria below. Applicants will receive a single score out of 205 points. TCC Program Staff will recommend awards based on these scores. The Strategic Growth Council will make final awards at a Council meeting. ▪ In addition to submitting Proposals, all Applicants who have met the Program Thresholds must host a site visit for TCC Program Staff and members from the interagency review panel.

Site visits will be conducted during standard work hours and will be coordinated between Applicants and TCC Program Staff.

Application Components
Below is a brief summary of the application components:
▪ Program Thresholds Documentation (outlined below)
▪ Narrative descriptions of the Project Area and the Vision Statement ▪ Narrative descriptions of Strategies and how they will address Project Area needs ▪ Narrative descriptions of climate risks, exposures, and adaptation/resilience measures ▪ For all Projects and Transformative Plans:
o Narrative questions
o Work Plans with clear timelines, discrete tasks, and detailed deliverables o Budgets broken down by task and line item, accompanied by sufficient supporting documentation: Quotes must be provided for the purchase of any electronics, equipment above $5,000, and for subcontractors above $100,000 o Readiness documentation and/or letters of support
83 of 325

Program Thresholds
Category Threshold Requirement
General
Completeness
□ Application materials are fully completed.
□ Application documents are properly labeled, stored in the proper file structure, and are easily accessible.
□ Work Plans adhere to the five (5) year Project Completion Period and contain sufficient detail.
□ Budgets contain sufficient detail and are accompanied by all necessary supporting documentation.

Applicant
Eligibility
□ Lead Applicant is an eligible organization.
□ Co-Applicants are all eligible organizations.
□ Lead Applicant or Co-Applicant are a public agency.

Collaborative
Stakeholder
Structure
□ Partnership Agreement for the Collaborative Stakeholder Structure meets all requirements as described in Section II.A.
□ Applicants with a Project Area that overlaps multiple jurisdictions have submitted a Memorandum of U nderstanding that meets all requirements described in Section II.A.

Project Area
Eligibility
□ Project is no larger than approximately five (5) square miles. □ Project Area meets all Priority Population requirements. □ Applicant has submitted a Project Area Map in all required formats.

Strategies and
Projects
□ Applicant has selected at least three (3) Strategies and proposed at least three (3) Projects.
□ At least three (3) proposed Projects are both quantifiable and ready, and comprise of at least 50 percent (50%) of requested grant funds.

Priority
Policies
□ High Speed Rail (HSR): Applicants with planned HSR stations located along “Silicon Valley to Central Valley Line” corridor have included the following in their proposals:
□ Multi-modal connectivity to the HSR station area; and □ Affordable and mixed-income housing is connected and accessible to the High Speed Rail station area.
□ Planning Consistency: Applicant has submitted a letter from the local jurisdiction’s Plann ing Department verifying that the TCC Proposal is consistent with land use designations, building intensity, density, applicable goals, policies and programs, climate adaptation plans, and growth and conservation planning elements.
□ Basic Infrastructure: Applicant has submitted documentation of existing access to basic infrastructure (water supply and wastewater services) and long -term operations and maintenance plans, or a developed plan to obtain and maintain basic infrastructure.
84 of 325

□ Regional Connectivity: Ap plicant has submitted documentation of existing transit connectivity to regional service hubs and major job centers, or a letter verifying the TCC Proposal will include affordable, clean transportation projects to provide connectivity.

85 of 325

Scoring Criteria Summary

SCORING CRITERIA POINTS
Objectives and Vision 45 Points
Capacity 30 Points
Transformative Elements 75 Points
Projects 50 Points
Prohousing Policy Incentive 5 Points
TOTAL 205 POINTS

Scoring Criteria Details
OBJECTIVES AND VISION – 45 POINTS
Criteria Points
Vision for Transformation

1. Vision Statement has been designed to meet the needs of the Project Area and achieve the TCC Program Objectives.

2. Strategies have been selected to effectively address the Vision Statement.

3. Projects and Transformative Elements are integrated to maximize benefits to the Project Area.

4. Proposed Projects demonstrate they provide benefits to priority populations as defined by CARB, CalEPA, CalEnviroScreen, and the TCC Program (further explained at
https://www.caclimateinvestments.ca.gov/priority-populations).

5. Project Area prioritizes investment in California’s most disadvantaged communities.

6. Applicant has provided a holistic, thoughtful description of the community resources, assets, and local characteristics that make the Project Area ready for transformation and able to achieve the Program Objectives. 20 Points
Greenhouse Gas Emissions Reductions
Points for this section will be awarded on a sliding scale, determined relative to the estimated GHG emission reductions for all eligible applications submitted.

1. GHG Emission reduction estimates for top three (3) Projects with highest GHG reduction potentials using CARB a pproved quantification methodologies and meet readiness requirements at time of Application submittal.
20 Points
86 of 325

Criteria Points

2. GHG Emission reduction estimates for all projects with CARB Quantification Methodology.

Air Pollution Reduction and Mitigation
Maximum points will be awarded to Project Area or jurisdiction that has demonstrated or proposes direct localized air pollution reduction and mitigation policies, which includes improved community exposure to particulate matter and toxic air contaminants. Partial points are available for indirect policies. Appendix E includes a tiered list of direct and indirect example policies.

1. Applicant has demonstrated substantial progress towards preventing , reducing, and mitigating existing sources of local air pollution through policy adoption, enforcement programs, land use planning, etc.

2. Applicant has proposed policies and programs that will make substantial progress towards preventing, reducing, and mitigating existing sources of pollution through TCC funded projects and strategies.
5 Points

CAPACITY – 30 POINTS
Criteria Points
Financial

1. Lead A pplicant demonstrates the experience, financial stability and capacity to manage program funds from multiple sources.

2. Co-applicants demonstrate the experience, financial stability and capacity to manage program funds from multiple sources.

3. The Proposal includes funding that meets the 50 percent (50%) leverage requirement.
10 Points
Management and Organization

1. Lead Applicant demonstrates organizational capacity to implement the TCC Proposal (e.g., has experience managing similar programs and/or long-term grant implementation).

2. Co-applicants demonstrate organizational capacity to support Lead Applicant in implementation of the TCC Proposal.

3. Public agency partner(s) demonstrates a strong commitment to support the implementation of projects and policies included in the TCC Proposal. 10 Points
Collaborative Stakeholder Structure

1. Lead Applicant and Co-applicants have established work history, sustained community engagement around climate change, and/or experience working with one or more of the following areas: disadvantaged 10 Points
87 of 325

communities, housing and community development, economic development, environmental, and public health issues.

2. Collaborative Stakeholder Structure is composed of a diverse representation of residents and key stakeholders (e.g., labor unions, nonprofits, faith -based groups, community -based organizations, academics, economic development institutions, workforce development groups, businesses, representatives from local School District, Community College District, and others ), and incorporates robust resident and community leadership.

3. A signed Partnership Agreement for the Collaborative Stakeholder Structure that includes all components listed in Section II.A.

TRANSFORMATIVE ELEMENTS – 75 POINTS
Criteria Points
Community Engagement

1. Proposal includes a detailed description of the mechanisms through which residents and key stakeholders were meaningfully involved in the development of the Vision Statement and selection of Strategies and Projects.

2. Community Engagement Plan includes detailed descriptions and timelines of diverse and appropriate community engagement activities that will be used throughout the duration of the grant, including how the public will remain engaged and informed.

3. Community Engagement Plan present s an inclusive process to receive feedback from the community with diverse backgrounds.

4. Community Engagement is tied to a governance structure that presents the ways in which community members from diverse backgrounds will be represented and the community concerns at large will be taken into consideration.

5. Work Plans include clear timelines, discrete tasks, and detailed deliverables. Budgets have adequate detail and demonstrate financial feasibility.
30 Points
Displacement Avoidance

1. Proposal includes comprehensive description of displacement vulnerability among existing households and small businesses.

2. Proposal includes programmatic activities for implementation of previously adopted policies that avoid displacement of existing households and small businesses.
15 Points
88 of 325

3. Proposal includes activities to promote the adoption of new policies to avoid displacement that align with risks identified in vulnerability assessment.

4. Proposal includes a combination of short- and long-term policies.

5. Work Plans include clear timelines, discrete tasks, and detailed deliverables. Budgets have adequate detail and demonstrate financial feasibility.

Workforce Development and Economic Opportunities

1. Proposal includes workforce development and training programs that lead to industry-recognized credentials, career pathways, and high-quality jobs for residents of the Project Area and individuals with employment barriers.

2. Proposal includes an economic opportunities plan that will lead to the creation of local, high-quality jobs for residents of the Project Area and individuals with employment barriers.

3. Proposal demonstrates how the plan addresses current and projected labor demand and skill needs in a net zero economy.

4. Work Plans include clear timelines, discrete tasks, and detailed deliverables. Budgets have adequate detail and demonstrate financial feasibility.
20 Points
Climate Adaptation and Resilience

1. Proposal describes the climate change risks and exposures within the Project Area.

2. Proposal analyzes the impact of climate change risks and exposures on both the community and built environment.

3. Proposal describes process to identify and prioritize actions for addressing risks for vulnerable populations and to increasing the resilience of proposed infrastructure projects, including connecting efforts to local planning documents and/or the CARB Climate Adaptation Questionnair e, available at www.arb.ca.gov/cci-cobenefit.

4. Proposal demonstrates how infrastructure investments will both contribute to community resilience and itself be resilient to future climate impacts (e.g., through indicators and metrics).
10 Points

89 of 325

PROJECTS – 50 POINTS
Criteria Points
Project Design and Feasibility

1. Projects are designed to meet the community’s needs. This includes, but is not limited to, appropriate scope, scale, components, etc.

2. Work Plans include clear timelines, discrete tasks, and detailed deliverables. Budgets have adequate detail and demonstrate financial feasibility.

3. Readiness documentation (e.g., CEQA, site control, permits) demonstrate that readiness has been met at time of application or within one (1) year of grant execution.
30 Points
Implementation

1. Projects address climate adaptation and resilience goals for the Project Area and demonstrate the project itself will be climate resilient.

2. Projects provide multiple community benefits to the Project Area (e.g., education, ongoing engagement, economic opportunities).

3. Applicant has identified potential neg ative impacts of each project (e.g., temporary relocation, disruption during construction, potential displacement) and developed mitigation strategies and/or contingency plans.

4. Projects include clear plans for long -term operations and maintenance, including coordination with appropriate responsible parties. 20 Points
PROHOUSING POLICY INCENTIVE – 5 POINTS
Criteria Points
Prohousing Policy Incentive
Maximum points will be awarded to a Project Area designated as a Prohousing jurisdiction. Partial points a re available to Project Area jurisdictions that have applied for, and are awaiting designation, and has been determined by HCD to have adopted VMT-reducing Prohousing criteria as listed in Appendix D. 5 Points

90 of 325

H. GRANT ADMINISTRATION
Below is a brief description of the grant administration responsibilities and principles for the TCC Program. For additional information, refer to the sample grant agreement in Appendix J.

Grantees, Partners, and Subcontractors
Grants will be executed between SGC and the Lead Applicant only . SGC will not enter into any contractual relationship with any Co-Applicants or subcontractors.

Once the grant has been executed, t he Lead Applicant will be referred to as the “Grantee” and Co - applicants will be referred to as “Partners”.

Strategic Growth Council and Department of Conservation The TCC Program is administered by Strategic Growth Council in partnership with the Department of Conservation (DOC). Round 4 grant agreements will be executed between the Grantee and SGC, but Grantees will work closely with DOC during grant implementation.

Disbursement and Accounting of Funds
▪ The Grantee cannot request reimbursement for any costs incurred or work completed before grant execution.
▪ Grantees may request reimbursement from SGC on a bimonthly basis (every two months). ▪ SGC will retain the last five percent (5%) of each project budget, to be paid once the State has determined that the grant terms have been fulfilled.
▪ Partners must invoice the Grantee before the Grantee submits an invoice to SGC. The Grantee will be responsible for compiling all invoices, supporting documentation, and reporting materials for themselves and the Partners into a single package. Once the package has been approved for payment, funds will be dispersed to the Grantee. The Grantee is responsible for d ispersing payment to their Partners in accordance with their signed Partnership Agreement. 91 of 325

▪ SGC is not authorized to provide advance payments for the TCC Program. However, some past TCC Grantees have been able to establish local advance payment mechanisms to enable Partners with less financial capacity to participate in the TCC grant.13

Reporting Requirements
Grantees are responsible for four categories of reporting:

Progress Reports
▪ Bimonthly progress reports will be submitted with each invoice and will track the work completed during the invoice period.
▪ Annual progress reports will report on the overall status of the grant. They will include high- level questions not captured in the bimonthly updates.

Budget Reports
▪ Leverage funding expenditures will be reported annually and at the end of the grant term. ▪ An inventory of purchased equipment will be reported a nnually and at the end of the grant term.
▪ Detailed Work Plans and Budgets will be revised on a regular basis. These documents will contain more detail than the grant agreement and will be used as administrative tracking tools between the Grantee and the state.

Data Collection and Indicator Tracking
▪ Grantees must comply with the stages of data collection and indicator tracking, as described in Section II.E.

Close-Out Reports
▪ Project Close -out reports will be submitted as each individual project completes all deliverables in the Work Plan.
▪ A Final report will be submitted at the end of the grant term.

Prevailing Wage Requirements
TCC-funded projects may be subject to State Prevailing Wage Requirements, pursuant to Section 1700 of the California Labor Code. The California Labor Code requires payment of locally prevailing wages to workers and laborers on state government contracts in excess of $1,000 for public works projects. A “public work” is the construction, alteration, demolition, installation, repair or maintenance work done under contract and paid for in whole or in part out of public funds. The definition applies to private

13 City of Oakland (Round 3 Implementation Grant) passed City Council Resolution 20-0746 on November 10, 2020:
<https://oakland.legistar.com/LegislationDetail.aspx?ID=4681374&GUID=0DFD8C3B-3B4E-4A49-82A3- 753D2AB15DDA&Options=&Search=>. City of Stockton (Round 3 Implementation Grant) included advance payment terms for smaller capacity Partners in their TCC MOU.
92 of 325

contracts when certain conditions exist. Grantee can identify additional stipulations and exceptions under Cal. Labor Code § 1720 et seq.

Grantee must ensure the following on “public work” activities under this Grant Agreement:
▪ Prevailing wages are paid;
▪ The project budget and invoices for labor reflects prevailing wage requirements , or if exempt, provide the applicable exemption to SGC with the project budget; and ▪ The project complies with all other requirements of prevailing wage law, including but not limited to, keeping accurate payroll records, and complying with all working hour requirements and apprenticeship obligations.

Grantee shall ensure that its Partners and Subcontractors, if any, also comply with prevailing wage requirements. Grantee shall ensure that all agreements with its Partners and Subcontractors to perform work related to this Project contain the above terms regarding payment of prevailing wages on public works projects.

The Department of Industrial Relation s (DIR) is the primary resource for consultation on the requirements of California prevailing wage law.
▪ Grantee can identify the rates for prevailing wage on the DIR website 14. Grantee may contact DIR for a list of covered trades and the applicable prevailing wage. ▪ If Grantee is unsure whether the TCC Project or individual projects receiving this award is a “public work” as defined in the California Labor Code, it may wish to seek a timely determination from the DIR or an appropriate court.
▪ If Grantee has questions about this contractual requirement, recordkeeping, apprenticeship, or other significant requirements of California prevailing wage law, it is recommended the Grantee consult DIR and/or a qualified labor attorney.

Ownership
The following section outlines the long -term governing principles for ownership of Project elements funded by the TCC grant.

Equipment
For any equipment purchased or built with funds that are reimbursable as a direct cost of the TCC Project, as determined by SGC, the Grantee, Partner, or Subcontractor, as applicable, must be the sole owner on title. During the Project Completion Period, e quipment must be dedicated to the described use in the same proportion and scope as was in the Grant Agreement, unless SGC agrees otherwise in writing. On completion or early termination of the Grant Agreement, the State will either require that the equipm ent be returned or authorize the continued use of such equipment at the Project Area; in making that determination, the State will consider the useful life of the equipment, and the Grantee may be required to refund the State for the fair market value of equipment that continues to have a usable life, but is no longer

14 California Department of Industrial Relations, July 2018. <http://www.dir.ca.gov> 93 of 325

required for Project implementation. Grantee will be required to maintain an inventory record for each piece of non-expendable equipment purchased or built with funds provided under the terms of a Grant Agreement.

Vehicles
For any vehicles acquired with funds that are reimbursable as a direct cost of the TCC Project, the Grantee, Lead Entity, or Subcontractor, as applicable , must be the sole owner on title .

Vehicles acquired – including, but no t limited to, bicycles, cars, buses, vans, rail passenger equipment – must be maintained in a state of good repair and dedicated to the described use during the grant term and to public transportation use for their full useful life.

Infrastructure
For any rights of way, real and personal property, leases, improvements and infrastructure funded as a reimbursable direct cost of the TCC Project, the Grantee , Lead Entity, or an appropriate public agency or subcontractor, as applicable, must be the sole owner of the title or leasehold. Each site acquired or improved upon with TCC funding must be maintained in a state of good repair and remain permanently dedicated to the described use for its full useful life.

If the ownership or use of equipment, vehicles, or i nfrastructure changes to a use not in accordance with the TCC Guidelines or Grant Agreement, the Grantee may be required to reimburse the State in a manner determined by SGC.

Publicity Requirements
TCC Grantees are required to use SGC and DOC names and/or logos for all publications, websites, signage, invitations, and other media -related and public -outreach products related to the TCC grant.

See Appendix H for specific requirements.

Audit and Record Retention
All records, physical and electronic, must be adequately protected from loss, damage, or destruction for possible audit(s). The Grantee agrees that the State or designated representative will have the right during normal business hours to review and to cop y any records and supporting documentation pertaining to the performance of the Grant Agreement and interview any employees who might reasonably have information related to such records.

Further, Grantee agrees to include a similar right of the State to audit records and interview staff of any Partners and Subcontractors related to performance of the Grant Agreement. ▪ Grantee, Partners, and Subcontractors must maintain copies of project records four (4) years after all terms of the Grant Agreement are fulfilled, unless a longer period of records retention is stipulated.
▪ The State retains the right to conduct an audit e ach year during the grant term and up to four (4) years after all terms under the Grant Agreement are fulfilled. 94 of 325

▪ The State may require recovery of payment from the Grantee, issue a Stop Work Order or terminate the Grant Agreement, as warranted, based on an audit finding, or any other remedies available in law or equity.

Performance
SGC has sole discretion to determine if Grantee is performing in accordance with the Grant Agreement.

Non-performance issues can include but are not limited to: misuse of fundin g for ineligible expenses; inability to meet performance requirements or scheduled milestones; failure to complete or failure to make a good faith effort to complete the TCC Project as a whole or any TCC Project Components , including ensuring leverage-only projects adhere to the Partnership Agreement, and/or failure to comply with the Guidelines or terms and conditions of the Grant Agreement. ▪ SGC will notify Grantee, in writing, if non -performance is determined, and will provide instructions and a timeline to rectify all cases of non-performance. ▪ Grantee must respond to a determination of non-performance within thirty (30) days either by a) acting on corrective actions and notifying SGC of actions taken, or b) disputing SGC’s findings in writing.
▪ SGC, without waiver of other rights or remedies, may require the Grantee to re -perform any actions defined in this Grant Agreement if determined to be not performed in accordance with the Grant Agreement. SGC may withhold any payments due to Grantee until the Grantee brings the individual project or TCC Project back into full compliance. Costs and expenses for these actions shall be borne by the applicable Grantee, Partner, or Subcontractor. ▪ SGC has the right to issue a Stop Work Order for an individual project or the TCC Project and suspend payments to the Grantee. SGC reserves the right to issue a Stop Work Order if there is a breach in the leveraged funding commitments that put components of the Project at risk of not being completed.
▪ Both SGC and the Grantee have the right to terminate the Grant Agreement prior to the end of the grant term upon thirty (30) calendar days of written notice. The written notice shall specify the reason for early termination and may permit SGC or the Grantee to rectify any deficiencies prior to the termination date.

95 of 325

SECTION III. PLANNING GRANTS
A. ELIGIBILITY
Eligible Lead Applicants
Eligible Lead Applicants may include but are not limited to: community -based organizations, local governments, nonprofit organizations, philanthropi c organizations and foundations, faith -based organizations, coalitions or associations of nonprofit organizations, community development finance institutions, community development corporations, joint powers authorities, councils of governments, and California Native American Tribes.

Co-Applicants
There must be a minimum of one (1) Co-Applicant in addition to the Lead Applicant. More than one (1) Co-Applicant is strongly encouraged. Priority in scoring will be given to applications that are able to demonstrate strong and diverse partnerships, including with community-based organizations and other stakeholder groups. Applicants will be required to submit an explanation of the partnersh ip structure and roles and responsibilities of each partner.

Collectively, “Lead Applicants” and “Co-Applicants” are referred to as “Applicants”.

Eligible Planning Area
Applicants must define a contiguous Planning Area comprised of census tracts designated as disadvantaged communities per the CalEnviroScreen and TCC Round 4 Guidelines. Planning Areas may be located in eligible incorporated, tribal, or disadvantaged unincorporated areas.

At least 51% of th e Planning Area must overlap with census tracts designated as disadvantaged communities per CalE nviroScreen and the TCC Mapping Tool : within the t op 25% of disadvantaged communities per CalEnviroScreen 4.0 or 3.0, all federally recognized tribal boundaries , or an eligible disadvantaged unincorporated area. The remaining area (49 percent or less) must be within the top 25% of disadvantaged communities or a low-income community as defined by AB 1550.

Applicants will be required to submit a map of the Planning Area that will be the focus of the application’s activities. Applicants with Planning Areas that cross jurisdictional boundaries will be required to submit a Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) as outlined in Section II.A.

Public Agency Support
Either the Lead Applicant or one of the Co-Applicants must be a public agency. 96 of 325

If the Lead Applicant is a public agency, they must provide a formal resolution that in cludes an authorization to apply for and accept a TCC Implementation Grant if selected for an award, and authority to execute all related documents if awarded.15
If the public agency is a Co-applicant, then the Applicant must provide a letter of support from the public agency.

Consistency with Existing Local Land Use and Transportation Plans Applicants must demonstrate that TCC planning proposals are consistent with all relevant land use plans such as climate action plans, designations, zoning, building intensity and density requirements, design guidelines, and applicable goals, policies, and programs. Consistency shall be demonstrated by submittal of a letter from the local jurisdiction’s Planning Department and Public Works Department describing the TCC proposal’s consistency with all relevant plans as described above. Note that TCC planning proposals may also include efforts to revise land use plans consistent with the juris diction’s goals and policies.

B. PROGRAM OBJECTIVES
The Planning Grants intend to support planning activities to prepare disadvantaged communities for future funding opportunities in programs that align with the TCC Program’s objectives. Planning activities should focus on responding to planning issues or priorities that directly benefit low-income and disadvantaged communities.

1. Applicants must explain how the proposed planning activities will advance the objectives prioritized in local adopted plans and promote the Transformative Climate Communities Program’s Objectives (see Section II.C).

2. Applicants must explain how the planning process furthers a neighborhood’s ability to address one or more of the Implementation Grant’s Transformative Elements, per Section II. E.

Specifically, Applicants will describe how engaging in a particular task will:
a. Consider the risks and develop potential policies and programs to avoid displacement of the Planning Area’s current residents and businesses.
b. Design or enhance innovative and meaningful community engagement programs and practices that will be built upon the input and expertise of community stakeholders – including local public agencies, community-based organizations, workforce development boards, and others.
c. Enhance the Planning Area’s potential to secure leveraged funds that are required for the TCC Implementation Grant proposal.

15 Note this streamlining measure will allow awarded entities to execute grants and start projects without additional procedural delays.
97 of 325

d. Identify opportunities (e.g., projects) to reduce GHG emissions and further the purpose of AB 32 and SB 32.
e. Identify the impacts of climate change risks and exposures on the community, including vulnerable populations, and infrastructure/natural systems, and describe measures that will be taken to adapt and respond to anticipated impacts. f. Identify the Planning Area’s needs for economic development and career pathways for high quality jobs. Plan for new or enhanced workforce development and training programs.

3. Applicants must demonstrate consistency with the State’s Planning Priorities contained in Section 65041.1 of the Government Code. These priorities intend to promote equity, strengthen the economy, protect the environment, and promote public health and safety in the state, including urban, suburban, and rural communities.

C. EXAMPLES OF ELIGIBLE PLANNING ACTIVITIES
Some examples of eligible planning activities include:
▪ Building capacity both internally, among staff and departments, as well as externally, among stakeholders, by including the development of collaborations partnerships that connect land use development with environmental, economic and social justice priorities. ▪ Evaluating, updating, and streamlining various policies and codes currently enforced by the Planning Department and other local departments (e.g., public works, health and safety, fire, parks and open space, etc.).
▪ Completing fiscal ana lyses and studies, such as conducting a fiscal impact analysis to understand long-term service costs of future development and to determine fee structures. ▪ Preparing climate action and climate adaptation plans. ▪ Designing or enhancing community engagement t hat results in innovative and meaningful programs and practices built upon the input and expertise of local public agency staff, community-based organizations, workforce development boards, and overburdened individuals and groups.
▪ Engaging in activities th at will prepare applicants to apply to a TCC Implementation Grant or other similar grant, including but not limited to: partnership development, stakeholder mapping, community needs assessment s, community health needs assessment s, and creation and/or formalization of a shared governance structure such as a Collaborative Stakeholder Structure.

Activities that lead to the development of a Collaborative Stakeholder Structure are strongly encouraged for applicants who anticipate applying to a TCC Implementation Grant in the future. ▪ Identifying and preparing project sites for future development into community-serving uses, such as community land trust feasibility studies and site identification, climate resilience project identification, and planning for project readiness.
98 of 325

For past examples of awarded Planning Grants, visit the SGC website. For a map of past program awards, refer to Appendix I.

D. APPLICATION
Planning Grants will be evaluated and awarded through a competitive process. Applications will be submitted electronically and SGC will provide instructions with the Notice of Funding Availability and Application materials.

All Applications and submitted materials will be treated in accordance with Pu blic Records Act requirements and certain information subject to those requirements will be publicly disclosed. SGC will post a summary of all Applications received prior to funding decisions.

Staff recommendations will be made available for public review ten (10) days prior to SGC public meeting, at which point Strategic Growth Council will consider staff’s award recommendations.

Application Review Process
TCC Program Staff will first evaluate applications to ensure that they are both eligible and complete.

Then TCC Program Staff and an interagency review panel will evaluate applications using the Scoring Criteria below. Applicants will receive a single score out of 100 points. TCC Program Staff will recommend awards based on these scores. The Strat egic Growth Council will make final awards at a Council meeting.

Application Components
Below is a brief summary of the application components:
▪ Documentation that the application meets all eligibility requirements described in Section III.A. ▪ Narrative descriptions of the Planning Area and community needs ▪ Narrative descriptions of how planning activities will address the TCC Program Objectives and Transformative Elements
▪ Work Plans with clear timelines, discrete tasks, and detailed deliverables ▪ Budgets with sufficient detail, broken down by task and line item

99 of 325

Scoring Criteria
PLANNING GRANTS SCORING CRITERIA – 100 POINTS
Criteria Points
Vision and Program Objectives

1. Applicant has provided a comprehensive description of the Planning Area and demonstrates an understanding of the local community’s needs.

2. Extent to which the proposed planning activities focus on improving outcomes for priority populations.

3. Proposed planning activities will address Objectives of:
• Achieving Significant Reductions in Greenhouse Gas Emissions • Improving Public Health and Environmental Benefits
• Expanding Economic Opportunity and Shared Prosperity

4. Extent to which the proposed planning activities are consistent with the state’s Planning Priorities, including promoting infill development, preserving agricultural lands, and encouraging location and resource - efficient new development.
30 Points
Transformative Requirements and Project Identification
Proposals are not required to address the entire list of TCC Implementation Grant transformative elements or project identification. Proposals may be awarded points based on both the number of transformative elements addressed, as well as the extent to which each transformative element is incorporated into the planning activities.

1. The Proposed planning activities will assist the Applicants in meeting the TCC Implementation Grant Transformative Elements related to:
• Community engagement
• Displacement avoidance
• Workforce development and economic opportunities
• Climate adaptation and resilience
• Leverage funding
• Data collection and indicator tracking

2. Applicant demonstrates a process to identify projects based on the community need and prioritize these projects based on feasibility.

Planning funds may not be used to initiate work on individual projects. 50 Points
Organizational Capacity

1. Applicant demonstrates readiness and capacity to implement the proposed work on time and within budget.

2. Applicant proposes strong and diverse partnerships for implementing the planning activities.
20 Points
100 of 325

E. GRANT ADMINISTRATION
Grantees, Partners, and Subcontractors
Grants will be executed between SGC and the Lead Applicant only. SGC will not enter into any contractual relationship with any Co-Applicants or subcontractors.

Once the grant has been executed, the Lead Applicant will be referred to as the “Grantee” and Co - applicants will be referred to as “Partners”.

Strategic Growth Council and Department of Conservation The TCC Program is administered by Strategic Growth Council in partnership with the Department of Conservation (DOC). Round 4 grant agreements will be executed between the Grantee and SGC, but Grantees will work closely with DOC during grant implementation.

Disbursement and Accounting of Funds
▪ The Grantee cannot request reimbursement for any work completed before grant execution. ▪ Grantees may request reimbursement from SGC on a quarterly basis (every three months). ▪ SGC will retain the last five percent (5%) of the grant, to be paid once the State has determined that the grant terms have been fulfilled.
▪ Partners must invoice the Grantee before the Grantee submits an invoice to SGC. The Grantee will be responsible for compiling all invoices, supporting documentation, and reporting materials for themselves and the Partners into a single package. Once the package has been approved for payment, funds will be dispersed to the Grantee. The Grantee is responsible for dispersing payment to their Partners.
▪ SGC is not authorized to provide advance payments for the TCC Program.

101 of 325

Reporting Requirements
Grantees are responsible the following reporting:

Progress Reports
▪ Quarterly progress reports will be submitted with each invoice and will track the work completed during the invoice period.
▪ A Final report on the overall status of the grant including lessons learned, barriers, and success stories.

Eligible Costs
Direct Costs
Direct costs incurred during the grant term and specified in the Grant Agreement will be eligible for reimbursement. Direct costs are defined as costs directly tied to the implementation of the Grant Agreement including, but not limited to: personnel, supplies, or travel expenses directly tied to the implementation of the grant. Grantees must adhere to the following requirements:
▪ Travel reimbursements must adhere to the State rates and conditions established on the CalHR website16, with the exception of “incidentals” and out-of-state travel, which will not be reimbursable under this grant.
▪ Subcontractor procurement processes must adhere to local requirements.

The following costs associated with community engagement and outreach are considered eligible, in keeping with the program’s objectives of increasing access and accountability to disadvantaged communities, and recognizing that public participation in community engagement activities is a benefit to the project and public:
• Translation and interpretation for meetings and written materials • Participant compensation that is an exchange of payment for services rendered in the development of community work products, and appropriately documented with deliverables such as sign in sheets or written surveys. • Provision of transportation services for community residents, such as a vanpool. • Provision of childcare services for community residents. • Food and refreshments that are determined to be an integral part of the event. Examples of activities where it would be appropriate to approve food purchase would include a design charrette held in the evening, where the meal is consumed as part of the event and replaces a meal otherwise missed by attending the event.

16 California Department of Human Resources. Travel Reimbursements. <http://www.calhr.ca.gov/employees/pages/travel- reimbursements.aspx>
102 of 325

Indirect Costs
Indirect costs may account for up to twelve percent (12%) of the total TCC grant award, minus any funds for equipment purchases with a per unit cost of $5,000 or more . The 12% maximum of indirect cost applies to all entities including University of Cal ifornia (UC) and California State University (CSU) entities.

Indirect costs are costs of doing business that are of a general nature. These costs are not directly tied to the grant but are necessary for the general operation of the organization. Indirect costs include, but are not limited to:
▪ Personnel costs associated with administrative, supervisory, legal, and executive staff. ▪ Personnel costs associated with support units, including clerical support, housekeeping, etc.
▪ Operating expenses and equipment co sts not included as part of direct project costs (functions such as accounting, budgeting, audits, business services, information technology, janitorial; and rent, utilities, supplies, etc.).

Documentation related to the determination of the Grantee’s indirect cost rate must be retained by the Grantee for audit purposes.

Ineligible Costs
The following costs are ineligible under the TCC Program:
▪ Indirect costs in excess of twelve percent (12%) of the awarded TCC funds are not reimbursable. ▪ The following costs associated with community engagement and outreach:
o Direct cash benefits or subsidies to participants.
o Alcoholic refreshments.
o Participant incentives, such as door prizes , which are unrelated to specific community work products.
o General Meetings that do not specifically discuss or advance implementation of the TCC Project
▪ Projects that fund additional parking infrastructure or other infrastructure projects that induce demand for additional parking

Publicity Requirements
TCC Planning Grantees are required to use SGC and DOC names and/or logos for all publications, websites, signage, invitations, and other media-related and public-outreach products related to the TCC grant. See Appendix H for specific requirements.

103 of 325

Audit and Record Retention
All records, physical and electronic, must be adequately protected from loss, damage, or destruction for possible audit(s). The Grantee agrees that the State or designated representative will have the right during normal business hours to review and to co py any records and supporting documentation pertaining to the performance of the Grant Agreement and interview any employees who might reasonably have information related to such records.

Further, Grantee agrees to include a similar right of the State to audit records and interview staff of any Partners and Subcontractors related to performance of the Grant Agreement. ▪ Grantee, Partners, and Subcontractors must maintain copies of project records four (4) years after all terms of the Grant Agreement are fulfilled, unless a longer period of records retention is stipulated.
▪ The State retains the right to conduct an audit each year during the grant term and up to four (4) years after all terms under the Grant Agreement are fulfilled. ▪ The State may require recov ery of payment from the Grantee, issue a stop work order or terminate the Grant Agreement, as warranted, based on an audit finding, or any other remedies available in law or equity.

The Grantee agrees to include a similar right of the state to audit record s and interview staff in any subcontract related to performance of this Grant Agreement.

Remedies for Non-performance
SGC has sole discretion to determine if Grantee is performing in accordance with the Grant Agreement.

Non-performance issues can include but are not limited to: misuse of funding for ineligible expenses; failure to comply with Guidelines or requirements, inability to meet performance requiremen ts or schedule milestones, and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of this Grant Agreement. ▪ SGC will notify Grantee, in writing, if non -performance is determined, and will provide instructions and a timeline to rectify all cases of non-performance. ▪ Grantee must respond to a determination of non-performance within thirty (30) days either by a) acting on corrective actions, or b) disputing SGC’s findings in writing. ▪ SGC, without waiver of other rights or remedies, may require the Grantee to re -perform any actions defined in this Grant Agreement if determined to be not performed in accordance with the Grant Agreement. SGC may withhold any payments due to Grantee until the Grantee brings the grant back into full compliance. Costs and expenses for these actions shall be borne by the applicable Grantee, Partner, or Subcontractor.
▪ SGC has the right to issue a Stop Work Order for the grant and suspend payments to the Grantee.
104 of 325

▪ Both SGC and the Grantee have the right to terminate the Grant Agreement prior to the end of the grant term upon thirty (30) calendar days of written notice. The written notice shall specify the reason for early termination and may permit SGC or the Grantee to rectify any deficiency(ies) prior to the termination date.
105 of 325

SECTION IV. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
A. APPLICATION TA
To support the development of competitive proposals, SGC will offer application technical assistance (TA) from third -party providers (TA providers) to el igible Applicants for the TCC Implementation Grants.

TA Providers will also support Applicants from tribal communities and disadvantaged unincorporated communities with technical assistance for both TCC Implementation and Planning Grants.

Unfortunately, third-party technical assistance is not currently available for other Applicants to TCC Planning Grants, but staff will be able to answer questions from potential Planning Grant Applicants.

Important points about Application TA:
▪ All Implementation Grant Applicants are required to receive TA. This allows SGC to ensure that questions are answered consistently, and that feedback is given equitably. ▪ All Implementation Grant Applicants must complete a technical assistance survey that indicates intent to apply and willingness to participate in technical assistance within the first two (2) weeks following the release of the Notice of Funding Availability (NOFA) to be eligible for TA. ▪ All applicants must undergo a threshold review with TA providers du ring the first month of the application period. This review will help applicants determine if they can meet all Program Thresholds (see Section II.G Application) and help them to reach an informed decision on whether to complete a full Implementation Grant application. Applicants who do not continue with a full implementation application can choose to complete a Planning Grant application. The evaluation completed by the TA providers with the applicants will be used to inform , but not disqualify, the applicants.
▪ Receiving Application TA does not guarantee that an Applicant will be awarded an Implementation Grant.
▪ Previous TCC Applicants will receive targeted techn ical assistance to adapt previously submitted applications to the updated guideline requirements and application format.

Application TA activities may include, but are not limited to:
▪ Support for quantification of GHG reductions;
▪ Direct application assistance, including review of responses and application coordination; ▪ Financial analysis and budget development;
▪ Identification of Project Area, integration of Projects, and cost estimates; ▪ Assessment of project readiness; and
▪ Geographic Information System mapping assistance.

106 of 325

B. IMPLEMENTATION TA
Applicants awarded Implementation Grants will receive Implementation TA and other technical support from representatives of SGC, DOC, CARB and other State entities throughout the implementatio n of their TCC Proposal for a timeframe to be determined by SGC.

Additional support conducted by SGC may include but are not limited to:
▪ Assistance in attracting and leveraging additional financing; ▪ Assistance developing and promoting transformative plans; and ▪ Assistance strengthening organizational capacity to integrate implementation efforts.

C. EVALUATION TA
Applicants awarded Implementation Grants are required to allocate a minimum of 3% of awarded grant funds towards the hiring of a pre-qualified, third-party Evaluation Technical Assistance Provider to assist with data collection and indicator tracking throughout grant implementation. Note that Lead and Co - Applicants should allocate an additional 2 -3% of funds towards indicator tracking and program evaluation activities. Please see Section II.F for more information.

Evaluation Technical Assistance Providers will support grantees with tracking and documenting the TCC Project’s progress and impact through the following:
▪ Development of a Site-Specific Evaluation Plan to assess the holistic impacts of the TCC project; ▪ Development of reporting tools and a technical assistance plan to support grantee and partners with gathering and reporting of data;
▪ Assistance with processing of data and delivering required annual reports to SGC; ▪ Participation in evaluation activities such as focus groups, surveys, and interviews; ▪ Annual Process Evaluation Mem os providing feedback on the TCC program design and implementation process.

Reporting is required during key stages of the grant cycle:
▪ One time reporting during the Application and Awarded Phase ▪ Annually during the Implemented Phase
▪ Final Reports during Close Out Phases

107 of 325

SECTION V. GRANT TIMELINE
The proposed timeline below is subject to change. The most up -to-date timeline can be found at https://sgc.ca.gov/programs/tcc/.
• February 24, 2022: Final Round 4 TCC Program Guidelines adopted by Council • March 8, 2022: NOFA Release
• March 11, 2022: Application Workshop
• March 25, 2022: Requests for Application Technical Assistance due • April 22, 2022: Application Pre-proposals due
• July 1, 2022: Final Applications due
• October 2022: Round 4 TCC Awards adopted by Council
• Approximately 3-6 months: Post Award Consultation Process before Implementation • Implementation Period: 5 years from grant execution
• Performance Period: 1 year after project completion

108 of 325

SECTION VI. APPENDICES
APPENDIX A – TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
APPENDIX B – TCC FUNDED PROJECTS BY STRATEGY
APPENDIX C – TRANSFORMATIVE ELEMENTS
APPENDIX D – PROHOUSING POLICIES
APPENDIX E – AIR POLLUTION REDUCTION AND MITIGATION
APPENDIX F – BASIC INFRASTRUCTURE RESOURCES
APPENDIX G – POST AWARD CONSULTATION PROCESS
APPENDIX H – PUBLICITY GUIDELINES
APPENDIX I – PAST PROGRAM AWARDS
APPENDIX J – SAMPLE GRANT AGREEMENT (ROUND 3 TCC PROGRAM AWARDS)

109 of 325

Page A-1
APPENDIX A – TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Term Definition
Applicant(s) Lead Applicants and Co-applicants are collectively referred to as “Applicants.” See definitions for “Lead Applicant” and “Co-applicant”.

Application or Proposal A submittal comprised of responses and supporting documents to apply for the either an Implementation or Planning Grant.

Awarded An agency commits funding to implement projects (e.g., executed a grant agreement with a Grantee; transferred funds to anothe r agency or program administrator).

California Air Resources
Board (CARB)
The California Air Resources Board (CARB) was established by the California Legislature in 1967 to attain and maintain healthy air quality, conduct research into the causes of and s olutions to air pollution, and implement measures to reduce air pollution caused by motor vehicles, the major cause of air pollution in the State. CARB provides funding guidance to state agencies that implement California Climate Investment programs, such as the TCC Program.

California Climate
Investments (CCI)
Programs funded through the Greenhouse Gas Reduction Fund using auction proceeds from the Cap -and-Trade Program and administered by state agencies in transportation, energy, natural resources, and w aste sectors.

These programs fund projects that provide greenhouse gas reductions and other important co -benefits to California, including benefits to residents of disadvantaged communities, low -income communities, and low -income households.

California Native American
Tribe
A Native American Tribe that is on the contact list maintained by the Native American Heritage Commission (NAHC) for the purposes of Chapter 905 of the Statutes of 2004 (Pub. Resources Code, § 21073).

Climate Adaptation Adaptation to climate change refers to adjustment in natural or human systems in response to actual or expected climatic stimuli or their effects, which moderates harm or exploits beneficial opportunities. 17 Climate Resilience Resilience as it relates to climate change is the capacity of any entity – an individual, a community, an organization, or a natural system – to prepare for disruptions, to recover from shocks and stresses, and to adapt and grow from a disruptive experience.18
Co-applicant Entities other than the Lead Applicant that enter into a partnership with other organizations for the purpose of applying for a TCC grant.

17 Glossary of Climate Change Terms. Office of Air and Radiation/Office of Atmospheric Programs/Climate Change Division.

September 9, 2013 " <https://www.epa.gov/climatechange> 18 Rodin, Judith. 2014. The Resilience Dividend: Being Strong in a World Where Things Go Wrong. Philadelphia: Perseus Books Group (pages 3-4).
110 of 325

Page A-2
Term Definition
Community-based
Organization (CBO)
A public or private nonprofit organization of demonstrated effectiveness that is representative of a community or significant segments of a community and provides educational or related services to individuals in the community. 19 Community Service Facility A community service facility is defined as a physical location designed to serve residents of the Project Area for cultural or community activities or for the provision of community services.

Examples of community service facilities include but are not limited to the following facilities: Multifamily Housing, Senior Housing, Community Centers, Resource Centers , Community Food Access Centers , Cooling or Heating Centers, Medical/Health Centers , Fire Stations, Food Banks , Libraries, Community Colleges.

Examples of Non-Qualifying Facilities: Airports, Industrial Uses, Commercial Uses
Community Engagement The process of working collaboratively with and through groups of people affiliated by geographic proximity, special interest, or similar situations to address issues affecting the well-being of those people.20 Direct Costs Costs directly tied to the implementation of the TCC grant, including, but not limited to: personnel costs, subcontracts, equipment costs, travel expenses, etc.

Disadvantaged
Communities
Designation of census tracts and physical locations used to identify the areas most affected by pollution and the people most vulnerable to its effects, based on geographic, socioeconomic, public health, and environmental hazards criteria. The California Environmental Protection Agency (CalEPA) historically bases designation s on analyses conducted by the California Communities Environmental Health Screening Tool (CalEnviroScreen) but can also exercise discretion in developing other criteria and methods.

Displacement Residential displacement is considered to be occurring when households are forced to move from, or are prevented from moving into a Pr oject Area, which was previously accessible to them due to conditions that:
• Are beyond the reasonable ability of households to control or prevent (e.g., rent increases);
• Occur despite households having met all previously imposed conditions of occupancy; and
• Make continued occupancy by households impossible, hazardous, or unaffordable.

19 U.S.C. § 9101(6). <https://www2.ed.gov/policy/elsec/leg/esea02/pg107.html> 20 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, June 2011. Principles of Community Engagement. <https://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/communityengagement/pdf/PCE_Report_508_FINAL.pdf> 111 of 325

Page A-3
Term Definition
Displacement can result from gentrification when neighborhoods become financially out of reach for people or can occur at earlier stages through disinvestment, increasing vacancies and facilitating demographic turnover. 21 Displacement manifests itself in many forms, from physical (i.e., evictions or service disruption) to economic (i.e., very high and/or frequent rent increases and sharp increases in housing costs relative to comparable neighborhoods).

Element Elements are distinct Project components that are fundable under the TCC Program. Elements can be classified as quantifiable or non -quantifiable per CARB’s quantification methodologies for estimating greenhouse gas reductions. Projects proposed with quanti fiable elements can count their respective Project toward TCC proposal readiness at the time of Application.

See Appendix B for TCC fundable elements.

Enforceable Funding
Commitments
A funding requirement for affordable ho using project. These projects must demonstrate a level of committed funding that is 0.90 or greater by the following equation:
[Project funds requested + Enforceable Funding Commitments (EFCs) – Deferred Costs] / [Total Development Cost – Deferred Costs] Grant Agreement Arrangement between the State and grantee specifying the payment of funds to be used for grants and/or loans, or a combination by the State for the performance of specific TCC Program Objectives within a specific grant performance period by the grantee.

Grantee Designated Lead Applicant that has an agreement for grant funding with the State.

Greenhouse Gases (GHG) Any gas that absorbs infrared radiation in the atmosphere. Greenhouse gases include, but are not limited to, water vapo r, carbon dioxide (CO 2), methane (CH4), nitrous oxide (N 2O), hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs), ozone (O 3), hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs), perfluorocarbons (PFCs), and sulfur hexafluoride (SF6).

Greenhouse Gas Reduction
Fund (GGRF)
Fund established via SB 1018 to receive the State’s portion of proceeds from the quarterly Cap-and-Trade auctions.

High Quality Jobs Job quality varies across industry, occupation, and region. Indicators of high quality jobs include: decent wages (family-sustaining jobs with prevailing wage or entry-level work with clearly defined routes to advancement into higher-wage jobs), benefits ( like paid sick and vacation), adequate hours and predictable schedules, access to training, occupational health and safety, worker representation or right to organize, and no employer or subcontractor record of wage theft or other violations of labor law.

21 Adapted from Grier and Grier (1978) and Marcuse (1986) and included in the Urban Displacement Project found at urbandisplacement.org.
112 of 325

Page A-4
Term Definition
Implementation Grant Funding for neighborhood -level development and infrastructure proposals, which include multiple, coordinated greenhouse gas emissions reduction projects that provide local economic, environmental, and health benefits.

Indicators Quantitative measures, including project-related metrics that show changes in conditions over a period of time.

Indirect Costs Expenses of doing business that are of a general nature. These costs are not directly tied to the grant but are necessary for the ge neral operation of the organization. Examples of indirect costs may include but are not limited to:
personnel costs associated with administrative, supervisory, legal, and executive staff; personnel costs associated with support units, including clerical support, housekeeping, etc.; and operating expenses and equipment costs not included as part of direct project costs. This definition supersedes any definition of indirect costs provided by other California Climate Investment programs.

In-kind Goods and Services Non-cash donations from governmental or private sources, and includes volunteer labor, materials, and services.

Lead Applicant An entity that enters into a partnership with other organizations for purpose of applying for a TCC grant and has been designated as the lead organization for the partnership.

Lead Entity The Lead Applicant or Co-applicant responsible for leading the implementation of a specific Project.

Memorandum of
Understanding (MOU)
An MOU is an agreement between two or more parties that is legally binding and outlines the responsibilities of each of the parties to the agreement. A Memorandum of Understanding is required for Implementation Gr ant Applicants whose Project Areas cross jurisdictional boundaries.

Nonprofit Organizations Any nonprofit corporation qualified to do business in California, and qualified pursuant to subdivision (c)(3) under Section 501 of the Internal Revenue Code.

Operational Project has reached a specified milestone and benefits from the investment are accruing.

Participatory Budgeting
(PB)
Participatory Budgeting (PB) is a democratic approach to public spending that meaningfully and deeply engages people in gover nment and the community.

During PB, community members democratically decide how to spend part of a public budget, enabling them to make the fiscal decisions that affect their lives and the health of their communities. In the process, the community identifi es priority needs and develops a range of alternatives to address those needs. PB is especially appropriate in low-income communities and communities of color that have been traditionally disenfranchised from transportation decision making processes.
113 of 325

Page A-5
Term Definition
Partner Entities other than the Grantee that enter into a partnership with the grantee and other organizations for the purpose of implementing TCC grant activities.

Referred to as “Co-Applicants” during the application stage.

Partnership Agreement A Partnership Agreement is an agreement between two or more parties that is not legally binding and outlines the responsibilities of each of the parties to the agreement. This is required of all members of the Collaborative Stakeholder Structure.

Planning Grant Funding for planning activities that implement local and regional land use plans and foster the development of sustainable communities.

Planning Area Refers to the boundary for Planning Grants. A contiguous area that meets the priority population require ments as follows . At least 51% of the Project Area must overlap with census tracts designated as disadvantaged communities per CalEnviroScreen and these Guidelines: top 25% of disadvantaged communities, federally recognized tribal boundaries , or a disadvantaged unincorporated area per these Guidelines. The remaining area (49 percent or less) must be within the top 25% of disadvantaged communities or a low - income community as defined by AB 1550.

Post-award Consultation Prior to execution of th e grant agreement, period where terms and conditions of the grant agreement are determined and finalized.

Program Objectives Program objectives are statements that describe the desired outcomes of the program. The TCC Program includes the following three program objectives:
greenhouse gas reduction, public and environmental benefits, and economic opportunity and shared prosperity.

Project Area Refers to the boundary for Implementation Grants. A contiguous area that is no larger than approximately five-square miles. At least 51% of the Project Area must overlap with census tracts designated as disadvantaged communities per CalEnviroScreen and these Guidelines: top 25% of disadvantaged communities, federally recognized tribal boundaries , or a disadvantaged unincorporated area per these Guidelines . The remaining area (49 percent or less) must be within the top 25 % of disadvantaged communities or a low - income community as defined by AB 1550.

Projects An attribute that defines the purpose of a Project as reflected in a proposal or scope of work. Projects proposed must include one or more TCC fundable elements. See Appendix B for TCC fundable elements.

Public Agency A local or regional agency, such as a county, city, city and county, municipal corporation, district, metropolitan planning organization, joint powers authority, regional transportation planning agency, council of government, school district, political subdivision, duly constituted governing body of an Indian reservation or rancheria, tribally designated housing entity , or any board, commission or agency thereof, other local public agency, or entities that are legislative bodies 114 of 325

Page A-6
Term Definition
of a local agency pursuant to subdivisions (c) and (d) of Section 54952 of the California Government Code.

Quantification Period The quantification period varies for different administering agencies and CCI programs, as defined in CARB’s qu antification methodologies for estimating greenhouse gas reductions. For California Climate Investments, the quantification period typically covers the period of time during which GHG reductions are reasonably expected to occur, or the over which GHG reductions can be calculated and validated.

Small Business In order for a small business to be eligible for certification, the small business must meet the following requirements: be independently owned and operated; not be dominant in its field of operations; have its principal office located in California; have the owners (or officers, if a corporation) domiciled in California; and including affiliates, be either:
• A business with 100 or fewer employees; with average annual gross receipts of $15 million or less, over the last three tax years; • A manufacturer* with 100 or fewer employees; or
• A microbusiness - A small business will automatically be designated as a microbusiness if gross annual receipts are less than $3,500,000, or the small business is a manufacturer with 25 or fewer employees *For Small Business Certification purposes, a manufacturer is a business that is both of the following: primarily engaged in the chemical or mechanical transformation of raw materials or processed substances into new products, and classified between Codes 31 to 339999, inclusive , of the North American Industrial Classification System (NAICS) Manual, published by the United States Census Bureau, 2007 edition.

State Refers to the California Air Resources Board, Strategic Growth Council , the Department of Conservation, and any other state agency, and/or their representatives.

Strategies A plan of action or policy intended to achieve a particular outcome. Applicants must propose one or more Projects for each selected strategy.

Strategic Growth Council
(SGC)
Strategic Growth Cou ncil (SGC) administers the TCC Program. SGC was established by Senate Bill 732 (Steinberg, Statutes of 2007, Chapter 729), and is charged with four main tasks to encourage the development of sustainable communities. These tasks include the following:
• Identify and review activities and funding programs of member state agencies that may be coordinated to improve air and water quality, improve natural resource protection, increase the availability of affordable housing, improve transportation, meet the goals o f the California Global Warming Solutions Act of 2006 and the strategies and priorities developed in the State’s climate adaptation strategy, known as the Safeguarding California Plan, encourage sustainable 115 of 325

Page A-7
Term Definition
land use planning, and revitalize urban and commu nity centers in a sustainable manner.
• Recommend policies and investment strategies and priorities to the Governor, the Legislature, and to appropriate state agencies to encourage the development of sustainable communities.
• Provide, fund and distribute data and information to local governments, and regional agencies that will assist in developing and planning sustainable communities.
• Manage and award grants and loans to support the planning and development of sustainable communities.

Technical Assistance (TA) Aid and support provided to Applicants to facilitate development, selection and implementation of TCC Proposals.

Transformative Elements Additional elements required for Implementation Grants to be considered for TCC funding. Transformative Elements include: community engagement, displacement avoidance, workforce development and economic opportunities, data collection and indicator tracking, and climate adaptation and resilience.

Very Low- and Low- Income
Households
Households earning less than 80 percent (80%) of Area Median Income (AMI).

The U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) sets income limits that determine eligibility for assisted housing programs. Income limits can be accessed at: https://www.huduser.gov/portal/datasets/il.html.

Vision Statement A statement developed by Applicants that articulates how all of the Projects proposed in the overall TCC Proposal will be coordinated and integrated to achieve all three of the TCC Program Objectives
Vulnerable Communities/
Populations
Vulnerable communit ies or vulnerable populations include people that are vulnerable to the effects of pollution, the impacts of climate change, and other environmental, public health and economic burdens. Such people include but are not limited to: women; racial or ethnic gr oups; low-income individuals and families; individuals who are incarcerated or have been incarcerated; individuals with disabilities; individuals with mental health conditions; children; youth and young adults; seniors; immigrants and refugees; individuals who are limited English proficient (LEP); and Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, Transgender, Queer, and Questioning (LGBTQQ) communities; or combinations of these populations. (CA Health and Safety Code Section 131019.5)

116 of 325

Page B-1
APPENDIX B – TCC FUNDED PROJECTS BY STRATEGY
The first section of Appendix B describes the Implementation Grant application’s quantification and readiness requirements for the full application proposal, readiness req uirements for all projects, and identifies ineligible costs. The second section of Appendix B outlines each Strategy’s eligible project types and fundable elements, eligible costs, and additional requirements.

Eligible Proposal Requirements
Applicants must select a combination of Projects from at least three (3) Strategies. • At least three (3) Projects included in the application must be both quantifiable using CARB quantification methodologies22 AND must meet all readiness requirements at the time of application submittal. • These projects that are both “quantifiable” and “ready” must account for a minimum of fifty percent (50%) of total requested funds.

All Projects must be ready within the first year of the grant term. ▪ Quantifiable Projects : Projects that contain “quantifiable elements” are quantifiabl e under CARB quantification methodologies and are indicated by an asterisk (*). Quantifiable projects may contain a combination of both quantifiable and non -quantifiable elements. The sum of the grant requests for both the quantifiable and non -quantifiable elements for the Project will be counted towards the fifty percent (50%) total requested funds requirement.

For example, an applicant that proposes to include the “construction of new pedestrian facilities” as a Project under the Transit Access and Mobil ity Strategy, must include the quantifiable element “new walkways that improve mobility/access of pedestrians” for the Project to be quantifiable. The applicant may also include other TCC fundable elements that are non -quantifiable as part of the Project, such as the installation of “benches or street furniture”. See CARB’s TCC Round 4 Quantification Methodology for more information.

▪ Readiness Requirements: Readiness requirements include CEQA documentation, site control, permits, project maps and designs, project schedules, operations and maintenance plans, and other Strategy - specific requirements. Readiness requirements must be complete prior to beginning pr oject implementation. Projects will be carefully vetted during the application review to ensure that readiness status is accurately reflected in application materials and additional documents may be requested of applicants in advance of the Round 4 awards.

22 California Air Resources Board. CCI Quantification, Benefits, and Reporting Materials. www.arb.ca.gov/cci-resources

117 of 325

Page B-2
Ineligible Characteristics Applicable to all Strategies and Projects The following Project characteristics will result in ineligibility:
▪ Projects without logical termini23 or independent utility24; ▪ Projects that are acquisition only25;
▪ Projects that cannot demonstrate site control during the grant term; ▪ Projects that acquire property through eminent domain; ▪ Projects that are in active litigation;
▪ Projects without a long-term operations and maintenance plans; ▪ Projects that may induce demand for p arking or lead to an increase in regional Vehicle Miles Traveled (VMT); or
▪ Projects that do not provide GHG reduction, public health, environmental, and economic benefits to the Project Area through the grant term and life of the Project.

Ineligible Costs Applicable to All Strategies
The following ineligible costs apply to all strategies:
▪ Exceeding cost caps for indirect or pre-development costs; ▪ Lobbying;
▪ Advocacy work, such as direct lobbying for the passage of specific bills or local propositions; ▪ Commission fees;
▪ Ongoing operational costs beyond the grant term;
▪ Using funds for mitigation activities that are already mandated by local or state governing bodies or agencies;
▪ Ceremonial expenses (including food and beverages);

23 Logical termini for project development are defined as 1) rational end points for a transportation improvement, and 2) rational end points for a review of the environmental impacts. See the U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration for additional information:
https://www.environment.fhwa.dot.gov/legislation/nepa/guidance_project_termini.aspx 24 Independent utility for project development defines such improvements as 1) usable and can function as stand-alone improvements without forcing other improvements which may have impacts, and 2) a reasonable expenditure even if no additional transportation improvements in the area are made. 25 Projects that include eligible land acquisition costs must demonstrate that grant funds will also be used to complete a TCC fundable project. Projects being completed under the Land Acquisition for Affordable Housing Strategy (Appendix B-2), must demonstrate that development on the acquired land will be completed within the grant term, and may be paid for with either grant funds or leverage dollars.
118 of 325

Page B-3
▪ Expenses for publicity not related to the awarded TCC Project implementation; ▪ Bonus payments of any kind;
▪ Damage judgments arising from the acquisition, construction, or equipping of a facility, whether determined by judicial process, arbitration, negotiation, or otherwise; ▪ Services, materials, or equipment obtained under any other State program; ▪ Real estate brokerage fees and/or expenses;
▪ Stewardship of legal defense funds; and
▪ Costs associated with automobile or motorcycle parking (excluding electric vehicle charging infrastructure that may be located at a parking spot).

Readiness Requirements Applicable to All Strategies
California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA)
Before submitting an application, Applicants should consult with the public age ncy or agencies that have permitting authority over the projects in the application to determine what is required to comply with CEQA. ▪ For Projects that meet the readiness requirements at the time of application, the Applicant and/or Co-applicants must de monstrate and provide documentation showing that the project is CEQA compliant.
▪ For Projects that will be ready within the first year of the grant term, applicants must report on the projects’ CEQA status and must demonstrate that any pending environmenta l review will be completed within the first year of the grant term.

Affordable Housing Development Capital Projects submitted under Equitable Housing and Neighborhood Development are required to have all necessary environmental compliance and project approvals at the time of application. All applicable time periods for filing lawsuits must have lapsed.

CEQA Documentation
The following documentation is required for projects that are categorica lly or statutorily exempt:
▪ A CEQA Notice of Exemption (NOE) that has been approved by the appropriate body pursuant to their obligations under CEQA, OR
▪ Documentation that the project is CEQA compliant, including but not limited to:
o A resolution adopted by the legislative body (e.g., City Council, Board of Supervisors) confirming a project’s exemption. If a resolution or similar mechanism is not available or does not exist, meeting minutes documenting the legislative body’s considerat ion and approval of the project’s CEQA compliance may be submitted. o A signed letter or similar document from the head of an administrative approving entity (e.g., Planning Director).

The following documentation is required for all other projects:
▪ A file-stamped Notice of Determination

119 of 325

Page B-4
Statutes of Limitation
SGC will notify Grantees that they may begin work on a project once all readiness requirements have been met, including CEQA completion. However, projects are still subject to statutes of limitation for legal challenges, which vary depending on the type of CEQA filing and whether a CEQA filing occurs (Public Resources Code, § 21167):
▪ Filing a Notice of Determination: 30 days
▪ Filing a Notice of Exemption: 35 days
▪ No filing: 180 days
Grantees must notify SGC when the statutes of limitations have lapsed for each project, and if any legal challenges arise. If a legal challenge is brought against a project, SGC has the authority to issue a Stop Work Order, per Section 32 of the grant agreement.

Site Control
Applicants must demonstrate site control to demonstrate readiness prior to implementation. Applicants that want to establish facilities or expand existing facilities on property not owned by the Applicant, must prove a legally binding commitment or letters of commitment to sell that clearly states the ownership or leasehold interests of the parties. For Projects with multiple project sites that will be secured during the grant term 26, site control does not need to be complete at the time of the application. Applicants must report on the site control status and demonstrate that site control can be achieved for all sites within the grant term.

Permits
At the time of application, applicants must identify all permits required to implement the Projects, and that the permit(s) can be obtained within the grant term. Documentation of the permits will be used to evaluate the experience and management capacity of the Applicant.

Project Schedule
For each project, a pplicants must provide a baseline project schedule prior to implementation of that project. The project schedule must be cost loaded and utilize critical path methodology , and project activities and durations must be broken down in sufficient detail to manage the work.

Other Requirements
Applicants must also submit the following documentation required to implement the Projects:
▪ Project Map
▪ Project Designs
▪ Operations and Maintenance Plan

26 Examples of projects with multiple project sites that will be secured during the grant term: tree planting (Urban Greening and Green Infrastructure Strategy), single-family solar installations (Solar Installation and Decarbonized Energy Strategy), and electric vehicle charging site installation (Car Sharing and Mobility Enhancement Strategy). Projects are required to describe their site control plan at application.
120 of 325

Page B-5
The State may request additional documentation to assess project readiness and feasibility. All Projects must align with applicable local/regional plans and regulations. See each Strategy table below for additional Strategy-specific requirements.

121 of 325

Page B-6
Strategy 1: Equitable Housing and Neighborhood Development TCC will fund the development of affordable housing and related transit infrastructure and programs, according to the Affordable Housing and Sustainable Communities Program requirements. Below are the General Requirements, eligible project types and fundable elements, Applicant requirements, eligible project costs, readiness requirements, and special requirements for Strategy 1.

General Requirements
If an application includes a project under this strategy, the project must conform to the requirements of the Affordable Housing and Sustainable Communities Program as outlined in the AHSC Round 6 Guidelines ((http://sgc.ca.gov/programs/ahsc/resources/). A summary of AHSC guidelines is included below. T he AHSC Round 6 Guidelines document contains further detail and will be the authority in the event of any discrepancies between these two documents , with the exception that TCC does not provide funding for market rate housing units. TCC projects under the Equitable Housing and Neighborhood Development strategy must conform to one of the following eligible housing project area types:
• Transit Oriented Development Project Area
• Integrated Connectivity Project Area
• Rural Innovation Project Areas
Proposed Affordable Housing projects should at minimum include one of the following projects:
• New or expanded transit service (bus, train, ferry, shuttle, or vanpool) • Increased ridership
• New pedestrian facilities
• New, expanded, or enhanced bikeways (Class I, II, or IV) • New or expanded bike share
Proposed transit and active transportation capital projects under Equitable Housing and Neighborhood Development Strategy are required to be connected to other proposed or existing transit or active transportation systems.

Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Construction or
substantial
rehabilitation of
affordable housing or
mixed-use
developments served
by qualifying transit or
high quality transit
• New, rehabilitated, or converted Affordable Housing Developments* o New construction
o Acquisition and substantial rehabilitation including preservation of affordable housing at-risk
o Conversion of one or more nonresidential structures to residential dwelling units
• Affordable housing or mixed-use developments
o Residential units that are rental, homeownership, or a combination of both*
o Nonresidential uses that are compatible under local zoning (mixed - use)*
122 of 325

Page B-7
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) o Integrated market rate and below market rate housing (TCC only provides funding for affordable housing units)
• Must be infill with increased housing density achieved by compact design* • Scattered sites projects constituting a single, integrated Affordable Housing Development*
Housing related
infrastructure
• Capital improvements required by a locality, transit agency, or special district as a condition of the approval of the affordable housing development.

New or expanded
transit service (bus,
train, ferry, shuttle, or
vanpool)
• Operation of new or expanded transit service*
o Enhanced or expanded transit service by supporting construction or implementation of:
▪ New or expanded bus or intercity commuter services, and urban rail projects
▪ New or expanded water-borne transit (ferry)
▪ Expanded intermodal transit facilities
▪ Equipment acquisition
o Operation of alternative transportation services or flexible transit services (includes vanpool, shuttle, paratransit, and feeder bus systems that reduce vehicle miles travelled)
• Capital or operational expenditures that increase transit mode share such as bus shelters/transit waiting areas and bicycle carrying structures on public transit Capital improvements
to transit systems that
result in increased
ridership
• Upgrades to transit stops, stations, or vehicles that encourage mode-shift* Construction of new
pedestrian facilities
• New walkways that improve mobility/access of pedestrians* • Non-capacity increasing streetscape improvements, including but not limited to:
o Installation of pedestrian lighting or lighting at pedestrian crossings o Installation of signage and way-finding markers
o Other related amenities for pedestrians, cyclists and transit riders • Installation of new/improved pedestrian crossings or over-crossings • Benches or “street furniture”
• Street crossing enhancements including accessible pedestrian signals • Traffic calming projects, including development of:
o Curb extensions
o Roundabouts or traffic diverters
o Median islands / road diets
o Lane narrowing projects
123 of 325

Page B-8
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Construction of new
bikeways (Class I, II,
or IV)
• New, enhanced, or expanded context sensitive bike ways (Class I, Class II, or Class IV)27*
• Non-motorized urban trails that provide safe routes for travel between residences, workplaces, commercial centers, and schools Purchase of bicycles
and/or purchase and
installation of
infrastructure in
support of new or
expanded bike share
• New or expanded bike share programs*
• Publicly accessible bicycle parking
• Bicycle repair kiosks
• Bicycle carrying structures on public transit
Increased ridership
Required Element
under AHSC Program
• Distribution of vouchers for free or reduced transit fares* Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs Affordable Housing Development Capital Projects (AHD) • Construction and substantial rehabilitation (with acquisition) of affordable housing ; conversion of one or more nonresidential structures to residential dwelling units • Costs for a housing development, as specified in 25 CCR Section 7304 (a) and (b) • Affordable Housing Development and Housing Related Infrastructure Capital Projects must comprise at least fifty (50) percent of total AHSC funds requested Housing-Related Infrastructure Capital Projects (HRI)
• Required environmental remediation necessary for the capital proje ct where the cost is not to exceed 50 percent of AHSC Project costs
• Real property acquisition of the project site and associated fees and costs (not to exceed 10 percent of the total AHSC Project costs)
• Impact fees required by local ordinances (if used for the identified eligible capital project not to exceed 15 percent of the AHSC Project cost up to $300,000) • Installation of internet broadband conduit for the Affordable Housing Development from the public right of way or property line and provide pathways, wiring, cables, and other necessary infrastructure extended to each unit and public common space. or fixed wireless infrastructure , capable of accommodating broadband service speeds of at least 25 megabits per second for downloading and 3 megabits per second for uploading (25/3).

27 Context sensitive bikeways are defined as bikeways that consider functional classifications, travel forecasts, levels of service, purpose and transportation need, environment, safety, and place audits. 124 of 325

Page B-9
Cost Category Description
• Affordable Housing Development and Housing Related Infrastructure Capital Projects must comprise at least fifty (50) percent of the total AHSC funds requested Sustainable Transportation Infrastructure Capital Projects (STI) • Capital improvements that result in the improvement or addition of infrastructure that encourages mode-shift by enhancing public transit access, pedestrian, or bicycle network, including:
o Open Network or transit vehicle only ZEV Charging Infrastructure; o Transit Vehicle Procurement for service expansion;
o Improvements aimed at increasing transit quality , such as: dedicated bus lanes as part of a BRT project, installation of at -grade boarding infrastructure, Transit Signal Priority technology systems • Operations expenditures for up to 5 years that directly expand transit service, including expansion beyond service levels offered during the COVID -19 pandemic, by supporting new, restored, or expanded routes and may include wages, fueling, maintenance, and other costs to operate those services. • Other capital project costs required as a condition of local approval for the capital project, as approved by the State
• The total combined grant amount for Sustainable Transportation Infrastructure Capital Projects and Transportation -Related Amenities Capital Projects within a Project Area shall not exceed $10,000,000.

Transportation-Related Amenities Capital Projects (TRA) • Capital improvements that are publicly accessible and provide supportive amenities to cyclists, pedestrians, and transit riders
• Other capital project costs required as a condition of local approval for the capital project, as approved by the State
• Energy efficiency, water efficiency, renewable energy and urban greening improvements
• The total combined grant amount for Sustainable Transportation Infrastructure Capital Projects and Transportation -Related Amenities Capital Projects within a Project Area shall not exceed $10,000,000.

Program Related Funding (PRA)
• Those costs typically associated with 1) program creation, or 2) expansion of existing programs to serve new populations or offer new program service and implementation. Eligible costs may include operational costs. Programs include education, outreach and training for Active Transportation or Transit Ridership; air pollution exposure reduction; workforce development partnerships; Bikeshare program operations; tenant legal counseling services, and outreach, education, and subsidy to low-income residents for ZEV car sharing.
• Total grant amount for these program costs shall not exceed 30 percent of the funding for the AHSC Project up to $500,000.
125 of 325

Page B-10
Cost Category Description
Ineligible Costs • Routine maintenance of transportation infrastructure including transit fl eet, but not including maintenance or operations associated with AHSC funded transit service expansion, including expansion beyond service levels offered during the COVID-19 pandemic
• In lieu fees for local inclusionary housing programs
• All costs associated with automobile or motorcycle parking (excluding electric vehicle charging infrastructure that may be located at a parking spot)

Applicant Requirements
Lead or co-applicant must include one of the following:
• City or county
• Public housing authority
• Redevelopment successor agency
• Transit agency or transit operator
• Regional transportation planning agency
• Local transportation commission
• Congestion management agency
• Joint powers authority
• University and Community College District
• School district
• Facilities district
• Developer
• Program operator
• Duly constituted governing body of an Indian reservation or rancheria or any tribally designated housing entity as defined in Section 4103 of Title 25 of the United States Code and Section 50104.6.5 of the California Government Code

Additional Readiness Requirements
Readiness
Category
Requirement
Environmental
Review
At the time of Application, completion of all necessary environmental compliance (including the California Environmental Quality Act and if applicable, the National Environmental Policy Act) and project approvals related to the Equitable Housing and Neighborhood Development project is required. All applicable time periods for filing appeals or lawsuits must have lapsed within 30 days of the application due date with lawsuits or appeals filed. Also, at the time of application, all applicable time periods for filing lawsuits must have lapsed. However, non -housing components of a project are not required to certify completion and demonstration of approval of environmental clearances (NEPA or CEQA) until prior to the initial disbursement of grant funds .

Applicants are not required to complete any necessary environmental clearances 126 of 325

Page B-11
Readiness
Category
Requirement
prompted exclusively by rental and/or operating subsidies prior to the application deadline.

Site Control Applicants must demonstrate site control prior to submitting an application. Site control may be demonstrated with one of the following documents:
• Fee title
• A leasehold interest on the property with provisions that enable the lessee to make improvements on and encumber the property provided that the terms and conditions of any proposed lease shall permit, prior to grant funding, compliance with all program requirements
• An enforceable option to purchase or lease, which shall extend through the anticipated date of the Program award as specified in the NOFA • An executed disposition and development agreement, right of way, or irrevocable offer of dedication to a Public Agency
• An executed encroachment permit for construction of improvements or facilities within the public right of way or on public land
• An executed agreement with a public agency that gives the applicant exclusive rights to negotiate with the agency for the acquisition of the site; provided that the major terms of the acquisition have been agreed to by all parties • A land sales contract or enforceable agreement for acquisition of the property • Other forms of site control that give the State equivalent to any of the above -listed indicators of site -control demonstrating assurance that the applicant or developer will be able to complete the Project and all housing designated in the application in a timely manner and in accordance with all the requirements of the Program.

Enforceable
Funding
Requirements
At the time of application, the project must demonstrate a level of committed funding that is 90 percent or greater calculated by the following equation:

Project funds requested + Enforceable Funding Commitments (EFCs) - Deferred Costs Total Development Cost - Deferred Costs
Note: HRI grant requests for Homeownership Affordable Housing Developments will not be counted as part of this equation, and therefore are exempt from this EFC threshold.

Financial
Feasibility
• Market study
• Project pro-forma
• Multi-year pro-forma
• Sources and uses statement
• Operating budget
Other Readiness
Documentation
• Consistency with State Relocation Assistance Law
• All necessary discretionary land use approvals, excluding design review, have been granted within 30 days of the application due date
127 of 325

Page B-12
Readiness
Category
Requirement
• Consistency with State and Federal Fair Housing requirement s including duties to affirmatively further fair housing
• Submission of a valuation of anticipated tax credit equity , if LIHTC equity contributions and tax-exempt bonds are to be included as an Enforceable Funding Commitment
• Integration of climate adaptation measures
• Implementation of the regional Sustainable Communities Strategy • Proposed project must be consistent with state planning priorities • Applicant and/or project may not be party to or subject of a lawsuit • Consistency with local public works department, or other responsible local agency requirements
• Estimated project milestone schedule
• Demonstration that Project construction has not yet commenced • Housing Element that is in substantial compliance by the date of award recommendation, as demonstrated by a letter from the Department (HCD).

Special Requirements
Other requirements include, but are not limited to the following:
• Provide free transit passes, reloadable transit cards, or discounted passes priced at no more than half of retail cost. At least one (1) pass or card shall be made available for each Restricted Unit for at least 3 years. • Demonstrate housing will be smoke free by providing a smoke free housing lease addendum • Incorporate more than one TCC Urba n Greening element with dedicated maintenance for at least two years , and must propose at least $200,000 in reasonable direct Urban Greening costs • Include adequate lighting in accordance with local, state, or federal design standards and requirements for all publicly accessible components
• Demonstrate prior experience by providing evidence of at least two prior projects that are similar to the proposed project in scope and size, which have been completed by the applicant, or joint applicant, during the ten (10) years preceding the application due date
o An Applicant may rely upon the experience of its principal to meet the Applicant experience requirements. Documentation of the principal’s experience is required as set forth in the application, in addition to recent project evidence described above. • Must be served by qualifying transit, as outlined in AHSC’s program guidelines:
< https://sgc.ca.gov/meetings/council/2021/docs/20210224-AHSC_Round_6_Guidelines.pdf > (See Figure 1 of the AHSC Guidelines)
• Must not result in a net loss or conversion of agricultural or other working lands, or natural resource lands for other uses
• If project is in a State Groundwater Management Act (SGMA) critically overdrafted area (m edium or high priority groundwater basin), applicant must verify water availability, confirm projects alignment with the local Groundwater Sustainability Agency (GSA) and evaluate new water hookup prohibitions or requirements • Must meet the underwriting standards in the Uniform Multifamily Regulations 128 of 325

Page B-13
• Must not result in a net loss of affordable housing units • Demonstrate costs are infeasible without AHSC Program funds, and other committed funds are not being supplanted by AHSC Program funds
• Outreach and education on reducing potential health impacts of air pollution must be provided to residents of Affordable Housing Developments.

129 of 325

Page B-14
Strategy 2: Land Acquisition for Affordable Housing
TCC will fund land acquisition for communities to secure land for affordable housing. Below are the General Requirements, eligible project types and fundable elements, Applicant requirements, readiness requirements, and special requirements for Strategy 2.

General Requirements
The total amount requested for land acquisition may not exceed ten percent (10%) of tot al awarded TCC funds.

Acquired land shall be deed restricted for developing affordable housing/mixed -use affordable housing only.

Applicants are required to purchase or land lease the land and ensure development of the land during the grant term, otherwise the State will need to be reimbursed for the investment.

Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Outreach and
Implementation
(Cost should not exceed
5% of the requested
Land Acquisition project
funds)
• Community engagement for project planning post-land acquisition • Land holding costs
• Direct costs of the land acquisition and stewardship program, including staff and benefits
Land Acquisition

Includes but not limited to:
• Land cost
• Fees
o Legal fees associated with land acquisition
o Escrow fees and transfer taxes
o Other fees associated with land acquisition
• Land lease rent prepayment (rent paid in advance for the year or years of the lease agreement)
• Financing costs, including:
o Predevelopment interest/holding cost (interest accumulated from a loan for land acquisition costs)
▪ Other costs may include insurance, security, property management
o Bank loan fees
• Costs associated with obtaining a ground lease, deed of trust, or covenant • Site clearance and environmental remediation
• Environmental impact reports and assessments
Community Land Trusts Includes but not limited to:
• Development of administrative infrastructure for Community Land Trusts (CLT) (e.g., capacity, leadership, and partnership development within the first two years of the grant)
130 of 325

Page B-15

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs include,
but are not limited:
• Land acquisition that will result in a plan for affordable housing on the acquired land
• Fees
o Legal fees associated with land acquisition
o Escrow fees and transfer taxes
o Building permit fees
o Impact fees
o Other fees associated with land acquisition
o Environmental impact reports and assessments
• Financing costs, including:
o Predevelopment interest/holding cost (interest accumulated from a loan for development costs)
o Loan fees
o Rehab and permanent financing assistance (if sufficient funds have been secured for site acquisition)
• Costs associated with obtaining a ground lease, deed of trust, or covenant • Outreach and implementation (no more than 5% of requested project funds) • Community Land Trust administrative capacity building

Applicant Requirements
Lead or co-applicant must include one of the following:
• Redevelopment Successor Agencies
• Nonprofit housing organization

• Rehab and permanent financing assistance (if sufficient funds have been secured for proposed site acquisition)
• Costs associated with conversion to resident ownership • Cooperative housing corporations
• Limited partnerships or limited liability companies where all the general partners are eligible lead or co - applicants
• California Native American Tribes
• Joint Powers Authorities
• Public Housing Authorities
• Established Community Land Trust with demonstrated record (incorporated with the State and in good standing)
• Local public agency
131 of 325

Page B-16
Additional Readiness Requirements
• Final Scoping Plan with completed community engagement and the development plan with schematic design and pro forma (project financing model) for the requested land acquisition.

Community Land Trust (CLT) projects
• CLT projects must include in their Scoping Plan a CLT Feasibility Study that assesses all development phases including the plan to build administrative capacity, an evaluation of the proposed site use, and project development and stewardship plan. The plan mu st demonstrate that all development phases can be completed within the grant term. CLT Phases of Development include:
o Phase 1 Feasibility
o Phase 2 Land Acquisition
o Phase 3 Rehab and Permanent Financing
o Phase 4 Conversion to Resident Ownership
o Phase 5 Long-Term Stewardship

Special Requirements
• If project is in a State Groundwater Management Act (SGMA) critically overdrafted area (medium or high priority groundwater basin), applicant must verify water availability, confirm projects alignment with the local Groundwater Sustainability Agency (GSA) and evaluate new water hookup prohibitions or requirements.

The following elements are required at the time of Application:
• Preliminary Scoping Plan for purchasing potential land within the project area that includes the affordability mix and targeted population. Preliminary Scoping Plan should include a community engagement plan for development on the acquired land, justify the requested funds, and demonstrate that an affordable housing development on the requested land can be completed within the grant term. • Evidence of land value for requested land acquisition, such as an appraisal • The land zoned should be consistent for proposed use, which is restricted for multi -family housing and/or mixed-use housing
• Plan for acquiring deed restriction for developing very low, low, and/or moderate income affordable housing • Letter of commitment from the seller is required at Application • If co-applicant is a Community Land Trust or Non -Profit Housing Organization, they must request a letter of support for acquisition of the property for affordable housing purposes from the appropriate local government entity.
132 of 325

Page B-17
Strategy 3: Transit Access and Mobility Strategy
TCC will fund three categories of projects under Strategy 3: active transportation, transit and rail access, and car sharing and mobility enhancement projects. Applicants may choose any combination of or all of the transit strategies as part of th eir application. Each section below lists the eligible project types and fundable elements, Applicant requirements, eligible project costs, and additional readiness requirements for each transit strategy:
• 3.1: Active Transportation
• 3.2: Transit and Rail Access
• 3.3: Car Sharing and Mobility Enhancement

133 of 325

Page B-18
Strategy 3.1: Active Transportation
Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project
Types
TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Construction of new,
expanded, or
enhanced bikeways
(Class I, Class II, or
Class IV)
• New, expanded, or enhanced context sensitive bike ways (Class I, Class II, or Class IV)28*
• Non-motorized urban trails that provide safe routes for travel between residences, workplaces, commercial centers, and schools
• Bicycle carrying structures on public transit
Construction of new
pedestrian facilities
• New walkways that improve mobility/access of pedestrians* • Non-capacity increasing streetscape improvements, including but not limited to:
o Installation of lighting
o Installation of signage and way-finding markers
o Other related amenities for pedestrians, cyclists and transit riders • Installation of new/improved pedestrian crossings or over-crossings • Benches or “street furniture”
• Street crossing enhancements including accessible pedestrian signals • Traffic calming projects, including development of:
o Curb extensions
o Roundabouts
o Median islands / road diets
o Lane narrowing projects
Purchase of bicycles
and/or purchase
and installation of
infrastructure in
support of new or
expanded bike
share
• New or expanded bike share program*
• Publicly accessible bicycle parking
• Bicycle repair kiosks
• Bicycle carrying structures on public transit

28 Functional classification, travel forecasts, levels of service, purpose and transportation need, environment, safety, place audit are among the factors that defines context sensitive bikeways. 134 of 325

Page B-19
Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs
include but are not
limited to:
• Capital improvements that result in the improvement or addition of infrastructure that encourages mode-shift by enhancing pedestrian or bicycle network • Capital improvements that are publicly accessible and provide supportive amenities to cyclists, pedestrian, and transit riders
• Other capital project costs required as a condition of local approval for the capital project, as approved by the State
• Those costs typically associated with 1) program creation, or 2) expansion of existing programs to serve new populations or offer new program service and implementation. Eligible c osts may include operational costs. Programs include education, outreach and training for Active Transportation or Transit Ridership Ineligible Costs • All costs associated with automobile or motorcycle parking (excluding electric vehicle charging infrastructure that may be located at a parking spot). • Right of way

Applicant Requirements
Lead or co-applicant must include one of the following:
• Local, regional or state agencies
• Transit agencies
• Natural resource or public land agencies
• Public schools or school districts
• California Native American Tribes
• Private or nonprofit organizations
• Other entities with oversight of transportation or recreation trails

Additional Readiness Requirements
• Project plans and a cross-section (15-30% design) for bicycle and pedestrian improvements

135 of 325

Page B-20
Strategy 3.2: Transit and Rail Access
Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) New or Expanded
Service
• Operation of new or expanded transit service*
o Enhanced or expanded transit service by supporting construction or implementation of:
▪ New or expanded bus or intercity commuter services, and urban rail projects
▪ New or expanded water-borne transit (ferry)
▪ Expanded intermodal transit facilities
▪ Equipment acquisition, fueling, and maintenance, and other costs to operate those services or facilities
o Operation of alternative transportation services
• Capital or operational expenditures that increase transit mode share such as bus shelters/transit waiting areas and bicycle carrying structures on public transit Technology
Conversion
• Purchase or replacement of zero-emission or low-emission vehicles* • Purchase, construction, and/or installation of infrastructure, equipment, or facilities to support zero-emission or low-emission vehicles
New Service and
Technology
Conversion
• Purchase of zero-emission or low-emission vehicles and equipment in support of new expanded/enhanced transit service*
Fuel or Energy
Reductions
• Purchase, construction, and/or installation of solar panels for transit facilities in support of new expanded/enhanced transit service*
• Implementation of system or efficiency improvements that result in fuel reductions from existing transit services, including projects that reduce transit VMT and idling* Increased Ridership • Distribution of vouchers for free or reduced transit fares* • Implementation of system or efficiency improvements that result in increased ridership for existing routes, including project elements that increase service levels, reliability, or decrease travel time, including:* o Rail, bus, and ferry integration implementation
▪ Integrated ticketing/scheduling systems and related capital investments
▪ Projects enabling/enhancing shared -use corridors without net air pollution increases
▪ Related planning efforts focused on integrated service without requiring major capital investment
▪ Other service integration initiatives
o Bus rapid transit or rail service and other bus and ferry transit investments ▪ Vanpool services operated as public transit
▪ Operating agreements, schedules, and minor capital investments to increase ridership
136 of 325

Page B-21
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) • Efforts to improve existing rail service effectiveness with a focus on improved operating agreement, schedules, and capital investments that increase ridership • Purchase and construction of active transportation facilities that connect to stops/stations and encourage transit ridership*

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs
include but are not
limited to:
• Capital improvements that result in the improvement or addition of infrastructure that encourages mode-shift by enhancing public transit and rail access • Other capital project costs required as a condition of local approval for the capital project, as approved by the State
• Such costs are typically associated with 1) program creation, or 2) expansion of existing programs to serve new populations or offer new program service and implementation. Eligible costs may include operational costs. Programs include education, outreach and training for Active Transportation or Transit Ridership • Expenditures that dir ectly enhance or expand transit service by supporting new or expanded bus or rail services, new or expanded water -borne transit, or expanded intermodal transit facilities, and may include equipment acquisition, fueling, and maintenance, and other costs to operate those services or facilities • Operational expenditures that increase transit mode share • Expenditures related to the purchase of zero -emission buses, including electric buses, and the installation of the necessary equipment and infrastructure to operate and support zero emission buses
Ineligible Costs • All costs associated with automobile or motorcycle parking (excluding electric vehicle charging infrastructure that may be located at a parking spot). • Right-of-way

Applicant Requirements
Lead or co-applicant must include one of the following:
• Public agencies, including construction authorities, transportation authorities, with operational or planning responsibility for transit, rail or ferry services
• Joint Powers Authorities
• Cities
• Counties
• Transportation planning agencies
• Transit operators

137 of 325

Page B-22
Additional Readiness Requirements
• Agreements with key partners that will be responsible for implementing the project (e.g., Partnership Agreement with rail operators)
• Documentation of the project’s coordination with other transit services and plans • Documentation that demonstrates the project’s ability to increase ridership • Letters of support from:
o Project partners
o Regional agency or agencies
o An MPO indication of whether or not the project is consistent w ith an adopted Sustainable Communities Strategy, or in non-MPO regions, a regional plan to reduce greenhouse gas emissions 138 of 325

Page B-23
Strategy 3.3: Car Sharing and Mobility Enhancement
Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Purchase or lease of
zero-emission vehicle
technology types to
be used for car
sharing, vanpooling,
ride-sharing and
other mobility options
Advanced technologies may include but are not limited to:
• Battery electric vehicles*
• Fuel cell electric vehicles*
• Hydrogen fuel cell vehicles*
• Purchase, construction, and/or installation of infrastructure, equipment, or facilities to support zero-emission technology vehicles • Electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) – Level 2 or Level 3 • Electric bicycles – Class 1 or Class 2*
• Education about the car scrap and replacement incentives program for new or used plug-in hybrid or zero-emission vehicle (ZEV) replacement

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs
include but are not
limited to:

Project Equipment and Operations Funds: Details from the application will be included once an applicant is selected; details will depend on the proposed car sharing project model. Project fund expenditures that are eligible for reimbursement include:
• Preparation of materials for and conduct of community outreach and education including travel, printing, mailing, education classes, and other expenses directly attributed to outreach and education
• Vehicle acquisition (purchase or lease) costs
o May be purchased or leased (2-year minimum lease period) o May be new or used
o Must be a four passenger vehicle or more
• EVSE (electric vehicle supply equipment) purchase and installation costs • Vehicle, EVSE, and electric bicycle maintenance costs • Electric bicycle purchase costs
• Electric bicycle locking station purchase and installation costs • Helmets for electric bicycle sharing participants
• Bicycle safety course costs
• Vehicle, driver, passenger, and facilities insurance costs • Electric bicycle, rider, and facilities insurance costs • Reservation system development and on-going maintenance costs Ineligible Costs • Fuel and electricity costs

139 of 325

Page B-24
Applicant Requirements
Lead or Co-applicants must include at least one of the following:
• Local public agency
• Non-Profit Organizations
• California Native American Tribes
• For profit companies that specialize in car-sharing and mobility enhancement projects

140 of 325

Page B-25
Strategy 4: Solar Installation, Energy Efficiency, and Appliance Electrification TCC will fund the installation of solar photovoltaic systems, energy efficiency retrofits, and replacement of natural gas fueled appliances with all-electric energy efficient equivalents under this strategy. Below are the eligible project types and fundabl e elements, Applicant requirements, eligible project costs, additional readiness requirements, and special requirements for Strategy 4.

Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Installation of Energy
Efficiency Measures
and Solar Photovoltaic
Systems

• Low flow faucets*
• Low flow showerheads*
• LED lighting*
• LED night lights*
• Tier 2 power strips*
• Thermostatic shower valve and showerhead*
• Vacancy/motion sensor*
• Ceiling fans*
• Ceiling insulation/insulation upgrades*
• HVAC system replacement*
• Duct repair/replacement*
• Efficient fan controller *
• Electronically commutated blower motor*
• Floor insulation*
• Infiltration reduction measures*
• Refrigerant charge w/ coil cleaning*
• Refrigerator replacement*
• Smart thermostat*
• Solar water heating*
• Solar PV*
• Wall insulation, stucco and wood*
• Water heater blanket*
• Water heater replacement*
• Whole house fan*
• Window replacement*
Replacement of Existing
Natural Gas Appliances
with Efficient Electric
Equivalents
• Electric ranges
• Electric stove tops
• Electric ovens
• Electric water heaters
• Electric heat pump systems
Urban Heat Island
Mitigation
• Cool pavements (sidewalk and road resurfacing)
• Cool roofs
141 of 325

Page B-26

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs include
but are not limited to
• Direct Costs: Costs associated with the installation including labor, materials , and subcontractors.
• Support Costs (e.g., site assessment, project management, training and technical assistance needs).
• Limited Home Repairs necessary to facilitate installation of measures (e.g., dry rot repair, water heater platform repair, electrical hazards and panel upgrades, electrical circuit upgrade) are capped at $3,000 per dwelling. Minor roof repairs are not subject to this cost cap and are subject to a separate allowance below. • Roof repairs may not exceed $5,000 per dwelling and are limited to the roof sections that where the solar panels are installed. This cost cap is separate and in addition to the $3,000 limited home repair cost cap. • Limited Home Repair (including roof repair) Costs are capped at 20% of the project total budget. All home repairs must be cost effective per the Savings to Investment Ratio (SIR)
Ineligible Costs • Installation of new energy efficiency measures or electric appliances that are not replacements of inefficient appliances

Applicant Requirements
Lead or Co-applicants must include at least one of the following:
• Local public agencies
• Joint Powers Authorities
• Non-profit organizations
• California Native American Tribes
• Community-based organizations

Additional Readiness Requirements
• Lead or Co-applicant must demonstrate three (3) years of experience administering and performing energy efficiency and solar PV installations in existing housing • Lead or Co -applicant must be in good standing with all appropriate local and stat e oversight and licensing authorities
• Member of the project team shall maintain an active Class B, General Contractor License, issued by the California Contractors License Board throughout the life of the contract

142 of 325

Page B-27
Special Requirements
Cost Effectiveness Requirements for all Projects:

Limited home repair costs must be cost effective using the following calculation and meet the 1.0 Savings to Investment Ratio ( SIR). A ratio less than 1.0 indicates an uneconomic investment ; a ratio of 1.0 indicates an investment whose benefits or savings just equal its costs; and a ratio greater than 1.0 indicates an economic project.

SIR Calculation:
• SIR = Lifetime Savings/Investment
• SIR Calculation for Solar PV Installations:
• [First Year kWh Savings (from PV Watts) x Customer Cost per kWh x 27.7941] / [(Contracted LIWP Cost Per DC Watt x # of DC Watts Installed) + Home Repair Cost] – Leveraged Funding All s olar PV systems shall be sized to produce no more than 80% of household annual baseline energy consumption based on actual energy consumption data, found using previous 12 months of electric usage data from utility bills. If property owner has owned the home for less than 12 months and no usage data is available , then baseline energy consumption shall be calculated at 4.3 kWh/sq. ft. of conditioned floor area.

Household Eligibility Requirements for all Projects:

Single Family Properties:
• Participants (property owners or tenants) must have a household income at or below eighty percent (80%) of the county’s Area Median Income (AMI), or eighty percent (80%) of the State Median Income (SMI), whichever is higher.
• Income verification will be required.
• TCC recognizes the rights of immigrants to participate in state programs and TCC program-funded activities may not preclude or discriminate on the basis of race or national origin , per Department of Fair Employment and Housing (DFEH) guidance.29
Multi-Family Properties:
• Participants must demonstrate that at least sixty -six percent (66%) of the dwelling units in a building are occupied by households with incomes at or below eighty percent (80%) of the county’s AMI, or eighty percent (80%) of the SMI, whichever is higher.

Single-family property owners certify they shall not raise the rent or evict tenants of any unit that has been weatherized, had solar panels installed, and/or appliances electrified for a period of two (2) years from the date of improvement because of the increased value of the unit due solely to the TCC funded improvement measures provided (allowable factors for rent increase include an actual increase in property taxes, actual cost of amortizing other improvements to the property accomplished after the date of work completed by the Contractor/Agency, or

29 Please see this DFEH fact sheet for more information: https://www.dfeh.ca.gov/wp- content/uploads/sites/32/2020/10/Immigration-Rights-Fact-Sheet_ENG.pdf 143 of 325

Page B-28
actual increases in expenses of maintaining and operating this property that do not directly result from TCC funded improvements). They also must acknowledge and agree that the property is no t for sale at the time of qualifying for the program and will not be offered for sale or otherwise distributed or is not in foreclosure for at least sixty (60) days following the completion of weatherization services.

For multi-family properties, deed restricted and/or subsidized properties must provide regulatory agreements with a government agency showing compliance with the income eligibility requirements. If there is less than ten (10) years remaining on the term of this regulatory agreement, the partic ipant will agree to sign an Affordability Covenant provided by the Program stating that they will continue to meet income eligibility requirements to equal ten (10) total years. For market rate properties the participant agrees not to evict or commence any eviction proceeding against any tenant(s) of any qualifying dwelling unit in the building, except for cause and subject to all legal requirements and procedures for any such eviction and/or proceeding. This restriction is in force for a period of not less than ten (10) years. The owner also agrees that the rents for the qualified low -income dwelling units shall not be increased because of the energy efficiency upgrades and major capital improvements.

144 of 325

Page B-29
Strategy 5: Water Efficiency
TCC will fund the install ation of water efficiency retrofits under this strategy. Below are the eligible project types and fundable elements, Applicant requirements, and eligible project costs for Strategy 5.

Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Replacement of
inefficient
appliances with
high-efficiency
models
• Commercial Dishwasher*
• Residential Dishwasher*
• Commercial Clothes Washer*
• Residential Clothes Washer (single- and multi-family)* • Commercial Ice Machine*
• Commercial Steam Cooker*
• Commercial Combination Oven*
• Equipment that uses single -pass cooling including ice machines and air conditioning units
Replacement of
inefficient fixtures
with high-efficiency
models
• Faucets*
• Showerheads*
• Toilets and urinals
• Commercial pre-rinse spray valves*
Holistic water
efficiency upgrades
• Water audits for multi-family housing
• Sub-metering for multi-family housing
• Leak detection and repair at single family and multi-family housing • Optimization, repair, and/or replacement of inefficient cooling towers • Installation, retrofit, or replacement to achieve efficient irrigation in public and private green spaces such as single family and multifamily homes (drip irrigation, efficient sprinkler spray bodies, smart controllers, moisture sensors, etc.) • Application of compost, and/or mulch to reduce the need for watering, and retain soil moisture
• Replacement of lawn with a water -wise landscape and/or edible gardens, and efficient irrigation system
• Installation of low impact development (LID) for storm water management • Rainwater and/or storm water capture systems, including treatment and use for landscape irrigation, or toilet, and urinal flushing
• Onsite graywater systems, including capture, treatment and reuse for landscape irrigation, or toilet and urinal flushing

145 of 325

Page B-30
Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs
include, but are not
limited to
• Direct costs associated with the purchase, installation or replacement of indoor and outdoor water efficiency measures including labor, materials and/or subcontractor costs
• Direct costs associated with auditing, leak detection and repair • Engineering, design, permitting, installation of onsite non -potable water reuse systems and Low Impact Development to reduce runoff and increase infiltration • Must be certified EnergyStar, or equivalent, as applicable Ineligible Costs • Operations and maintenance costs

Applicant Requirements
Lead or Co-applicants must include at least one of the following:
• Local public agencies
• Joint Powers Authorities
• Public schools, universities and colleges (UC, CSU, CA community colleges) • Nonprofit organizations
• Community-based organizations
• Community development corporations
• California Native American Tribes

Special Requirements
Household Eligibility Requirements for all Projects:

Single Family Properties:
• Participants (property owners or tenants) must have a household income at or below eighty percent (80%) of the county’s Area Median Income (AMI), or eighty percent (80%) of the State Median Income (SMI), whichever is higher.
• Income verification will be required.
• TCC recognizes the rights of immigrants to participate in state programs and TCC program -funded activities may not preclude or discriminate on the basis of race or national origin, per Department of Fair Employment and Housing (DFEH) guidance.30

30 Please see this DFEH fact sheet for more information: https://www.dfeh.ca.gov/wp- content/uploads/sites/32/2020/10/Immigration-Rights-Fact-Sheet_ENG.pdf 146 of 325

Page B-31
Multi-Family Properties:
• Participants must demonstrate that at least sixty -six percent (66%) of the dwelling units in a building are occupied by households with incomes at or below eighty percent (80%) of the county’s AMI, or eighty percent (80%) of the SMI, whichever is higher.

Single-family property owners certify they shall not raise the rent or evict tenants of any unit for a period of two (2) years from the date of installation because of the increased value of the unit due solel y to water efficiency measures provided (allowable factors for rent increase include an actual increase in property taxes, actual cost of amortizing other improvements to the property accomplished after the date of work completed by the Contractor/Agency, or actual increases in expenses of maintaining and operating this property that do not directly result from TCC funded improvements ). They also must acknowledge and agree that the property is not for sale at the time of qualifying for the program and will not be offered for sale or otherwise distributed or is not in foreclosure for at least sixty (60) days following the completion of weatherization services.

For multi-family properties, deed restricted and/or subsidized properties must provide regulatory agreements with a government agency showing compliance with the income eligibility requirements. If there is less than ten (10) years remaining on the term of this regulatory agreement, the participant will agree to sign an Affordability Covenant provided by the Program stating that they will continue to meet income eligibility requirements to equal ten (10) total years. For market rate properties the participant agrees not to evict or commence any eviction proceeding against any tenant(s) of any qualifying dwelling unit in the building, except for cause and subject to all legal requirements and procedures for any such eviction and/or proceeding. This restriction is in force for a period of not less than ten (10) years. The owner also agrees that the rents for the qualified low-income dwelling units shall not be increased because of the water efficiency upgrades and major capital improvements.

147 of 325

Page B-32
Strategy 6: Recycling and Waste Management
TCC will fund organics waste reduction, recycling , and food waste prevention projects under this strategy.

Applicants may choose any combination of or all of the waste management strategies as part of their application.

Below are the eligible project types and fundable elements , Applicant requirements, eligible project costs, and additional readiness requirements for each waste management strategy:
• 6.1 Organics Waste Reduction
• 6.2 Recycling
• 6.3 Food Waste Prevention and Rescue

148 of 325

Page B-33
Strategy 6.1: Organics Waste Reduction
Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Composting of
organics31

• Construction, renovation or expansion of compost, anaerobic digestion, or preprocessing of organics (not as standalone project) compost or anaerobic digestion facilities and machinery that turn green or food materials into compost and/or energy products*
• Purchase of associated equipment, machinery and site improvements • Residential or commercial compost or anaerobic digestion equipment or programs
• Community-scale composting programs

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs include
but are not limited to:

• All costs associated with implementation of the Project, with the exception of those listed below.

Ineligible Costs • The purchase or retrofitting of vehicles or containers for collection of feedstock when not associated with a food waste prevention component • Collection/delivery/purchase of feedstock (i.e., food waste, green waste, or alternative daily cover)
• Food dehydrators and liquefiers unless coupled with increased tons of Project Area generated food materials diverted from landfills and composted or digested • Purchase or lease of land or buildings
• Purchases of offsets or allowances

Applicant Requirements
Lead or Co-applicants must include at least one of the following:
• Local public agencies
• Private, for-profit entities
• Solid waste service providers
• Operators of composting or anaerobic digestion facilities or other facilities • Regional or local sanitation agencies, waste agencies, or Joint Powers Authorities State agencies • UC, CSU or other public universities and colleges

31 Quantifiable elements in this section should demonstrate that materials generated in the Project Area are being diverted from landfills.
149 of 325

Page B-34
• Nonprofit organizations (except private schools)
• California Native American Tribes

Additional Readiness Requirements
• Feedstock Certification
• Material Flow Charts (and supporting documentation)
• Applicants must provide a report on when the following permits will be completed, as applicable:
o Solid Waste Facilities Permit
o Water Permit
o Conditional Use Permit
o Air Quality Permit
o Licenses and Filings

150 of 325

Page B-35
Strategy 6.2: Recycling
Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Manufacturing value-
added finished
products using
recycled fiber, plastic,
and glass32
• Construction, renovation or expansion of facilities for recycled -content fiber, plastic, or glass or for the manufacture of value-added products* • Purchase of equipment and machinery
• Real estate improvements associated with construction, renovation, or expansion
• Stand-alone recycling education programs
• Residential or commercial recycling collection equipment or programs Non-traditional
recyclables
• Reuse and repair programs for non -traditional recyclables (appliances, electronics, etc.)

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs include
but are not limited to
• All costs associated with implementation of the project, with the exception of those listed below.

Ineligible Costs

• The purchase or retrofitting of vehicles or containers for collection of feedstock • Purchase or lease of land or buildings
• Purchase of recycled fiber, plastic or glass feedstock • Purchases of offsets or allowances
• Costs associated with projects that use pyrolysis, gasification or other thermal conversion technologies to create products

Applicant Requirements
Lead or Co-applicants must include at least one of the following:
• Local public agencies
• Private, for-profit entities
• California Native American Tribes
• Solid waste service providers
• Operators of composting or anaerobic digestion facilities or other facilities • Regional or local sanitation agencies, waste agencies, or Joint Powers Authorities State agencies • UC, CSU or other public universities and colleges
• Nonprofit organizations (except private schools)

32 Quantifiable elements in this section should demonstrate that materials generated in the Project Area are being diverted from landfills.
151 of 325

Page B-36
Additional Readiness Requirements
• Feedstock Certification
• Material Flow Charts (and supporting documentation)
• Applicants must report on when the following permits will be completed, as applicable:
o Solid Waste Facilities Permit
o Water Permit
o Conditional Use Permit
o Air Quality Permit
o Licenses and Filings

152 of 325

Page B-37
Strategy 6.3: Food Waste Prevention and Rescue
Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Food waste prevention
via food rescue33
• New or expanded food rescue projects that result in food being distributed to people, with residuals being sent to composting or digestion when available in project area*
• Stand-alone food waste prevention, rescue, and recycling education programs Food waste prevention
via source reduction
• Food waste prevention via source reduction*

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs include
but are not limited to:
• Refrigerators, freezers, and refrigeration systems
• Transportation such as refrigerated trucks
• Storage and collection infrastructure such as food crates or bins • Food preparation and cooking items such as ovens, ranges, etc. • Salaries
• Software costs (food waste online exchange and source reduction platforms) Ineligible Costs • Food waste dehydrators and liquefiers • Purchase or lease of land or buildings
• Purchase of feedstock (food)

Applicant Requirements
Lead or Co-applicants must include at least one of the following:
• Local public agencies
• Private, for-profit entities
• Solid waste service providers
• Operators of composting or anaerobic digestion facilities or other facilities • Regional or local sanitation agencies, waste agencies, or Joint Powers Authorities State agencies • UC, CSU or other public universities and colleges
• Nonprofit organizations (except private schools)
• California Native American Tribes

Additional Readiness Requirements
• Certification of Food Amount Available
• Material Flow Charts (and supporting documentation)

33 Quantifiable elements in this section should demonstrate that materials generated in the Project Area are being diverted from landfills.
153 of 325

Page B-38
Strategy 7: Urban Greening and Green Infrastructure
TCC will fund projects related to urban greening and green infrastructure under this strategy. Below are the eligible project types and fundable elements, Applicant requirements, and additional readiness requirements for Strategy

7. Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs include
but are not limited to:
• Signs and interpretive aids, including exhibits, kiosks, display boards or signs about the project and funding acknowledgement
• Costs associated with the implementation of the project • Land purchase for developing new parks and urban forest area • Tree establishment and maintenance cost during the grant term Ineligible Costs • Projects not in accordance with CAL FIRE standard and the Urban Forestry Act • Decorative tree grates and decorative tree guards
• Tree removal
• Inefficient irrigation valves, pumps, sprinkler control timers, or overly costly and elaborate irrigation systems
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Planting of trees in sites
that are strategically
selected to shade
buildings (i.e., planted
within 60 feet of an air
conditioned building)
• Urban tree planting*
• Tree and plant establishment care
• Planting site preparation
• Vegetation planting
• Urban heat island mitigation by tree shading
Planting of trees in sites
that do not shade
buildings
• Enhancement and/or expansion of neighborhood park and community space (must include tree planting component)*
• Planting trees in public lands and structures, which may include incorporation of riparian habitat for water capture and provide for other public and wildlife benefits*
• Tree inventory, and/or urban forest mapping and analysis, and/or long term management plan (must include tree planting component)* Green infrastructure • Multi-objective storm water projects, including construction of permeable surfaces and collection basins and barriers through low impact development (LID) strategies
• Innovative urban forest site improvement to create larger, more functional planting sites for trees, such as bio -swales, urban forestry education centers, edible landscaping and/or community gardens and orchards 154 of 325

Page B-39
• Urban wood and biomass projects may not remove trees solely for the purpose of utilization
• Root barriers
• Invasive species
• Palm trees
• Trees that:
o Rely on excessive amounts of water to survive
o Rely on synthetic fertilizer to survive
o Are inappropriate for the site selected or require excessive maintenance o Will conflict with overhead or underground utilities or ground -located infrastructure

Applicant Requirements
Lead or Co-applicants must include at least one of the following:
• California Native American Tribes
• Public Agency
• Nonprofit organization
• Joint Powers Authority
• Special District
• Qualifying Districts (include, but are not limited to, school, park, recreation, water, and local taxing districts)

Additional Readiness Requirements
• Detailed Tree and Plant Species List approved by a certified expert (e.g. , certified arborist, landscape architect)
• Grantees must consult with their Regional Urban Forester before beginning work.

155 of 325

Page B-40
Strategy 8: Health and Well-Being
TCC will fund projects that improve access to healthy food, parks, open space, and recreation under this strategy.

Below are the eligible project types and fundable elements, Applicant requirements, eligible project costs, and additional readiness requirements for Strategy 8.

Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Costs TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Food Access • Urban agriculture , including front yards, back yards, rooftop gardens, roadside urban fringe agriculture, livestock grazing in open space, and indoor hydroponic or aquaculture facilities.*34
• Community gardens*35
• School gardens*36
• Community kitchen
• Community grocery stores and food cooperatives
• Alternative food distribution mechanism s such as C ommunity Supported Agriculture boxes or other scattered methods of food distribution • Food hubs to serve the project area population37
• Agricultural and healthy food education opportunities for children and adults Park, Open Space,
and Recreation
Access
• Increase access to parks and green space through capital improvements projects or programs,
• Playground or park exercise equipment
• Small recreational facilities (picnic areas, bathrooms)

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs include
but are not limited to:
• Direct project costs, including staff and benefits
• Support costs for training, technical assistance, marketing, outreach

34 Operations may range from community-scale gardening to commercial production on a larger scale. Urban agriculture must include trees to be quantifiable, however, indoor hydroponic or aquaculture facilities will not be quantifiable. 35 Community gardens are defined here as being plots of land, usually in urban areas, that are rented by individuals or groups for private gardens or are for the benefit of the people caring for the garden. Community gardens must include trees to be quantifiable.
36 School gardens must include trees to be quantifiable. 37 Food hubs are defined here as centrally located facilities with a business management structure that facilitates the aggregation, storage, processing, distribution and/or marketing of locally and regionally produced food products. 156 of 325

Page B-41
• Support costs for community engagement , education and participation related to healthy food access
• Land purchase and funding access to water for establishing and maintaining small scale community gardens, urban agriculture, or community farms 38 • Costs associated with developing business plans for the startup and operations of urban farms
• Efficient irrigation systems that include timers on valves, pumps, sprinklers, etc. • Community Needs Health Assessment39 to track food access and other health needs of the community
• Support costs for increasing access to healthy foods through innovative strategies
Ineligible Costs • Inefficient irrigation systems, or overly costly and elaborate irrigation • Remediation needed for the project area (e.g., soil, land, etc.)

Applicant Requirements
Lead or Co-applicants must include at least one of the following:
• City or county
• Local health department
• Other public agency, including public schools or school districts • California Native American Tribes
• Locally operating health system, hospital, clinic, health plan • Nonprofit organizations with expertise in health, food access, or urban farming • UC, CSU, or other public universities and colleges

Additional Readiness Requirements
Urban Agriculture Projects have the following additional readiness requirements:
• Environmental analyses of the proposed project area must be complete within the first year of the grant. • Land purchases, site control and/or commitment for site control, must be demonstrated at applica tion. • Appropriate land zoning required for urban agricultural operations must be demonstrated at application. • Business plans for the startup and operations of urban farms, including defining marketing, operations, and financial strategies, must be developed and finalized within the first year of the grant term.

38 In order for water use to be an eligible cost, awardees must ensure water access is available for other residents of the community.
39 Community Health Needs Assessment Toolkit, American Hospital Association https://www.aha.org/resources/community- health-assessment-toolkit
157 of 325

Page B-42
Strategy 9: Indoor Air Quality
TCC will fund indoor air filtration projects for low-income residences and community -service facilities (see Appendix A ) under this strategy. Below are the eligible project types and fundable elements, Applicant requirements, eligible project costs, and additional readiness requirements for Strategy 9.

Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Costs TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Indoor Air Filtration • Portable indoor air filtration devices • Filtration upgrades to existing heating, ventilation, and cooling systems in residences, school, hospitals, and other sensitive locations • Replacement filters meeting a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 14 or higher
• Subsidies for increased residential electricity costs resulting from installation or use of indoor air filtration units, air monitoring equipment, or any devices directly supporting air filtration and monitoring
• Subsidies to support increased maintenance cost resulting from air filtration upgrades
• Air monitoring equipment and installation
• Education and training on community air monitoring

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs include
but are not limited to:
• Direct Costs: Costs associated with installation of filtration upgrades or portable filters including labor, materials and subcontractors. • Support Costs (e.g., site /impact assessment, project management, training and technical assistance needs).
• Limited repairs (e.g., electrical circuit upgrades, vent system inspection and upgrades) not in excess of $1,200 per dwelling.
• Resident outreach, education, and training
• Subsidies for increased residential electricity costs resulting from air filtration units, air monitoring equipment, and/or other devices directly supporting air filtration and monitoring
• Replacement filters
Ineligible Costs • Projects that do not serve residents or community service facilities

Applicant Requirements
Lead or Co-applicants must include at least one of the following:
• Local public agencies
• Joint Powers Authorities
• Non-profit organizations
158 of 325

Page B-43
• Community based organizations
• California Native American Tribes

Additional Readiness Requirements
Indoor Air Filtration Projects involving work on central heating, ventilation, and air conditioning :
• Lead or Co-applicant must be in good standing with all appropriate local and state oversight and licensing authorities

Special Requirements
Household Eligibility Requirements for all Projects:

Single Family Properties:
• Participants (property owners or tenants) must have a household income at or below eighty percent (80%) of the county’s Area Median Income (AMI), or eighty percent (80%) of the State Median Income (SMI), whichever is higher.
• Income verification will be required.
• TCC recognizes the rights of immigrants to participate in state programs and TCC program-funded activities may not preclude or discriminate on the basis of race or national origin, per Department of Fair Employment and Housing (DFEH) guidance.40
Multi-Family Properties:
• Participants must demonstrate that at least sixty -six percent (66%) of the dwelling units in a building are occupied by households with incomes at or below eighty percent (80%) of the county’s AMI, or eighty percent (80%) of the SMI, whichever is higher.

Single-family property owners certify they shall not raise the rent or evict tenants of any unit with filtration upgrades for a period of two (2) years from the date of filtration upgrade because of the increased value of the unit due solely to the upgraded filtration measures provided (allowable factors for rent increase include an actual increase in property taxes, actual cost of amortizing other improvements to the property accomplished after the date of work completed by the Contractor/Agency, or actual increases in expenses of maintaining and operating this property that do not directly result from TCC funded improvements). They also must acknowledge and agree that the property is not for sale at the time of qualifying for th e program and will not be offered for sale or otherwise distributed or is not in foreclosure for at least sixty (60) days following the completion of appliance replacement or filtration upgrade services.

For multi-family properties, deed restricted and/or subsidized properties must provide regulatory agreements with a government agency showing compliance with the income eligibility requirements. If there is less than ten (10) years remaining on the term of this regulatory agreement, the participant will agr ee to sign an Affordability Covenant provided by the Program stating that they will continue to meet income eligibility requirements to equal ten (10) total years. For market rate properties the participant agrees not to evict or commence any eviction proceeding against any tenant(s) of any qualifying dwelling unit in the building, except for cause and subject to all

40 Please see this DFEH fact sheet for more information: https://www.dfeh.ca.gov/wp- content/uploads/sites/32/2020/10/Immigration-Rights-Fact-Sheet_ENG.pdf 159 of 325

Page B-44
legal requirements and procedures for any such eviction and/or proceeding. This restriction is in force for a period of not less than ten (10) years. The owner also agrees that the rents for the qualified low -income dwelling units shall not be increased because of the appliance replacement or filtration improvements.

Property Site Assessments Requirements:

Site assessments must be conducted pr ior to deploying standalone air filters and/or installing HVAC upgrades.

Site assessments must demonstrate that the proposed deployment of a standalone air filter is feasible, or, in the case of HVAC upgrades, that the proposed HVAC upgrade will not result in negative effects to the existing HVAC systems. These assessments shall be conducted by the equipment owner, an HVAC engineer, or another qualified individual as approved by TCC Program Staff. In addition, each installation should include a n educational consultation to instruct users on the efficient operation of the standalone air filter and/or upgraded HVAC system.

160 of 325

Page B-45
Strategy 10: Community Microgrids
TCC will fund single customer, community-serving microgrid projects under this strategy. Below are the eligible project types and fundable elements, applicant requirements, eligible project costs, and additional readiness requirements for Strategy 10.

Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements (* denotes quantifiable elements) Construction of Single
Customer Microgrid
Infrastructure
• Single customer islanded microgrids with renewable energy generation and storage*
• Solar Photovoltaic (PV) systems*
• Energy infrastructure
• Projects must be at critical community service facilities (defined in Appendix A).

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs include
but are not limited to:
• Direct project costs, including staff and benefits
• Support costs for training, technical assistance, and outreach • Support costs for community engagement, education, and participation • Single customer (islanded) microgrids
• Solar photovoltaic (PV) systems
• Electrical energy storage
• Load reduction devices and control systems
• Microgrid controllers
• Energy Infrastructure, such as electric vehicle charging stations Ineligible Costs • Fossil fuel generators or infrastructure • Multi-customer microgrids
• Projects that do not serve a community service facility

Applicant Requirements
Lead or co-applicant must include one of the following:
• Local Public Agencies
• Joint Powers Authorities
• Non-Profit Organizations
• Community Based Organizations
• California Native American Tribes

161 of 325

Page B-46
Additional Readiness Requirements
• Lead or Co -applicant must be in good standing with all appropriate local and state oversight and licensing authorities
• Lead or Co-applicant must demonstrate qualifications having completed similar microgrid projects, have been certified in Energy Storage & Microgrid Training & Certification (ESAMTAC), or received recognized credentials with similar content, or that otherwise demonstrate the relevant capacities

Special Requirements
• Proposed Project locations must meet the following criteria:
o Located in Tier 2 or Tier 3 High Fire Threat District , and demonstrated to have been impacted by Public Safety Power Shutoff (PSPS) events or by power outages during extreme weather events; and o Located at a community service facility that provides critical services to the residents of the Project Area such as cooling or heating centers, community food access, etc. • Microgrid feasibility study for the project site, including analysis of energy use history and potential generation and storage capacity
• Fully developed microgrid system design
• Documentation that demonstrates the transition towards renewable energy generation as the technology becomes available (for microgrids that have some fossil fuel backup generation for longer duration outages) • Agreements with key partners that will be responsible for implementing the project • Agreement from site owner describing commitment to utilize the installed microgrid to serve community resilience goals, provide specific community services as proposed at application , and use energy savings to benefit project area residents. Projects where the community-serving use element is protected through a deed restriction that reverts the real property interest to a participating local government in the case of discontinued operation will be prioritized.
• Additional letters of support (as needed) that demonstrate alignment with any exist ing Hazards Mitigation Plans, need for a resiliency center, or other Project features:
o Project partners
o Regional agency or agencies
o Local utility company

162 of 325

Page B-47
Strategy 11: Brownfield Redevelopment
TCC will fund community-serving Brownfield Redevelopment projects under this strategy. Below are examples of eligible project types and fundable elements, applicant requirements, eligible project costs, and additional readiness requirements for Strategy 11.

General Requirements
The intent of this strategy is to provide clean-up and/or redevelopment funding to projects on Brownfield sites that are ready to implement or in the process of implementing environmental clean -ups under the oversight of the Department of Toxic Substances Control (DTSC), the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), water boards , or a similar local, state, or federal governmental or qualified third -party entity using standards consistent with state regulatory bodies and subject to approval by SGC.

The total amount requested for brownfield redevelopment activities may not exceed ten percent (10%) of total awarded TCC funds. This cost cap applies to both clean-up and redevelopment activities. Redeveloped land shall be restricted for development of affordable housing, green spaces, and/or other community service facilities subject to approval by the SGC.

Eligible Project Types and Fundable Elements
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements
Outreach and
Implementation
(Cost should not exceed
5% of the requested
Brownfield Redevelopment
project funds)
• Community engagement for all phases of brownfield redevelopment project planning
• Public participation around preferred environmental remediation methods , findings, and course of action
• Direct costs of brownfield redevelopment, including staff and benefits Predevelopment Phase

Eligible projects in this phase should have met the elements outlined in the Additional Readiness Requirements section of the Brownfield Redevelopment Strategy below.

Fundable elements include, but are not limited to the following:
• Obtaining permits and necessary approvals
• Conduct environmental cleanup and site preparation activities • Site clearance and environmental remediation
• Environmental impact reports and site assessments
• Third-party verification of cleanup analyses
Development Phase Eligible projects in this phase should have met the elements outlined in the Additional Readiness Requirements section of the Brownfield Redevelopment Strategy below . The Development phase includes permitting, environmental cleanup, construction, financing, and marketing activities that culminate with completion of the project and a formal opening.

Fundable elements include, but are not limited to the following:
• Legal fees associated with Brownfield Redevelopment
• Financing costs, including:
o Predevelopment interest/holding cost (interest accumulated from a loan for land acquisition costs)
163 of 325

Page B-48
Eligible Project Types TCC Fundable Elements
o Other costs may include insurance, security, property management
• Construction or substantial rehabilitation of affordable housing, mixed - use, green space, health clinic, cultural institution, or other community- service facilities and supporting infrastructure
Management Phase

Brownfield Redevelopment sites must be restricted to community-serving uses which include, but are not limited to:
• Affordable Housing Development
• Green Spaces
• Community Service Facilities

Eligible Project Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs include
but are not limited to:
• Fees
• Building permit fees
• Impact fees
• Environmental impact reports and assessments
• Outreach and implementation (no more than 5% of requested project funds) • Required environmental remediation necessary for the capital project; building and facility constr uction costs associated with brownfield redevelopment; and capital improvements associated with brownfield redevelopment. Where the combined cost of environmental remediation and project construction is not to exceed 10% of total TCC Grant funds.
• Construction and/or substantial rehabilitation of affordable housing, mixed -use, green space, health clinic, cultural institution, or other community servi ce facilities and supporting infrastructure
• Other capital project costs required as a condition of local approval for the capital project, as approved by the State
• Hazardous building material surveys and removals for materials including PCBs, lead, and asbestos in buildings
Financing costs, including:
• Predevelopment interest/holding cost (interest accumulated from a loan for development costs)
• Loan fees
Ineligible Costs • Construction or development of industrial type uses • Projects that do not serve a community service facility • Costs associated with the abandonment of oil wells or mine features Re-development Activities on the Following Sites
• Sites with ongoing or planned U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or State - directed removal actions
• Sites proposed for or listed on the National Priority List • Federally owned or controlled properties
164 of 325

Page B-49
• Sites under enforcement action by a California state environmental regulator agency or a Certified Unified Program Agency
• Sites actively subject to corrective action pursuant to the Federal Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and/or California Health and Safety Code Chapter 6.5

Applicant Requirements
Lead or co-applicant must include one of the following:
• Local public agencies
• School Districts
• Community College Districts
• Non-Profit Organizations
• Community Based Organizations
• California Native American Tribes
• Public Housing Authorities
• Cooperative Housing Agencies
• Limited partnerships or limited liability companies where all the general partners are eligible lead or co - applicants

To be eligible, applicants must establish that they did not cause or contribute to the release of threatened hazardous substance s within the proposed project site. In addition, all applicants, except California Native American Tribes, must demonstrate that t hey are exempt from liability under the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act.

Additional Readiness Requirements
This section outlines the readiness pathways for Brownfield Redevelopment sites with or without identified contamination.
• All Projects must demonstrate at Application thorough previous site investigation : a Phase I Environmental Site Assessment (ESA) or equivalent evaluation document such as Preliminary Endangerment Assessments (PEAs), Supplemental Site Investigations, Remedial Investigations, or other similar documents .

Non-contaminated sites:
• Projects wh ose site investigations do not identify contamination above appropriate and health -protective regulatory screening levels consistent with state regulatory standards must demonstrate that no plans are required related to site clean-up and remediation nor oversight by an appropriate government agency or third- party entity.

Contaminated sites:
• Projects whose site investigation s do identify contamination will be subject to the following readiness requirements that establish the types of investigation, government agency or approved third-party oversight, and clean-up plans necessary for Brownfield Redevelopment projects to be considered ‘Ready’ under TCC. • A Phase II ESA, or equivalent document, must be completed prior to application. 165 of 325

Page B-50
o If the Phase II ESA concludes contamination is not present within the site, further study of site contamination is not required.
o If the Phase II ESA concludes that the site is contaminated, prior to applicatio n sufficient site testing and exploration must be completed to determine the extent of contamination, as well as the estimated cost of clean-up.
• Contaminated sites will only be eligible for funding if the site owner or TCC Partner has entered a Standard Voluntary Agreement, California Land Reuse and Revitalization Act Agreement, Local Agency Agreement, or similar formal agreement that establishes oversight by an app ropriate government entity (such as the Department of Toxic Substances Control or the U.S. EPA) or a qualified third -party entity using standards consistent with state regulatory bodies and subject to approval by SGC. • TCC funds may only be used for environ mental remediation activities where the proposed method of environmental remediation has been approved by an appropriate government entity (such as the DTSC or the U.S. EPA) or a qualified third -party entity using standards consistent with state regulatory bodies and subject to approval by SGC , and a remediation plan is in place. The remediation activity must be presented and approved through preparation of a Feasibility Study, Removal Action Work Plan, Remedial Action Plan, Response Plan or equivalent document.

Special Requirements
• All proposed project sites must meet the Federal definition of a Brownfield site as follows: a brownfield is a property, the expansion, redevelopment, or reuse of which may be complicated by the presence or potential presence of a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant. 41 • Final Scoping Plan with completed community engagement and a development plan with schematic design and pro forma (project financing model) for the requested brownfield redevelopment. Plan must justify the requested cost and demonstrate a timeline and community process for the brownfield clean -up and /or proposed (community service facility) project.
• Evidence of cost of requested brownfields redevelopment, such as an appraisal . • Letter of commitment from the seller or demonstration of secured site control is required at Application. • Letter of commitment establishing proposed community service facility land use following the predevelopment phase required at Application. Projects that opt to protect the community-serving use element through a deed restriction that reverts the real property interest to a participating local government in the case of discontinued operation will be prioritized.
• The existing zoning and land use designations should be consistent with the proposed use. • If project is in a State Groundwater Management Act (SGMA) critically overdrafted area (medium or high priority groundwater basin), applicant must verify water availability, confirm project’s alignment with the local Groundwater Sustainability Agency (GSA) and evaluate new water hookup prohibitions or requirements.

Brownfield Redevelopment Resources
• California Department of Toxic Substances Control, Office of Brownfields: Quick Reference Guide; Available at: https://dtsc.ca.gov/wp-content/uploads/sites/31/2021/10/Quick-Reference-guide_8-21-002-

1.pdf
• California Department of Toxic Substances Control, Site Mitigation & Restoration Program; Available at:
https://dtsc.ca.gov/brownfields/

41 United States Environmental Protection Agency. Overview of EPA’s Brownfileds Program. Available at:
https://www.epa.gov/brownfields/overview-epas-brownfields- program#:~:text=A%20brownfield%20is%20a%20property,substance%2C%20pollutant%2C%20or%20contaminant. 166 of 325

Page B-51
• California Department of Toxic Substances Control, Equitable Community Revitalization Grant; Available at: https://dtsc.ca.gov/ecrg/
• United States Environmental Protection Agency: Land Revitalization Toolkit ; Available at:
https://www.epa.gov/land-revitalization/land-revitalization-toolkit • United States Environmental Protection Agency: Brownfields Program ; Available at:
https://www.epa.gov/brownfields
• Center for Creative Land Recycling: resources, programs, expertise; Available at: https://www.cclr.org/

167 of 325

Page C-1
APPENDIX C – TRANSFORMATIVE ELEMENTS
Transformative Elements focus on the needs of residents and stakeholders of the TCC Project Area. In line with the SGC Vision for Racial Equity , the Transform ative Elements focus on community engagement, anti - displacement, and workforce development plans that ensure equitable outcomes for all to live in a healthy, thriving, and resilient community regardless of race.

This appendix describes eligible , example, and recommended activities for TCC Transformative Elements. It also includes eligible and ineligible costs and some reference resources.

168 of 325

Page C-2
Appendix C-1: Community Engagement
Recommended Activities to Ensure Meaningful Community Engagement Category Activities
Activities to Inform
Community
Stakeholders and to
Solicit Stakeholder
Input
• Public workshops/meetings
• Door-to-door canvassing
• House meetings
• Established website and/or social media
• Distributed flyers or other printed materials
• Outreach to existing community groups
• Surveys
• Focus Groups
• Community Working Group
Activities to Engage
Community
Stakeholders in
Development of TCC
Proposal
• Design charrettes
• Community-based participatory research
• Participatory budgeting42
• Convene advisory body, community working group or shared decision-making body • Establish website and/or social media
• Community benefits agreements
• Additional activities to ensure community stakeholders have an opportunity to influence the TCC Proposal development
Activities to Ensure
Community
Engagement During
Implementation of
TCC Project
• Public workshops/meetings
• Door-to-door canvassing
• House meetings
• Established website and/or social media
• Surveys
• Focus groups
• Sub-contract with community-based organizations to conduct outreach • Allocate staff positions focused on community engagement • Steering committee relative to the participatory budget established • Advisory body, community working group, or shared decision-making body • Additional activities to provide community stakeholders an opportunity to influence the TCC Proposal development
• Maintain community engagement throughout the TCC Implementation Plan

42 See Appendix A for the definition of Participatory Budgeting. See also the Community Engagement Resources section of this Appendix C-1 for additional information.
169 of 325

Page C-3
Community Engagement Requirements
TCC funds must be used to support community engagement and outreach activities that meet all of the following criteria:
• Activity is directly related to the implementation of the TCC-funded Project • Activity is located within the defined TCC Project Area • Activity is focused on meaningfully engaging community stakeholders located or involved within the defined TCC Project Area

Eligible Costs
Category Requirement
Eligible Costs
include but are
not limited to:
• Preparation of outreach materials including printings and mailings • Staff time dedicated for community outreach and education • Translation and interpretation for meetings or written materials • Educational events and training programs that develop public awareness of the TCC Projects
• Participant compensation that is an exchange of payment for services rendered in the development of community work products, and appropriately documented with deliverables such as sign-in sheets or written surveys
• Provision of transportation services for community residents, such as a vanpool, that increases access to community engagement activities to benefit the project and public.
• Provision of childcare services for community residents, excluding individual cash benefits (subsidies) to participants, that increases access to community engagement activities to benefit the project and public.
• Food and refreshments that are determined to be an integral part of the event.

Examples of activities where it would be appropriate to approve food purchase would include a design charrette held in the evening, where the meal is consumed as part of the event and replaces a meal otherwise missed by attending the event.

Ineligible Costs • Direct cash benefits or subsidies to participants • Alcoholic refreshments
• Participant incentives, such as door prizes, which are unrelated to specific community work products
• General Meetings that do not specifically discuss or advance implementation of the TCC Project

170 of 325

Page C-4
Community Engagement Resources
Additional tools and resources for planning and conducting meaningful community engagement:
• California Climate Investments’ “Best Practices for Community Engagement and Building Successful Projects”: < http://ww2.arb.ca.gov/sites/default/files/auction-proceeds/cci-community-leadership- bestpractices.pdf >
• Facilitating Power’s “The Spectrum of Community Engagement to Ownership”: < https://www.communitycommons.org/entities/3aec405c-6908-4bae-9230-f33bef9f40e1 > • International Association for Public Participation (IAP2)’s “Spectrum of Public Participation”: < https://cdn.ymaws.com/www.iap2.org/resource/resmgr/pillars/Spectrum_8.5x11_Print.pdf > • Participatory Budgeting Project’s “How Participatory Budgeting Works”: < https://www.participatorybudgeting.org/how-pb-works/ >
• Institute for Local Government’s “Inclusive Public Engagement” resources: < https://www.ca- ilg.org/inclusive-public-engagement >
• The Praxis Project’s “Language Justice Toolkit”: <
https://www.thepraxisproject.org/resource/2012/languagejustice > • IAP2’s “COVID-19 Public Participation Resources”: < https://iap2usa.org/COVID-19-P2-Resources > • Salt Lake City Civic Engagement Team’s “Practices for Engagement in the Time of COVID”: < https://www.slc.gov/can/wp-content/uploads/sites/8/2020/04/Best-Practices-for-Engagement-During- COVID-19.pdf >
Examples of previous TCC awardees’ Collaborative Stakeholder Structures:
• Transform Fresno’s Outreach and Oversight Committee: < https://www.transformfresno.com/outreach- oversight-committee/ >
• Transform Fresno’s Collaborative Stakeholder Structure, Community Partner Outreach Methods, and Anti- Displacement Task Force Members structure (Appendix 3): < https://innovation.luskin.ucla.edu/wp- content/uploads/2021/05/Transform-Fresno-2021-Progress-Report.pdf > • Watts Rising’s Collaborative Stakeholder Structure (Appendix 3): < https://innovation.luskin.ucla.edu/wp- content/uploads/2021/05/Watts-Rising-2021-Progress-Report.pdf > • Ontario Together’s TCC Trustees (Appendix 3): < https://innovation.luskin.ucla.edu/wp- content/uploads/2021/05/Ontario-Together-2021-Progress-Report.pdf >

171 of 325

Page C-5
Appendix C-2: Displacement Avoidance
Example Policies to Avoid the Displacement of Very Low and Low-Income Households Category Policy
Production of
Affordable Housing

Long-term policies
• Incentives for inclusionary zoning*
• Density bonus ordinance*
• Community land trusts
• Fee on new commercial or residential development that is dedicated to affordable housing
• Land banking programs
• Development of new accessory dwelling units (ADU)
• Neighborhood preference legislation that gives existing residents within a certain circumference preference for newly built affordable units* • Dedication of a certain percentage of a housing bond to building housing in the TCC Project Area
• Site acquisition and fee deferrals to develop 100% affordable housing* • Production of family-sized rental and ownership affordable units • Allow affordable housing on a limited number of underutilized Production, Distribution and Repair (PDR) parcels with a ground floor requirement for PDR* • Housing bond to fund affordable unit development
Preservation of
Affordable Housing

Short-term policies
• Rent control, stabilization ordinances, and rent review boards* • No-net loss of affordable housing units / net gain of affordable units* • Preservation of existing affordable housing in the Project Area through the one- for-one redevelopment of distressed public housing; right -to-return policies for existing residents in good standing in redeveloped public housing; and commitment not to raise rents above pre -redevelopment levels for existing residents in redeveloped buildings*
• Policies to preserve single -room occupancy and/or mobile home parks and to allow current residents in good standing to remain or return in the case of redevelopment*
• Condominium conversion restrictions*
• Demonstration of application to local, stat e, and federal programs to fund preservation of affordable housing
• Preservation of affordable housing via acquisition and rehabilitation programs* • Covenants to maintain affordability in perpetuity
• Community land trusts
• Restrictions on short-term rentals*
• Restrictions on non-primary residences*
172 of 325

Page C-6
Category Policy
Tenant Protections
and Support

Short-term policies
• Tenant anti-harassment policies
• Right-to-return policies for existing households
• Source of income non-discrimination*
• ‘Just Cause’ eviction policies
• Limiting of low-fault evictions*
• Culturally appropriate tenant rights education
• Funding for tenant organizing
• Tenant legal services and right to council in eviction proceedings • Limiting tenant evictions from affordable housing*
• Maximize acceptance of rental subsidies*
• Review of occupancy requirements to create greater flexibility for tenants* • Identify opportunities to master lease privately owned and managed SROs* • Increase supportive services to tenants living in SROs that are not managed or master leased by the jurisdiction or non-profits
• Identify opportunities to acquire privately owned and managed SRO buildings • Improve code enforcement in SROs*
• Implement guidelines to prioritize moving families from SROs into affordable housing units*
• Tenant’s first right to purchase legislation*
• Preserve rent-control units when major rehabilitation occurs* • Where applicable, assessing enforcement of nuisance policies and modifying as needed to ensure vulnerable populations are not being negatively impacted. • Create an emergency housing response action plan for instances when code enforcement deems the properties uninhabitable
Neighborhood
Stabilization and
Wealth Building

Long-term policies
• Asset building opportunities for low-income residents • Contracting with local/small/diversely owned businesses • Development and promotion of micro-lending opportunities • Development of worker cooperatives
• Non-speculative homeownership opportunities
*Indicates policies that require local municipal participation to implement

173 of 325

Page C-7
Example Policies to Avoid the Displacement of Local and Small Businesses Category Policy
Protections for
Small Businesses

Short-term policies
• Implementation of an overlay zone designed to protect and assist local and small businesses*
• Creation and maintenance of a small business alliance • Increased outreach by the jurisdiction’s small business assistance programs • Formal programs to ensure that some fraction of a jurisdiction’s good and services come from local and small businesses*
• Development of no -cost and low -cost business development and retention programs with established local, state and federal partners such as the California Small Business Development Center Network, Women’s Business Centers, Procurement Technical Assistance Centers and others
• Support for ownership of space by small, locally owned businesses • Enforce existing regulations to retain and protect production, distribution, repair (PDR) space
• Advocate for commercial rent control
Business
Stabilization and
Wealth Building

Long-term policies
• Development of layoff aversion and business continuity programs during construction or other business interruption events
• Development of no -cost and low -cost business development consulting and training programs targeting small and micro-enterprises in partnership with local, state and federal technical assistance partners
• Contract with local/small/diversely owned businesses
• Encouragement and assistance to ensure businesses are community-serving • Increase commercial space and promote community serving uses in new developments
• Support alternative business models including coops
• Non-profit stabilization programs and rental subsid y programs that prevent the displacement of non-profits from a neighborhood*
*Indicates policies that require municipal participation to implement

Displacement Avoidance Plan Requirements
TCC funds must be used to support displacement avoidance activities that meet all of the following criteria:
• Activity is focused on implementing additional or new policies and programs, which may include but are not limited to new policies not yet adopted, programs that address implementation barriers of existing policies and programs and expanded efforts around existing policies and programs. Activities can be either policy development or programmatic activities, which include community engagement and educational activities. • Activity is directly addressing the displacement vulnerabilities of the TCC Project Area and the potential impacts of implementing the TCC-funded Project
174 of 325

Page C-8
• Activity is located within the defined TCC Project Area • Activity is focused on engaging existing residents and small businesses located or involved within the defined TCC Project Area

Eligible Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs
include but are not
limited to:
• Direct costs for implementing additional or new policies and programs • Salaries, wages, and stipends of nonprofit or consultant staff dedicated to the displacement avoidance plan
• Preparation of outreach and education materials
• Costs associated with education, coordination, and policy development to support displacement avoidance implementation activities
• Translation and interpretation for meetings or written materials • Rental costs for facilities required to perform training. (Applicants are encouraged to seek access to free or low -cost facilities through partnerships with community facilities where possible.)
• Public transit subsidies for low -income, disabled, or other participants with accessibility or transportation challenges
• Participant compensation that is an exchange of payment for services rendered in the development of community work products, and appropriately documented with deliverables such as sign-in sheets or written surveys
• Provision of transportation services for community residents, such as a vanpool, that increases access to community engagement activities to benefit the project and public
• Provision of childcare services for community residents, excluding individual cash benefits (subsidies) to participants, that increases access to community engagement activities to benefit the project and public • Food and refreshments that are determined to be an integral part of the event.

Examples of activities where it would be appropriate to approve food purchase would include a design charrette held in the evening, where the meal is consumed as part of the event and replaces a meal otherwise missed by attending the event.

Ineligible Costs • Costs for implementing existing policies, plans, ordinances, or programs (e.g., local government staff salaries, supplies, meetings, etc.) • Direct cash benefits or subsidies to participants
• Alcoholic refreshments
• Participant incentives, such as door prizes , which are unrelated to specific community work products

175 of 325

Page C-9
Displacement Avoidance Resources
Additional tools and resources for selecting displacement avoidance policies and programs:
• CARB & UC Berkeley review of selected housing anti-displacement policies and their potential to prevent displacement, market type needed to feasibly implement, implementation scale, and timeframe to prevent displacement: “White Paper on the Effectiveness of Anti-Displacement Policies” (Chapple & Loukaitou- Sideris, published by CARB, 2021). < https://ww2.arb.ca.gov/sites/default/files/2021-04/19RD018%20- %20Anti-Displacement%20Strategy%20Effectiveness.pdf >
• Urban Displacement Project research reports:
o Anti-displacement policies: < https://www.urbandisplacement.org/topic/policy/ > o Climate displacement, climate mitigation, and infill development: < https://www.urbandisplacement.org/topic/climate-mitigation-and-displacement/ > o Cultural, commercial, and industrial displacement: <
https://www.urbandisplacement.org/topic/cultural-commercial-industrial-displacement/ > o Housing precarity risk model (HPRM) on household risk of eviction, displacement, and long -term poverty as a result of the COVID-19 recession:
<https://www.urbandisplacement.org/topic/evictions-housing-precarity-risk-model/> • Department of Housing and Community Development (HCD) guide to creating a new by-right process and modifying fee structures to promote infill development: < https://www.hcd.ca.gov/community- development/building-blocks/program-requirements/identify-adequate-sites.shtml > • State of California streamlined ministerial approval of affordable housing under SB 35:
o SB 35 Determination and Housing Element Open Data Map: < http://cahcd.maps.arcgis.com/apps/webappviewer/index.html?id=29fd695819064f38afee6c9880c3 0ae3 >
o Mapping Webinar: < https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wH4DY-OteLc&feature=youtu.be > • Public Advocates factsheet on Housing Overlay Zones (HOZs): < https://www.reimaginerpe.org/files/HOZ_Fact_Sheet_FINAL_7-27-10(2).pdf > • Governor’s Office of Planning and Research’s guide for CEQA streamlining of housing projects through plan-level Environmental Impact Reviews: < http://opr.ca.gov/docs/20190208-TechAdvisory- Review_of_Housing_Exemptions.pdf >
• California Housing Partnership’s Preservation Technical Assistance guide: < https://chpc.net/policy- research/preservation/ >
• HCD guide to preserving units at risk of conversion to market rate: < https://www.hcd.ca.gov/community- development/building-blocks/program-requirements/preserve-units-at-risk-conversion-market-rate.shtml > • HCD inclusionary housing ordinance technical assistance memo: < https://www.hcd.ca.gov/community- development/housing-element/housing-element-memos/docs/ab_1505_final.pd f> • National Coalition for Asian Pacific American Community Development & Council for Native Hawaiian Advancement’s report on Asian American & Pacific Islander Anti-Displacement Strategies:
<https://www.nationalcapacd.org/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/anti_displacement_strategies_report.pdf> • Causa Justa’s Just Cause Development without Displacement Report and Strategies:
<https://ncg.org/sites/default/files/resources/DevelopmentWithoutDisplacement_CausaJustaJustCause_0. pdf>

176 of 325

Page C-10
Appendix C-3: Workforce Development and Economic Opportunities Eligible Activities
• Workforce development and training programs must meet all of the following criteria:
o Train participants for jobs and skills that are transferable, and result in high -quality jobs that a re reflective of the State’s goals and priorities
o Result in recognized credentials (e.g., certifications, certificates, degrees, license, other documentation of competency and qualifications) to support long -term, stable employment and career development .

Programs that provide recipients with more than one type of skill or credential should be prioritized o Focus job training and placement plans on high-quality employment (e.g., local living wages, benefits, opportunities for advancement, geographic accessibility, predictable scheduling, working conditions, job retention)
o Recruit trainees from Project Area residents
o Reduce barriers to participation through the training program design and recruitment strategy o Address emerging critical skill issues to increase the capacity of workers and organizations to adapt and compete in a net zero economy
• Training programs
• Recruitment and outreach
• On-the-Job Training, Earn-and-Learn training opportunities • Job placement
• High-quality job creation
• Entrepreneurship and incubation programs with high-quality career pathways

Example Activities
• Pre-apprenticeship programs that utilize industry standard developed curriculum and are tied to certified apprenticeships
• Training programs that lead to occupations and industries that support the TCC Project implementation • Training programs that reduce barriers for and reflect the range of employment readiness ne eds of local residents with employment barriers
• Partnerships with local workforce development boards, local non -profits, and other organizations with knowledge of the employment landscape that ensure the training will lead to industry-recognized credentials and labor market advancement
• Partnerships for comprehensive, regional economic and workforce planning to support the transition away from fossil fuels and fossil fuel-based industries
• Partnerships with small businesses in the Project Area that are owned by priority populations or aligned with TCC public health and just transition goals
• Targeted recruitment strategies, consistent with federal and state law, to direct training opportunities to residents and/or businesses within the TCC Project Area (e.g., Community Benefits Agreements, labor agreements or community workforce provisions, contract provisions) 177 of 325

Page C-11
• Establishing and/or supporting a Workforce Resource Center in the Project Area to facilitate recruitmen t for workforce training programs and supportive services to trainees. • Capacity-building for Project Area firms to establish high road practices and meet public contracting requirements
• Regional labor market analysis to support workforce planning and just transitions • Employer engagement and coordination to ensure high quality job creation and job placement

Applicant Requirements
Organizations leading the workforce development and training programs should have:
• Demonstrated track record of providing training with sufficiently high rates of completion, post -training job placement utilizing existing formalized pathways or partnerships with potential employers or industries, and job retention
• Previous experience in programs of a similar size and scope as proposed in the workforce development and opportunities plan
• Demonstration of formalized partnerships to align workforce training programs with regional industry demand. Possible partners may include local workforce development boards, community college d istricts and local educational institutions, community -based training organizations, industry partners, labor unions, and local governments.

Eligible Costs
Cost Category Description
Eligible Costs
include but are
not limited to:
• Instructor salaries, wages, and stipends
• Trainee salaries up to 50% of the wages including six (6) months of benefits or no more than 1040 hours, and stipends
• Cost of tools, materials, or equipment necessary to perform training • Support costs for outreach and recruitment, including translation and interpretation services
• Rental costs for facilities required to perform training. (Applicants are encouraged to seek access to free or low -cost facilities through partnerships with community facilities where possible.)
• Public transit subsidies for low -income, disabled, or other participants with accessibility or transportation challenges
• Support services for trainees, such as individual employment or development plans, workforce readiness skills trainings (within programs directly linked to credentials or pathways), and job placement or retention support
• Provision of childcare services for trainees, excluding individual cash benefits (subsidies) to participants, that increases access to workforce development activities to benefit the project and public
178 of 325

Page C-12
Cost Category Description
Ineligible Costs • Programs that do not include clear career pathways for residents of the Project Area or committed partnerships for high-quality job placement • Programs that provide workforce readiness skills (i.e., “soft skills” training) but are not directly linked to employment credentials or pathways • Work-appropriate clothing or attire (other than essential equipment and safety wear) • Direct cash benefits or subsidies to participants (other than transit subsidies) • Food and refreshments

Workforce Development Resources
Additional tools and resources for developing workforce development and economic opportunity plans and programs:
• California Workforce Development Board High Road Training Partnership Website: < https://cwdb.ca.gov/initiatives/high-road-training-partnerships/> o Foundation Documents: High Road Training Partnership Overview: < https://cwdb.ca.gov/wp- content/uploads/sites/43/2019/09/High-Road-ECJ-Brief_UPDATED-BRANDING.pdf> o Foundation Documents: High Road Training Partnerships Framework (one-page handout): < https://cwdb.ca.gov/wp-content/uploads/sites/43/2020/08/OneSheet_HRTP_ACCESSIBLE.pdf> o Essential Elements of High Road Training Partnerships: < https://cwdb.ca.gov/wp- content/uploads/sites/43/2020/01/HRTP-Essential-Elements_ACCESSIBLE.pdf> o High Road Training Partnerships – Sector Case Studies: Available in ”HRTP Projects" section of HRTP website
• California Employment Development Department (EDD) “Performance Guidance” summary for the Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act describing the expectations for recognized workforce credentials (pages 7 and 11): < https://edd.ca.gov/jobs_and_training/pubs/wsd19-03.pdf > • Resources to align programs with regional workforce trends:
o Centers of Excellence for Labor Market Research guide to utilizing labor market data to inform workforce development decisions (designed for community colleges but applicable to general high road workforce planning): “Making Use of Labor Market Information: Where to Find Data for Common Community College Decisions” (Booth et al. 2015, underwritten by CA Community Colleges Chancellor’s Office Vocational Education Research and Technical Advisory Committee). < http://www.coeccc.net/COE/media/SupplyandDemandPageDocuments/Making -Use-of-Labor- Market-Information.pdf >
o Centers of Excellence for Labor Market Research homepage. The seven California Centers of Excellence were developed “to study the regional economies of CA, support community colleges by providing customized data on high growth, emerging, and economically -critical industries and occupations and their related workforce needs.” < http://www.coeccc.net/ > o California Employment Development Department (EDD) Labor Market Information and Links < https://www.labormarketinfo.edd.ca.gov/ >

179 of 325

Page C-13
Appendix C-4: Climate Adaptation and Resilience
Requirements for Risk Assessment and Adaptation Measures Applicants must demonstrate how the TCC investment and leverage funded projects will increase resilience of the Project Area to the anticipated impacts from climate change. This includes describing:
• Climate change risks and exposures within the Project Area, such as additional days of extreme heat or precipitation, increased average temperatures, wildfire, flooding, sea level rise, and drought. • Anticipated impacts of climate change risks and exposures on the community, including vulnerable populations.
• Anticipated impacts of climate change risks and exposures on the built environment Based on the risks and anticipated impacts, Applicants will use this in formation to describe the processes they will use to identify and prioritize adaptation measures to:
• Address climate change-related impacts and exposures for vulnerable populations; and • Increase resilience and functionality of proposed infrastructure projects

Eligible Costs
Climate resilience and adaptation must be integrated into the Projects, Transformative Elements, and Vision. No specific costs are set aside for this Transformative Element.

Climate Adaptation and Resilience Resources
To identify the climate change risks and exposures wit hin the Project Area, such as additional days of extreme heat or precipitation, increased average temperatures, wildfire, flooding, sea level rise, and drought. This information may be obtained using tools listed below:
• Cal-Adapt.org, an online platform th at can help identify, map and model specific climate change exposures: < https://cal-adapt.org/ >,
• Using the results of a local or regional vulnerability assessment or action plan that includes the Project Area, or
• Any other locally developed, down -scaled projection model such as projection models developed by consultants or community-based organizations.

To describe the impact of climate change risks and exposures on the community, particularly vulnerable populations. This information may be obtained using:
• The Guide to Defining Vulnerable Communities in the Context of Climate Change < http://www.opr.ca.gov/docs/20200720-Vulnerable_Communities.pdf >, • Climate Change and Health Profile Reports, created by the California Department of Public Health, which describe the impact of climate risks and exposures for vulnerable populations for each county, • Climate Change and Health Vulnerability Indicators for California (CCHVI) developed by the CalBRACE Project,
• Healthy Places Index (HPI),
180 of 325

Page C-14
• Mapping Resilience: A Blueprint for Thriving in the Face of Climate Disasters < https://apen4ej.org/wp- content/uploads/2019/07/APEN-Mapping_Resilience-Report.pdf >, and • Regional Opportunity Index (ROI) developed by the UC Davis Center for Regional Change.

To identify and prioritize climate adaptation measures and projects that address anticipated climate impacts.

These resources can support this process:
• The 2020 Adaptation Planning Guide provides guidance on assessing climate impacts and ad aptation strategies to address them: < https://resilientca.org/apg/ >, • The State Adaptation Clearinghouse hosts a range of case studies, adaptation plans, and strategy documents, state guidance, tools, and data: <https://resilientca.org/> o Climate Equity Topic page provides information on equitable planning and achieving climate equity in adaptation and resilience efforts: < https://resilientca.org/topics/climate-equity/ > o Appendix D of the Adaptation Planning Guide provides a compendium of example adaptation strategies broken down by topic /sector area:
< https://www.caloes.ca.gov/HazardMitigationSite/Documents/CA-Adaptation-Planning-Guide- FINAL-June-2020-Accessible.pdf#search=adaptation%20planning%20guide > o Resilient CA Adaptation Planning Map provides links to local government adaptation planning documents: < https://resilientca.org/topics/land-use-and-community-development/#resilientca- adaptation-planning-map-rap-map >

181 of 325

Page C-15
Appendix C-5: Leverage Funding
Leverage Funding Requirements
• Applicants must leverage additional funding sources that equal a minimum of 50% of the total requested grant funds.
• At least forty percent (40%) of the leverage funding must be included in the budgets of grant-funded projects or transformative plans. The remaining ten pe rcent (10%) may come from stand -alone leverage projects that are specific to the Transformative Climate Communities Program and are considered to be new investments in the project area.

Eligible Projects or Plans Percentage of Leverage Total Dollar Amount Leverage funding for Grant-funded
projects or Transformative Plans

At least 40%

$14,000,000
Stand-alone leverage projects Up to 10% $3,500,000
Total 50% $17,500,000
• Leverage funding must be committed at the time Applicants submit their applications. • Leverage funding must clearly support the implementation of the Strategies selected to achieve the TCC Program Objectives.
• Leverage funding must be spent within the TCC Project Area and for the purposes of the TCC Project. • Expenditure of leverage funding will only count towards the fifty percent (50%) threshold if it occurs after the grant has been awarded by Strategic Growth Council and before the end of the grant term.

Eligible Leverage Funding Sources
Eligible funding sources for leverage may include, but are not limited to:
• Federal funding sources;
• State funding sources, including other SGC-administered or CCI funds; • Private capital;
• Foundation grants;
• Low-income housing tax credit equity contributions and tax -exempt bonds in connection with four percent (4%) low-income housing tax credits;
• Funds from regional or local tax measures, bonds, property assessments and fee revenue committed to public infrastructure related to Projects included in the TCC Proposal, and located within the designated Project Area;
• Funds for transportation projects that are programmed for allocation and expenditure in the applicable capital improvement plan consistent with the terms and timeframes of the contract agreement.

In-kind goods and services, such as the provision of meals, transportation, or childcare for an eligible community event, may be accepted as eligible sources of leverage if they are adequately defined and doc umented. They will be subject to review by the State during review of the Application.

182 of 325

Page C-16
Eligible Stand-Alone Leverage Projects
• Stand-alone leverage projects must be clearly integrated into the overall TCC Proposal, aligned with the TCC Proposal timeline, and within the TCC Project Area. Applicants must demonstrate that investment was initiated in anticipation of applying for the TCC Program, or that the investment is contingent upon a TCC award.
o Existing stand-alone investments (on-going investments that were not initiated in anticipation of or contingent upon a TCC award) will not count towards the 50 percent (50%) leverage requirement.

Applicants will describe existing stand -alone investments that make the Project Area ready for transformation in the app lication narrative, and that will be scored under the “Vision for Transformation” criteria.
• To ensure that stand -alone leverage projects are committed at the time of application and implemented during the project timeline, Applicants are required to include the leverage partners and scope of work in the TCC Project’s overall Partnership Agreement.
• Leverage projects may not be removed from the TCC Proposal scope of work after the grant has been awarded by the Strategic Growth Council. SGC may consider the failure of a stand-alone leverage project to adhere to the terms of the Partnership Agreement to constitute a Grantee’s non-performance under the Grant Agreement.

183 of 325

Page D-1
APPENDIX D – PROHOUSING POLICIES
Per Section II.F Program Policy Priorities of the Guidelines, the TCC program will incentivize applications from jurisdictions that are designated as Prohousing by the HCD Program or adopted Pro-housing policies that would facilitate sustainable housing production and the reduction of vehicle miles travelled (VMT) . For jurisdictions that are not yet Prohousing designated, t he list below defines pro-housing policies that qualify Applicants for partial scoring incentive points:

VMT Reducing Prohousing Criteria
Category 1: Favorable Zoning and Land Use
▪ Permitting missing middle housing uses (e.g., duplexes, triplexes, and fourplexes) by right in existing low- density, single-family residential zones.
▪ Density bonus programs which exceed statutory requirements by 10 percent or more. ▪ Increasing allowable d ensity in low -density, single-family residential areas beyond the requirements of state Accessory Dwelling Unit law (e.g., permitting more than one ADU or JADU per single -family lot).

These policies shall be separate from any qualifying policies under Category (1)(B) above. ▪ Reducing or eliminating parking requirements for residential development as authorized by Government Code sections 65852.2; adopting vehicular parking ratios that are less than the relevant ratio thresholds at subparagraphs (A), (B), a nd (C) of Government Code section 65915, subdivision (p)(1); or adopting maximum parking requirements at or less than ratios pursuant to Government Code section 65915, subdivision (p).
▪ Zoning to allow for residential or mixed uses in one or more non-residential zones (e.g., commercial, light industrial). Qualifying non-residential zones do not include open space or substantially similar zones. ▪ Modification of development standards and other applicable zoning provisions to promote greater development intensity. Potential areas of focus include floor area ratio; height limits; minimum lot or unit sizes; setbacks; and allowable dwelling units per acre. These policies must be separate from any qualifying policies under Category (1)(B) above.
▪ Establishment of geographic areas for promoting workforce housing or sustainability, such as a Workforce Housing Opportunity Zone, as defined in Government Code section 65620, or a housing sustainability district, as defined in Government Code section 66200.

Category 2: Acceleration of Housing Production Timeframes ▪ Documented practice of streamlining housing development at the project level, such as by enabling a by- right approval process or by utilizing statutory and categorical exemptions as authorized by applicable law (Pub. Resources Code, §§ 21155.1, 21155.4, 21159.24, 21159.25; Gov. Code, § 65457; Cal Code Regs., tit. 14, §§ 15303, 15332; Pub. Resources Code, §§ 21094.5, 21099, 21155.2, 21159.28). ▪ Priority permit processing or reduced plan check times fo r ADUs/JADUs, multifamily housing, or homes affordable to lower- or moderate-income households.

Category 3: Reduction of Construction and Development Costs ▪ Adoption of ordinances or implementation of other mechanisms that result in less restrictive requirements than Government Code sections 65852.2 and 65852.22 to reduce barriers for property owners to create ADUs/JADUs. Examples of qualifying policies include, but are not limited to, development standards improvements, permit processing improvements, dedic ated ADU/JADU staff, technical assistance programs, and pre-approved ADU/JADU design packages.
▪ Measures that reduce costs for transportation -related infrastructure or programs that encourage active modes of transportation or other alternatives to automobiles. Qualifying policies include, but are not limited 184 of 325

Page D-2
to, publicly funded programs to expand sid ewalks or protect bike/micro -mobility lanes; creation of on - street parking for bikes; transit-related improvements; or establishment of carshare programs. ▪ Establishment of pre -approved or prototype plans for missing middle housing types (e.g., duplexes, triplexes, and fourplexes) in low-density, single-family residential areas.

Prohousing Enhancement Factors
• Policy that represents one element of a unified, multi -faceted strategy to promote multiple planning objectives, such as efficient land use, access to public transportation, affordable housing, climate change solutions, and/or hazard mitigation.
• Policies that promote development consistent with the state planning priorities pursuant to Government Code section 65041.1.
• Policies that go beyond state law requirements in reducing displacement of lower income households and conserving existing housing stock that is affordable to lower income households. • Rezoning and other policies that support high-density development in Location Efficient Communities. • Other policies that involve meaningful actions towards affirmatively furthering fair housing pursuant to Government Code section 8899.50.

Prohousing Information and Resources
Applications to the Prohousing are accepted on an over -the-counter and rolling basis. There is no deadline for applications.

HCD will review applications and provide feedback within 60 days and upon approval promptly process awards with a targeted timeframe of 30 days.

General technical assistance is provided through HCD at [email protected]. Technical Assistance can also be provided by an assigned HCD reviewer once the application has been submitted.

Resources
• Prohousing Designation Program PowerPoint:
https://www.hcd.ca.gov/community-development/prohousing/docs/hcdprohousingppt.pdf • Prohousing Regulation Text:
https://www.hcd.ca.gov/community-development/prohousing/docs/prohousing-regulation-text.pdf • Prohousing Frequently Asked Questions:
https://www.hcd.ca.gov/community-development/prohousing/docs/prohousingfaq.pdf

185 of 325

Page E-1
APPENDIX E – AIR POLLUTION REDUCTION AND MITIGATION
Per Section II.F Program Policy Priorities, t he TCC Program will incentivize applications that propose actions or include existing meaningful efforts to reduce localized point sources of pollution in their TCC Project Areas and jurisdictions. TCC’s air pollution priority emphasizes reducing particulate matter emissions and toxic air contaminants due to their disproportionate health impacts in disadvantaged communities.

The list below defines air pollution reduction and mitigation policies that qualify Applicants for partial scoring incentive points. Pollution reduction and p revention policies, and d irect policies in each category, will be worth more points. Applicants can score points in any combination of categories, regardless of whether their role is the policymaker, if the applicant can demonstrate their dedicated activities are aimed at policies that reduce, mitigate, and prevent localized air pollution.

Example Policies to Reduce or Mitigate Local Air Pollution Category Policy
Air Pollution
Reduction and
Prevention

Tier 1 – Direct – Reduction and Prevention
• Health-protective buffer ordinances and phaseout of existing incompatible facilities within buffer zones
• Nonconforming land-use ordinances, restrictions, or zoning provisions • Point-source emissions compliance and enforcement programs • Agreements or incentives for the adoption of more stringent emission thresholds and standards, including but not limited to, Maximum Achievable Control Technology (MACT), for targeted “ toxic hotspot” areas consisting of multiple facilities that emit cumulative toxic air contaminants in DACs and environmental justice communities
• Incorporation of air pollution measures into climate policies and plans • Adoption of CARB Recommended Air Pollution Reduction Measures for new warehouses and distribution centers
• Adopted school bus electrification programs
• Enforcement of existing CARB regulations related to heavy -duty vehicles for public transit and school bus fleets
• Air pollution control districts and advisory committees with environmental justice representatives
• Adoption and enforcement of standard construction emissions mitigation measures
• Implementation of natural gas to electric appliance community -based retrofit programs or incentives
• Participation in local wood stove reduction programs
• Adoption of All-Electric Reach Codes for new developments • Provide incentives for loading dock electrification, Medium - and Heavy-Duty zero-emission vehicles

186 of 325

Page E-2
Tier 2 – Indirect – Community Oversight and Capacity Building • Air monitoring, modeling, community planning and enforcement partnerships amongst community groups, businesses, local jurisdictions, air districts, and/or CARB (e.g. AB 617 Community Air Protection Program) • Data accessibility/community notification programs and culturally appropri ate materials
• Good Neighbor agreements between facilities and adjacent facilities that provide a channel for public participation and citizen oversight • Community education and training on air quality and regulation

Tier 3 – Indirect – Air Quality Co-Benefits
• Transit education workshops/programs targeted at increasing ridership • Bicycle safety or repair workshops/programs targeted at increasing alternate and active modes of transportation
• Adoption of a Safe Routes to School Program
• Adoption/implementation of a comprehensive public transportation, bicycle, and pedestrian master plan
• Expansion of existing transit services and ZEV infrastructure Air Pollution
Mitigation

Tier 1 – Direct – Mitigation
• Moratorium on new approvals or renewals of conditional use permits for hazardous facilities near sensitive receptors
• Control technology incentives for phaseout or reduction of pollutants • Mandated full physical enclosures of hazardous facilities near sensitive receptors
• Truck re-route and enforcement ordinances and programs • Restrict idling for municipally owned vehicles and/or in sensitive areas such as near schools
• Enforce idling restrictions for construction vehicles • Vegetative screening for residents, aligning with CARB’s guidance, and vegetative buffers along pollution sources

Tier 2 – Indirect – Nonstationary and Nonroad Mobile
• Gas-powered leaf blower and lawn mower bans and targeted outreach around subsidies for electric lawn and garden equipment from air districts • Require new developments to include exterior electrical outlets to allow for electrically powered landscaping equipment

187 of 325

Page F-1
APPENDIX F – BASIC INFRASTRUCTURE RESOURCES
Per Section II.F Program Policy Priorities, Applicants must demonstrate that residents in the proposed TCC Project Area have existing access or have developed plans and secured support/ funding to implement:
• Basic environmental infrastructure including water supply and wastewater services, with long -term operations and maintenance plans, in compliance with State Water Board standards; and • Transit connectivity to regional service hubs and major job centers through affordable, clean transportation projects.

SGC recognizes that the lack of this infrastructure is an existing barrier in many disadvantaged communities. TCC staff and technical assistance providers will work with potential App licants during the pre-proposal phase to help make connections to other funding programs or resources that may help them meet the minimum requirements.

An initial list of resources and potential sources is included here. Applicants can request up to 10% of requested funds to support projects that will connect residents to basic environmental infrastructure.

Resources
• California Rural Water Association provides on-site technical assistance and specialized training for rural water and wastewater systems, including resources for tribes. o Website: https://calruralwater.org/
o Tribal resources and technical assistance: https://calruralwater.org/our-programs/tribal/ • Rural Community Assistance Corporation provides resources and technical assistance related to water, wastewater, and solid waste:
o Water, wastewater, and solid waste homepage:
https://www.rcac.org/environmental/water-wastewater-solidwaste/ o Managerial and Financial Hub with tools, resources, and free technical assistance:
https://www.rcap.org/managerialfinancialhub/
o Tribal technical assistance program:
https://www.rcac.org/native-communities/tribal-circuit-riders/ • Self-Help Enterprises provides technical assistance to rural communities:
o https://www.selfhelpenterprises.org/programs/community-development/ o Drinking water:
https://www.selfhelpenterprises.org/programs/community-development/safe-drinking-water/ o Sewer systems:
https://www.selfhelpenterprises.org/programs/community-development/sanitary-sewer-systems/ o Other community development programs:
https://www.selfhelpenterprises.org/programs/community-development/ • Specialized Utility Services Program provides general and technical services to water and wastewater systems:
o http://www.suspinc.org/
• USDA Water & Waste Disposal Grants to Alleviate Health Risks on Tribal Lands and Colonias in California provides grants and long -term, low-interest loans for acquisition, construction, or improvement of basic drinking water and waste disposal systems on federally recognized tribal lands, Colonias, and rural areas and towns with populations of 10,000 or less. Matching funds are not required. o https://www.rd.usda.gov/programs-services/water-environmental-programs/water-waste- disposal-grants-alleviate-health-risks-tribal-lands-and-colonias/ca 188 of 325

Page F-2
• USDA Water & Waste Disposal Loan & Grant Program in Californ ia provides grants and long-term, low- interest loans for acquisition, construction, or improvement of basic drinking water and waste disposal systems on federally recognized tribal lands, Colonias, and rural areas and towns with populations of 10,000 or less. Planning grants are available (see following entry). o https://www.rd.usda.gov/programs-services/water-environmental-programs/water-waste- disposal-loan-grant-program/ca
• USDA Water & Waste Disposal Predevelopment Planning Grants may be used to pay part of the costs of developing a complete application for the Water & Waste Disposal Loan & Grant Program (see previous entry). Grants provide a maximum of $30,000 or 75 percent of the predev elopment planning costs. At least 25% of the project cost must come from the applicant or third-party sources. o https://www.rd.usda.gov/programs-services/water-environmental-programs/water-waste- disposal-predevelopment-planning-grants
• USDA Rural Decentralized Water Systems Grant Program (currently closed) helps qualified nonprofits and tribes create a revolving loan fund to increase access to clean, reliable water and septic systems for households in eligible rural areas. Terms for the loans include one percent fixed interest rate, 20 -year maximum term, and an $15,000 maximum loan per household. o https://www.rd.usda.gov/programs-services/water-environmental-programs/rural-decentralized- water-systems-grant-program
• Single-Family Housing Repair Loans & Grants in California provides loans up to $40,000 to very -low- income homeowners to repair, improve or modernize their homes and grants up to $10,000 to elderly very-low-income homeowners to remove health and safety hazards. Loans and grants can be combined for up to a maximum of $50,000 in assistance.
o https://www.rd.usda.gov/programs-services/single-family-housing-programs/single-family- housing-repair-loans-grants/ca
• CA Water Board s Small Community Funding Program helps small disadvantaged communities provide drinking and wastewater service with technical assistance needs, interim water supplies, and capital improvement projects.
o https://www.waterboards.ca.gov/water_issues/programs/grants_loans/sustainable_water_soluti ons/scfp.html
• CA Water Boards CAA Urgent Drinking Water Need Projects provides interim alternate water supplies (such as bottled or hauled water) or emergency improvements or repairs to existing water systems as necessary to provide an adequate supply of domestic water if they are a more cost -effective interim solution than the provision of interim alternate water supplies. o https://www.waterboards.ca.gov/water_issues/programs/grants_loans/caa/urgent_water_needs. html
• CA Prop 84 Small Community Infrastructure Improvements Program provides grants for small community drinking water infrastructure improvemen ts and related actions to meet safe drinking water standards.

Grants may be made for the purpose of financing feasibility studies and to meet the eligibility requirements for a construction grant. Construction grants are limited to $5 million per project. Technical assistance may be provided.
o http://bondaccountability.resources.ca.gov/Program.aspx?ProgramPK=2&Program=Small%20C ommunity%20Infrastructure%20Improvements%20Program&PropositionPK=4 189 of 325

Page G-1
APPENDIX G – POST AWARD CONSULTATION PROCESS
Applicants selected for award will be required to participate in a Post-award Consultation phase prior to finalizing the grant agreement that outlines the grant terms. During this Post-award Consultation phase, the State will assist the awarded Applicant and Co -applicants to refine the Grant Agreement and all accompanying attachments to comply with administrative, statutory, and TCC Program requirements. All project analysis and review related to the Post-award Consultation phase must be completed within 6 months of the TCC grant award announcement made by the Strategic Growth Council. Awardees will be required to meet with TCC Program Staff and provide all required documentation related to project readiness, work plans and budgets, and other requested documentation during that time. Failure to complet e the review and to sign the grant a greement may result in the award being rescinded and given instead to the next highest scoring community from the review process.

Goals for the Post-Award Process:

The post-award process is designed to review the grant agreement terms with grantees and assess the readiness, feasibility, and eligibility of the entire TCC proposal by:
▪ Obtaining additional information/detail needed for any component of the proposal ▪ Removing any ineligible activities or costs
▪ Incorporating recommended improvements from specialists and/or the staff report After all plans and projects are reviewed and approved, TCC Program Staff will convert materials from the application into a scope of work, timeline, and budget for the agreement.

Post-Award Process Overview:

After the Council makes the awards, TCC Program Staff will refine a grant agreement template that defines the grant terms and conditions. After the grant agreement template is finalized internally , Grantees will undergo the following process:

Grant Agreement Template

1. TCC Program Staff will send the grant agreement template to the Grantee.

2. Grantees will send any questions related to the general terms and project specific terms to SGC.

3. TCC Program Staff will respond to questions and will make any required amendments to the Grant Agreement template.

TCC Proposal Review

1. TCC Program Staff will r eview the proposal based on consistency with the TCC Guidelines, Grant Agreement, application reviewer feedback, and program staff feedback. TCC Program Staff will provide a review package with a request for additional information, documents and/or revisio ns to:
▪ Funded Projects
▪ Leverage Projects
▪ Transformative Plans
▪ Partnership Agreement

2. TCC Program Staff will schedule an in -person meeting to go over requested information with the Grantee and Partners and address any questions.

3. Grantee and Partners will send additional information and documents to TCC Program Staff . 190 of 325

Page G-2

4. TCC Program Staff will review the submitted information and documents then finalize the scope of work, timeline and budget to be inserted into the final Grant Agreement.

Final Grant Agreement

1. Grantee and Partners will review the final scope of work, timeline and budget.

2. TCC Program Staff will send the final Grant Agreement package to the Grantee for the grant execution.
▪ Grantees should notify SGC if they need any additional resolu tion or council/board review prior to executing the agreement.
▪ Grantee should provide the timeline for finalizing the Partnership Agreement and/or any pass- through agreements with Partners.

Policies Governing Post-Award Process:

The following policies will govern TCC Program Staff in finalizing the grant agreement during the Post -award Consultation phase. They will also be used to make determinations for proposed changes during the grant term.

All changes to proposed projects and transformative plans from the awarded application – including changes to proposed scopes, activities, and associated budgets – will be reviewed by TCC Program Staff and SGC legal counsel for consistency with the relevant TCC Program Guidelines, grant agreement, and these policies.

Failure to update the proposal to conform to the TCC Guidelines and Grant Agreement will result in pausing the Post-Award Consultation phase. TCC Program Staff are required to report to the Council and get direction on the next steps.

Transformative Plan Compliance
If any of the Transformative Plans are found to be not in compliance with the TCC Program Guidelines and Grant Agreement:

1. TCC Program Staff will send a memo outlining the area of impr ovement along with timeline and approval process to the Grantee.

2. TCC Program Staff will identify any activities or budget line items that are not eligible. The item should be eliminated from the revised scope of work and budget. The associated cost can be used for allowable activities and budget items.

3. Any budget transfer between the Transformative Plans or from Transformative Plans to Projects require written approval of the TCC Program Manager.

4. Any changes in the Transformative Plan budgets that result in exceeding the maximum allowable cap under that Transformative Plan would require written approval of the SGC Executive Director.

Project Compliance
If any of the Projects are not in compliance with the TCC Guidelines and Grant Agreement:

1. TCC Program Staff will communicate in writing the reasons why the project is not eligible, and the area of changes required to fit under the same Strategy. Changes to the project scope that would result in changes in the categories below require approval of the TCC Program Manager:
▪ Quantity of deliverables (example: number of solar panels or trees) ▪ GHG emission reductions
191 of 325

Page G-3
▪ Beneficiary of the Project
▪ Co-benefits
Changes that impact the threshold requirements or competitiveness of the entire project will require Council Approval.

2. If the Project that is not in compliance with the TCC Guidelines and the Grant Agreement can’t accommodate changes proposed by TCC Program Staff, then:

Option 1) Staff may suggest moving the project to a new Strategy that is a better fit for the initial proposed scope of work. Moving the project to a new Strategy will require written approval of the TCC Program Manager.

Option 2) If both the Strategy and Project Scope of work need to change, this would be considered a new project. In this case, the previous project will be eliminated. Grantees should submit a request for a new Project to re-use the funds. SGC will review requests on a case-by-case basis.

If staff approves the new Project, it will require Council approval.

Ineligible Costs and Budget Modifications
If any of the Transformative Plans or Projects are in compliance with the TCC Guidelines and Grant Agreement, but include budget line items or activities not eligible per TCC Guidelines or Grant Agreement then:

1. Ineligible project costs must unconditionally be eliminated from the proposed scope of work for TCC funding. SGC cannot provide grant funds for ineligible costs.

2. Ineligible project costs may be reallocated to other eligible costs within the same originally proposed project, up to the total amount of the original budget request for that project, upon written approval of TCC program staff.

3. Reallocated budget items within the same project must be for project costs under the same Strategy as the originally proposed project.

4. The budget for the ineligible costs in one project may be transferred to other projects, upon written approval of the TCC Program Manager.

5. Upon written consent of the Grantee, Project Lead, and SGC Executive Director, eligible project costs associated with any project may be reduced or eliminated prior to signing the Grant Agreement. The foregoing notwithstanding, no project may be eliminated that is needed to remain eligible for TCC funding per the relevant TCC Program Guidelines.

Leverage Commitments
If any of the Lever age Projects or leverage funding commitments are not in compliance with the TCC Guidelines and Grant Agreement:

1. TCC Program Staff will communicate in writing the reasons why the leverage project or leverage funding commitments are not eligible, and the area of changes required to meet compliance.

Changes to the leverage commitments that would result in changes in the categories below require approval of the TCC Program Manager:
▪ Quantity of deliverables (example: number of solar panels or trees) ▪ GHG emission reductions
192 of 325

Page G-4
▪ Beneficiary of the Project
▪ Co-benefits
Changes that impact the threshold requirements or competitiveness of the entire project will require approval of the SGC Executive Director.

If the Grantee can’t accommodate changes proposed by TCC Program Staff, then:

Option 1) Grantee may propose in writing an alternative leverage funding commitment or revised scope of work that makes a good faith effort to fulfill the original intent of the initial proposed scope of work.

Revising the leverage funding commitments or scope of work will require written approval of the TCC Program Manager.

Option 2) If an alternative leverage commitment is not feasible, staff may suggest r emoving the leverage funding from the funded project, transformative plan, or leverage project of the TCC proposal. Removal of leverage funding will require written approval of the SGC Executive Director.

193 of 325

Page H-1
APPENDIX H – PUBLICITY GUIDELINES
TCC Grant Recipients are required to acknowledge SGC in all publications, websites, signage, invitations, and other media-related and public-outreach products related to the TCC grant. SGC staff will provide SGC and DOC logo files and guidance on their usage directly to grant recipients.

Long-Form Materials
Long-form written materials, such as reports, must include the following standard language about SGC and TCC:

The Transformative Climate Communities (TCC) Program funds community -led development and infrastructure projects that achieve major environmental, health and economic benefits in California’s most disadvantaged communities. TCC empowers the communities most impacted by pollution to choose their own goals, strategies and projects to enact transformational change – all with data -driven milestones and measurable outcomes. This program is administered by Strategic Growth Council (SGC) which coordinates the activities of State agencies and partners with stakeholders to promote sustainability, economic prosperity, and quality of life for all Californians. www.sgc.ca.gov Press Releases, Flyers, and Visual Materials
Any informational materials that do not qualify as long-form, but that include at least a paragraph of text, such as press releases, media advisories, short case studies, some flyers, etc., should include the following language:
“[Project Name] is supported by California Strategic Growth Council’s Transf ormative Climate Communities program.”
Grantees may at times produce promotional materials that are primarily visual in nature, such as banners, signage, certain flyers, and sharable images for social media. In such cases, when including the boilerplate la nguage acknowledging SGC support is not practical, grantees should instead include the official logo s of SGC and DOC, preceded by the words “Funded by.”
Media Inquiries
TCC Grant Recipients are required to identify a point of contact for all press inquiries and communications needs related to the project and provide the name, phone number and email address of this individual to SGC. Grantees must also distribute a press release after grant decisions are made at SGC’s Public Council Meeting and are encouraged to do so for other major milestones throughout the lifecycle of the grant. All press releases must be approved by SGC Communications Office prior to distribution and SGC must be alerted and invited to participate in any and all press conferences related to the grant.

Communications Materials
TCC Grant Recipients are required to prepare one or more 2–4-page documents that provide a summary of the grant components and tell the story of the TCC proposal development process and/or implementation. All such materials must be approved by SGC Communications Office prior to distribution. These materials will be displayed on the SGC website.

194 of 325

Page H-2
Social Media
TCC Applicants and Grantees are encouraged to use social media to share the process of creating a TCC proposal and to inform the public o f all stages of implementation. @CalSGC and @CalConservation should be tagged on all posts related to the TCC grant. Use of the hashtags #T ransformativeClimateCommunities and #CommunityLedTransformation is also encouraged.
195 of 325

Page I-1
APPENDIX I – PAST PROGRAM AWARDS
Implementation Grants
Three (3) funding rounds of Implementation Grants have been awarded. For more information about previous awardees or progress on previous grants, please see the website. ▪ Round 1 – $133 million total
o City of Fresno $66.5 million
o City of Ontario $33.25 million
o Housing Authority of the County of Los Angeles (HACLA) (Watts) $33.25 million ▪ Round 2 – $46 million total
o Community Partners (Pacoima) $23 million
o Sacramento Housing and Redevelopment Agency (River District) $23 million ▪ Round 3 – $48.1 million total
o City of Oakland $28.20million
o City of Riverside $9.05 million
o City of Stockton $10.83 million

196 of 325

Page I-2
Planning Grants
Three (3) funding rounds of Planning Grants have been awarded. Rounds 1 and 2 of the Planning Grants were funded through Proposition 84. For more information about previous awardees or progress on previous grants, please contact SGC.
▪ Round 1 – $1.6 million total
o Ten (10) locations, $170,000 each*
(*With the exception of the City of Moreno Valley, which received a grant of $93,960) ▪ Round 2 – $1 million total
o Five (5) locations, $200,000 each
▪ Round 3 - $600,000 total
o Three (3) locations, $200,000 each

197 of 325

Page J-1
APPENDIX J – SAMPLE GRANT AGREEMENT (ROUND 3 TCC PROGRAM AWARDS) A sample Grant Agreement from the Round 3 awards will be posted on the Transformative Climate Communities resources page found here (http://sgc.ca.gov/programs/tcc/resources/).

198 of 325

=== END OF DOCUMENT ===
199 of 325
City of Glendale TCC Program Project Area Map

200 of 325
8b

CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL

AGENDA ITEM
Report: Contract Award to West Coast Arborists, Inc., to provide Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services for Glendale Water & Power (GWP), Specification No. 3847.

1. Motion authorizing the City Manager, or his designee, to enter into and execute a contract with West Coast Arborists, Inc., to furnish equipment and labor for Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services under Specification No. 3847 in the amount of $4,844,130 for three years plus a 15% contingency of $726,620 with an option to extend this contract for two additional one-year terms at $1,614,710 plus a 15% contingency per year.

COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Action
Approved for May 24, 2022 calendar

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
On March 23, 2022, Glendale Water and Power (GWP) advertised the bid specification for Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services, Specification No. 3847. On April 27, 2022, staff received two bids with amounts ranging from $1,614,710 to $2,560,500 per year.

The lowest responsible bidder was West Coast Arborists, Inc., with a proposed bid price of $1,614,710. This bid met all the requirements of Specification No. 3847. Staff’s evaluation of this bidder’s project experience, facilities and staffing resources, and their current performance with GWP’s power line clearance tree trimming program all indicate that West Coast Arborists, Inc., is a responsible bidder.

COUNCIL PRIORITIES
Infrastructure & Mobility: The Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming Program protects GWP’s electric distribution system from trees that encroach near high voltage power lines and mitigates potential outages from tree branches making contact with power lines.

Safe & Healthy Community: Per California Senate Bill 901, GWP is required to develop, maintain, and implement a formal Wildfire Mitigation Plan. One of GWP’s primary tools for lowering wildfire risk is through vegetation management and by reducing the likelihood of overhead power lines coming into contact with trees or otherwise sparking wildfires.
201 of 325
28 b
3 2
9 6

RECOMMENDATION
Authorize the City Manager, or his designee, to enter into and execute a three-year contract with West Coast Arborists, Inc., for Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services, Specification No. 3847, in the amount of $4,844,130 for three years plus a 15% contingency of $726,620 with an option to extend this contract for two additional one-year terms at $1,614,710 plus a 15% contingency per year.

BACKGROUND
One of the most common causes of unplanned outages to the electrical system is tree branches making contact with power lines. As part of GWP’s reliability and wildfire mitigation program, the City contracts with certified arborists to trim trees that encroach near high voltage power lines to prevent and mitigate potential power outages. GWP has an ongoing program to trim trees and, in some cases, remove trees from under and around overhead power lines, as mandated by the California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) and California Senate Bill (SB) 901 for electric system reliability and wildfire safety. Per California SB 901, GWP is required to develop, maintain, and implement a formal Wildfire Mitigation Plan. One of GWP’s primary tools in lowering wildfire risk is through vegetation management by reducing the likelihood of overhead power lines coming in contact with trees or otherwise sparking wildfires. GWP’s program is based on a periodic schedule, and the tree trimming is tailored to the type of tree that needs to be trimmed. Substantial resources and a high degree of expertise are required to perform this type of work.

In 2016, following a competitive bid process, the City Council awarded a five-year contract to WCA to furnish equipment and labor for tree trimming and removal services for power line clearances and for tree removal services for water facilities under Specification No. 3599. On June 29, 2021, the City Council authorized an amendment to Contract No. C106241A with WCA to extend the Contract term for an additional one year for an amount not to exceed two million five hundred thousand dollars ($2,500,000) for the one-year term through August 2022.

On March 22, 2022, the City Council approved Specification No. 3847 for GWP’s Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services program, and instructed the City Clerk to advertise for bids for a new contract.

ANALYSIS
Pursuant to City Council authorization on March 22, 2022, GWP staff issued Specification No. 3847 to solicit bids for Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services. On April 27, 2022, the two bids show in the table below were received by staff.

The lowest bid was submitted by West Coast Arborists, Inc. This bid met all the requirements of Specification No. 3847. Staff’s evaluation of this bidder’s project Bidder Bid Amount Rank
West Coast Arborists, Inc. $1,614,710 1
International Environmental Corporation $2,560,500 2
202 of 325
38 b
3 2
9 6
experience, equipment and staffing resources, and their current performance with GWP’s power line clearance tree trimming program all indicate that West Coast Arborists, Inc., is a responsible and qualified bidder and the lowest responsive bidder.

Based on the above facts, staff recommends awarding the contract to West Coast Arborists, Inc., for Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services, Specification No. 3847.

CONTRACT DASHBOARDS
Project Description: Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services
Plans/Specs Adopted: Specification No. 3847
Advertisement Method: City web site and the eBidBoard
Specs Issued: Specification No. 3847
Bids Opened: April 27, 2022
Company Name(s) and
Bid Amount(s):

West Coast Arborists, Inc.: $1,614,710
International Environmental Corporation: $2,560,500
Contractor: Same as above.

New / Existing
Contractor:

Existing Contractor
Procurement Method
(Bid / SS):

Competitive Bid
Contract Term:

Three-year contract, with the option to extend two
additional one-year terms.

Construction
Phase Begins:

Contract period shall begin on August 23, 2022
following the expiration of the current contract for
Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal
Services, Specification No. 3599.

Construction
Phase Ends:

Three years from the contract execution date.

STAKEHOLDERS/OUTREACH
Not Applicable.

FISCAL IMPACT
The power line clearance tree trimming three-year contract will cost $4,844,130 ($1,614,710 per year) plus a 15% contingency of $726,620. Funding for the contract is being proposed as a part of the Glendale Water & Power Department’s FY 22-23 budget. Funding for future years will be requested as a part of the annual citywide budget process.

Amount Account String Funding Source
$2,500,000 GL: 43110-5820-GWP-4660-P0000- GWP Electric Works Revenue Fund
203 of 325
48 b
3 2
9 6

ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW
This item is considered a ministerial activity and therefore, not subject to CEQA review.

CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE
In accordance with the City Campaign Finance Ordinance No. 5744, the following are the names and business addresses of the members of the board of directors, the chairperson, CEO, COO, CFO, Subcontractors and any person or entity with more than ten percent interest in the company proposed for contract in this agenda item report:

Officers of West Coast Arborists, Inc.

Full Name Title Business Address City State Zip
Patrick
Mahoney
President 2200 E. Via Burton St. Anaheim CA 92806
Richard
Mahoney
Secretary 2200 E. Via Burton St. Anaheim CA 92806
Rose
Epperson
Treasurer 2200 E. Via Burton St. Anaheim CA 92806

ALTERNATIVES
Alternative 1: Authorize the City Manager, or his designee, to enter into and execute a contract with West Coast Arborists, Inc., for Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services, Specification No, 3847, as described herein.

Alternative 2: Not authorize the requested action herein which will end the City’s Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming Program.

Alternative 3: Consider any other alternative not proposed by staff.

ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:

Daniel Scorza, P.E., Chief Assistant General Manager - Electric Approved by:

Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager

EXHIBITS / ATTACHMENTS
None.
204 of 325

M O T I O N
Moved by Council Member ________________________________, seconded by Council Member __________________________________, that the Council of the City of Glendale finds that West Coast Arborists, Inc. is the lowest responsive bidder to furnish labor, equipment and materials for Power Line Clearance Tree Trimming and Removal Services under Specification No. 3847, and that the bid of West Coast Arborist, Inc. is hereby accepted and approved as recommended by the General Manager of Glendale Water & Power in the Report dated May 24, 2022, and that all other bids be, and are, hereby rejected. The City Manager, or his designee, is authorized to execute a contract with West Coast Arborist, Inc. for a not-to-exceed amount of $4,844,130 for three years, plus a fifteen percent (15%) contingency of $726,620, with an option to extend for two additional one-year terms at $1,614,710 plus a 15% contingency per year. Said contract shall be subject to approval by the City Attorney.

Vote as follows:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:
205 of 325
8c

CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL

AGENDA ITEM
Report: Purchase Order Contract for One Madvac LS125 Electric Vacuum Sweeper

1. Resolution dispensing with competitive bidding and authorizing the Deputy Director of Finance/Purchasing to execute a purchase order contract with Haaker Equipment Co. for the purchase of one Madvac LS125 electric vacuum sweeper and reserving a 10 percent contingency.

2. Resolution of appropriation from the Refuse Disposal Fund to provide adequate funding for this recommended procurement.

COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Action Item
Approved for May 24, 2022 calendar

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The Public Works Department (PWD) has a need for a compact vacuum sweeper to clean narrow areas such as protected bicycle lanes and alleys that can't be accessed by the department's full-size street sweepers.

The equipment available for purchase in this vehicle class are powered by diesel engines which emit nitrogen oxides (NOx) and particulate matter (PM).

Haaker Equipment Co. recently began takings orders for Madvac LS125 electric vacuum sweepers that will start production in December 2022, with anticipated delivery dates of early 2023. While these electric sweepers are more expensive than the diesel alternatives, there are clear environmental advantages to this zero emission option, and it will provide City staff with useful experience operating and maintaining electric equipment of this vehicle class. Based on staff’s research, this is the only electric zero emission option for this vehicle class; therefore dispensing with competitive bidding is needed to advance this procurement.
206 of 325
28 c
3 3
4 1

COUNCIL PRIORITIES
Environmental Stewardship: Choosing a zero-emission electric equipment option represents a reduction in NOx, PM and greenhouse gases over the diesel engine alternative.

RECOMMENDATION
PWD recommends that the City Council approve a resolution dispensing with competitive bidding and authorizing the Deputy Director of Finance/Purchasing to execute a purchase order contract with Haaker Equipment Co. in the amount of $279,579 for the purchase of one Madvac LS125 electric vacuum sweeper, plus a 10 percent contingency of $27,958.

PWD also recommends the City Council authorize a resolution of appropriation in the amount of $307,537 from the Refuse Disposal Fund (5300) to provide funds for this procurement.

BACKGROUND
PWD operates six street sweepers bi-weekly throughout the City, operating seven days a week. In Fiscal Year 2020-21, our street sweepers collected 992 tons of debris from city streets. The fall season is particularly demanding on the fleet due to the inordinate amount of leaves, tree branches and mud on the ground. The street sweepers are the first line of defense in keeping trash and debris out of the City’s storm drain catch basins and the regional storm drainage system operated by the Los Angeles County Flood Control District.

In 2021, PWD installed a protected bicycle lane on Los Feliz Road between Gardena Avenue and the border with Los Angeles. Plans for additional protected bicycle lanes on streets such as Glenoaks Boulevard and Broadway are being discussed. Special street cleaning equipment is needed to clean these narrow areas to keep them clear of dirt and debris and prevent this material from entering the stormdrain system and contaminating local waterways. Additionally, this specialized equipment will be used to clean other narrow areas such as the 30 miles of alleys in Glendale. Finally, the sweeper can be used to clean numerous other areas on an as-needed basis where full-size street sweepers can’t reach such as paths, sidewalks and parking lots.

The class of street sweeper needed to perform this work operate on diesel engine power.

However, staff has been notified by a vendor that they have begun taking orders on the electric Madvac LS125 vacuum sweeper that is scheduled to go into production in December 2022, with deliveries beginning April 2023. Of the various street sweepers that City staff has experience operating and maintaining, MadVac is the only company producing an all-electric vacuum sweeper of this class in the near future that we are aware of. Staff checked several other manufacturers and the LS125 is a one-of-a-kind piece of equipment.

ANALYSIS
The City of Glendale has a unique opportunity to integrate an all-electric heavy-duty piece of equipment into the fleet. Staff received a cost estimate for an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Tier 4 rated diesel engine MadVac LS175 vacuum sweeper of $160,000 - 207 of 325
38 c
3 3
4 1
$180,000. In order to meet Tier 4 emission standards, this equipment must include costly advanced emission control technologies. However, even with substantial emission controls, they emit Nitrous Oxide, Particulate Matter and greenhouse gases. The Madvac LS125 electric vacuum sweeper is available with Sourcewell pricing for $279,579. This price includes a $18,654 trailer, onboard charger and ancillary equipment.

While the electric vacuum sweeper is costlier than the diesel engine powered option for the city, both in initial procurement costs and estimate lifetime costs, selecting the zero emission alternative is consistent with City Council’s Environmental Stewardship priority.

There is a risk associated with purchasing the first generation of any new equipment; however, the city has extensive experience with MadVac equipment and finds them to be generally reliable and well made.

The electric vacuum sweeper is fitted with four battery packs which can power the unit for up to nine hours. The unit takes 12 hours to charge from onboard integrated chargers. It features a 1-ton payload, 1.25 cubic yard litter capacity container and vacuum rating of 2000 cubic feet per minute. Staff determined that the required bike lane and alley cleaning can be performed with these constraints.

Staff recommends a 10% reserve for contingencies in the amount of $27,958. Staff has limited experience with an all-electric vehicle of this size and the contingency will cover any unforeseen expenses related to the procurement of this vehicle. The unforeseen expenses may include ancillary fittings or equipment to service Glendale’s unique neighborhoods and/or building upgrades to support the EV charging infrastructure. The contingency will cover any unforeseen expenses related to the procurement of this vehicle, and will allow the City to reserve a vehicle from MadVac’s first generation for fast- as-possible receipt and integration into the City’s fleet.

STAKEHOLDERS/OUTREACH
The electric vacuum sweeper will be fitted with highly visible decals indicating its zero- emission all-electric engine. It will operate in public areas and serve as a symbol of Glendale’s commitment to transitioning to a zero-emission fleet and environmental stewardship.

FISCAL IMPACT
The cost of the electric vacuum sweeper inclusive of contingency is $307,537, which was not included as a part of the FY 2021-22 budget. Therefore, staff is requesting for an appropriation of $307,537 from the Refuse Disposal Net Position account. The appropriation request is outlined below:

Requesting Appropriation
Amount From (Account
String)
To (Account String) Funding Source
$307,537 27900-5300-PWD-
0000
51000-5300-PWD-
7525
Refuse Disposal
Fund
208 of 325
48 c
3 3
4 1

ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW (CEQA/NEPA)
Not applicable.

CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE
The names and business addresses of the members of the board of directors, the chairperson, CEO, COO, CFO, Subcontractors and any person or entity with more than 10% interest in the company proposed for contract in this Agenda Item Report are attached in Exhibit #1, in accordance with the City Campaign Finance Ordinance No. 5744.

ALTERNATIVES
Alternative 1: The City Council may approve a resolution dispensing with competitive bidding and authorizing the Deputy Director of Finance/Purchasing to execute a purchase order contract with Haaker Equipment co. for the purchase of a Madvac LS125 electric vacuum sweeper and a resolution of appropriation to provide funds for this procurement. This will provide PWD with zero emission equipment to provide biweekly sweeping services for protected bicycle lanes, alleys, parking lots and other narrow areas.

Alternative 2: The City Council may elect not to approve a purchase order contract and appropriation of funds.

Alternative 3: The City Council may consider any other alternative not proposed by staff.

ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:

Shea Eccleston-Banwer, Senior Public Works Manager
Approved by:

Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager

EXHIBITS/ATTACHMENTS
Exhibit 1 - Campaign Finance Disclosure Form.
209 of 325
1 RESOLUTION NO. ______ _

A RESOLUTION OF THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE

DISPENSING WITH COMPETITIVE BIDDING AND AUTHORIZING THE

DEPUTY DIRECTOR OF FINANCE/PURCHASING (PURCHASING

ADMINISTRATOR) OR HIS DESIGNEE TO EXECUTE A PURCHASE ORDER CONTRACT WITH HAAKER EQUIPMENT CO. FOR THE
PURCHASE OF ONE MADVAC LS125 ELECTRIC VACUUM SWEEPER WHEREAS, the Public Works Department provides street sweeping services for the City of Glendale seven days per week to enhance safety and keep trash and debris out of the City’s storm drain catch basins and the regional storm drainage system operated by the Los Angeles County Flood Control District; and WHEREAS , Special street cleaning equipment is needed to clean narrow areas in the City such as protected bicycle lanes, alleys, paths, sidewalks and parking lots; and
WHEREAS , the Madvac LS125 Electric Vacuum Sweeper was identified by staff as a viable alternative to customary diesel engine powered vacuum sweepers; and
WHEREAS , City staff was unable to identify any other original equipment manufacturer (OEM) all electric vacuum sweeper of this class currently available locally; and
WHEREAS, the Glendale City Council has prioritized environmental stewardship when making administrative and operational decisions and the electric vacuum sweeper was determined by staff to be a superior option from an environmental stewardship standpoint due to its zero-emission all electric engine compared to diesel engine alternatives with emit particulate matter and nitrogen oxides; and
WHEREAS, procuring the Madvac LS125 Electric Vacuum Sweeper will provide City staff with useful experience operating and maintaining electric equipment of this vehicle class; and
WHEREAS, Glendale Charter Art. VI Section 9 provides an exception to competitive bidding where City Council determines that it is in the best interest of the City to dispense with competitive bidding; and

NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:
210 of 325
2 1. The foregoing facts are deemed to be true and correct, and are a basis for dispensing with competitive bidding and authorizing the execution of a purchase order contract with Haaker Equipment, Co. for the purchase of a Madvac LS125 Electric Vacuum Sweeper.

2. The City Council hereby dispenses with competitive bidding and authorizes the Deputy Director of Finance/Purchasing (Purchasing Administrator) or a designee to execute a purchase order contract with Haaker Equipment, Co. for the purchase of a Madvac LS125 Electric Vacuum Sweeper in the amount of two hundred seventy-nine thousand five hundred seventy- nine dollars ($279,579).

3. The City Council hereby authorizes a 10% reserve for contingency totaling twenty-seven thousand nine hundred fifty-eight dollars ($27,958) Adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale on this _______ day of _________ , 2022.
____________________________
Mayor
ATTEST:

City Clerk

STATE OF CALIFORNIA )

COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES )

CITY OF GLENDALE )
I, Aram Adjemian, Clerk of the City of Glendale, do hereby certify that the foregoing Resolution No. _________ was adopted by the City Council of the City of Glendale, California, at a regular meeting held on the __________ day of ____________, 2022, and that the same was adopted by the following vote:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:
_________________________
City Clerk
211 of 325
RESOLUTION NO. ___________

RESOLUTION OF THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE

MAKING AN APPROPRIATION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:

SECTION 1: That the sum of $307,537 is hereby appropriated and/or transferred from the following accounts to the following accounts:

ACCOUNTS DESCRIPTION FROM TO
27900-5300-PWD-0000
51000-5300-PWD-7525-P0000
Net Position, Refuse Disposal Fund, Public
Works
Capital Outlay, Refuse Disposal Fund, Public
Works, Street Sweeping
$307,537
$307,537
To appropriate funding for an electric vacuum sweeper.

SECTION 2: The Director of Finance / Information Technology is authorized to make such other revisions, individual appropriation line-items, changes in summaries, fund totals, grand totals, and other portions of the budget document as necessary to reflect and implement the changes specified in this resolution.

SECTION 3: The City Clerk shall certify to the adoption of this Resolution.

Adopted this________day of _______________, 2022.
_______________________________
Mayor
ATTEST:
05/16/2022
_____________________________________
City Clerk 307,537

STATE OF CALIFORNIA )

COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES ) SS

CITY OF GLENDALE )
I, Aram Adjemian, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, do hereby certify that the foregoing Resolution No._________was adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, at a regular meeting held on the__________ day of _______________, 2022, and that the same was adopted by the following vote:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:
________________________________
City Clerk
/
Director of Finance / Information Technology
212 of 325
213 of 325
214 of 325
8d

CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL

AGENDA ITEM
Report: Film Permit Operation

1. Ordinance for introduction amending portions of GMC Chapter 5.92 to allow for third-party issuance and oversight of film permits.

2. Resolution removing certain fees from Citywide fee schedule related to film permits.

COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Action Item
Approved for May 24, 2022 calendar

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The City has initiated plans to contract with a third-party consultant, beginning July 15, 2022, to take on much of the work of application, issuance, and oversight of filming and film permits within the City. Implementation of this contract requires modification to Chapter 5.92 of the Glendale Municipal Code related to film permits and removal of certain fees for filming from the Citywide fee schedule.

The City plans to outsource the film permit operation to FilmLA, a local non-profit agency. FilmLA has been providing film permit processing services to cities for more than 15 years. Their clients include the County of Los Angeles, the City of Los Angeles, 8 cities and 7 school districts.

Outsourcing the filming operation to FilmLA will free up staffing resources in the City Manager’s Office and the City Attorney’s Office and streamline the film permitting process within the community.

COUNCIL PRIORITIES
N/A
215 of 325
28 d
3 2
8 4

RECOMMENDATION
Staff recommends that the City Council introduce the ordinance to revise the Glendale Municipal Code and modify the Citywide Fee Schedule to remove certain fees to allow for film permit operation and oversight to be transferred to a third-party operator, FilmLA.

BACKGROUND
Over the years, the filming operation has been housed in the City Clerk’s Office, Economic Development, or City Manager’s Office, depending on available staffing resources. In 2018, the filming operation moved from the Economic Development Office to the City Manager’s Office. Since then, the filming function has continued to operate out of the City Manager’s Office. Due to staffing reductions in the City Manager’s Office and the impacts on existing resources citywide, the City has identified an alternative service delivery method which would result in the transfer of the film permitting process and oversight to a third-party operator named FilmLA.

ANALYSIS
Film L.A., Inc. is a non-profit public benefit corporation that has been providing film permit processing services to municipalities for more than 15 years. Film L.A., Inc. is the film office for the County of Los Angeles, Cities of Los Angeles, Diamond Bar, South Gate, Industry, Lancaster, Palmdale, La Habra Heights, Vernon, Monterey Park, Santa Monica, Newport Beach, San Dimas, Fullerton, Culver City, and Gardena. FilmLA also provides services to seven school Districts in Los Angeles County. (Exhibit A – FilmLA Service Area).

All the costs of services provided by Film L.A., Inc. are borne by the requesting film company based on the types of permits and/or services required. If approved to be a service provider for the City of Glendale, Film L.A., Inc. would coordinate and issue permits for all private and public properties within Glendale, with the exception of City parks, which will be managed by the Community Services & Parks Department.

Further, an agreement with FilmLA will expand the current services provided to filmmakers and the community by centralizing the issuance of film permits, providing consistent notification of proposed filming activities to the community, and providing location monitors to ensure compliance with film permit terms and conditions.

Revisions to Glendale Municipal Code:

The major focus of revisions to Chapter 5.92 of the Glendale Municipal Code (“Motion Picture and Television Production Permit”) is the removal of language requiring permit fees to be collected. As noted below, FilmLA will collect its own fees and will perform these services at no cost to the City—accordingly, film permit fees and other related fees would be redundant.

Additionally, through consultation with FilmLA, and in surveying staff who work closely with permits and filming within the City, the following changes to the existing code language in Chapter 5.92 are proposed:
216 of 325
38 d
3 2
8 4
Removal of a requirement to list all vehicles associated with the filming. Removal of a requirement for submission of a detailed site map. Limitation of number of permit revisions to twice only. Removal of detailed insurance requirements in favor of general insurance requirement with details to be determined by the City Attorney. Updated language regarding permits for public affairs programs. Requirement that nonprofit, public affairs, and student filming permit prices be limited to under 50% of otherwise standard permit prices.

Revisions to Citywide Fee Schedule:

Additionally, the following fees will be removed from the Citywide fee schedule as FilmLA will process said fees according to their fee structure: Chapter I – Miscellaneous Charges, Section 2: Filming & Special Event Fees:

1. Filming “No Parking” Signs

2. Filming Application Fee – Low Budget Filming

3. Filming Application Fee All Others

4. Filming Application Fee Amendment/Revision to Application

5. Filming Application Fee Student & Non-Profit Organization

STAKEHOLDERS/OUTREACH
If the proposed changes are approved by the City Council, staff will host individual transition meetings with FilmLA, City Departments, and the Montrose Shopping Park Association (MSPA), given the high rate of filming that occurs within the Montrose District. No other business or residential areas should experience a change associated with this transition.

FISCAL IMPACT
There is no fiscal impact associated with this report. Although the City will forgo the application fee, which grossed approximately $67,000 in FY 20-21, the City will in fact save significantly more in total staffing costs associated with processing and managing this operation, as staffing costs accrued in this operation are $192,000 per year. Staffing resources freed up as a result of the outsourcing will be redirected to other projects and assignments in the City Manager’s Office. It is important to note that the City will continue collecting rental revenue associated with filming operations taking place at City-owned facilities such as parking lots, the City Hall campus, and the Old Police Station, among other locations, which currently results in approximately $350,000 per year from rental revenue.

ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW (CEQA/NEPA)
N/A

CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE
This item is exempt from campaign disclosure requirements. 217 of 325
48 d
3 2
8 4

ALTERNATIVES

1. The City Council may introduce the ordinance and adopt the resolution to allow for film permit issuance and oversight to be transferred to FilmLA.

2. The City Council may decide to retain film operations in-house. Doing so would require a reassessment of existing resources and the need to revisit both staffing levels as well as an update to the current schedule of fees.

3. The City Council may consider any other alternative not proposed by staff.

ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:

Solene Manoukian, Community Relations Coordinator
David Ligtenberg, Assistant City Attorney
Approved by:

Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager

EXHIBITS/ATTACHMENTS
Exhibit A: FilmLA Service Area
218 of 325
58 d
3 2
8 4

Exhibit A: FilmLA Service Area
219 of 325
68 d
3 2
8 4
ORDINANCE NO. ___________

AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA
AMENDING PORTIONS OF CHAPTER 5.92 OF THE GLENDALE MUNICIPAL CODE, 1995,

TO ALLOW FOR THIRD-PARTY ISSUANCE AND OVERSIGHT

WHEREAS, the City of Glendale requires a permit for a person to engage in the business or activity of filming within the City; and

WHEREAS, such permits have historically been applied for, issued by, and administered by the City Manager’s office; and

WHEREAS, the City has initiated plans to contract with a third-party consultant, beginning July 1, 2022, to take on much of the work of application, issuance, and oversight of filming and film permits within the City; and

WHEREAS, such third-party’s actions require some modification to provisions of Chapter 5.92 of the Glendale Municipal Code in regard to Motion Picture and Television Permits;

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA, DOES ORDAIN AS FOLLOWS:

SECTION 1. Recitals. The City Council finds that all of the facts, findings, and conclusions set forth above in this Ordinance are true and correct and hereby incorporate them by this reference.

SECTION 2. Chapter 5.92 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, entitled “Motion Picture and Television Production Permit,” is hereby amended to read as follows:

5.92.010 Motion Picture and Television Production
A. No person shall engage in the business or the activity of filming, taking or producing motion pictures for educational, entertainment or other commercial purposes, other than for news purposes, at any time and at any place other than at or in an established motion picture or television studio in the city and no person shall engage in such business or activity for such purposes, other than for news purposes, anywhere at any time if the services of city employees, or if the rental or other use of city-owned personal property and/or utilities, other than utilities paid for by private service users serviced by the city, is or are involved, unless a permit for such business or activity during such period of time has first been granted by the City Manager or a designee.

B. In no event shall such activities be performed or conducted in excess of the time period for which the permit provided for in subsection A of this section is issued.

5.92.020 Motion Picture and Television Production—Permit—Application—Form and Fees
A. No permit required by section 5.92.010 shall be issued until after: (1) the applicant has first completed, signed and dated an application for the permit on forms 220 of 325
78 d
3 2
8 4
provided by the City Manager or a designee; (2) the applicant has deposited with the City Manager or a designee a permit application and investigation fee; (3) the applicant has deposited with the City Manager or a designee all other sums of money and/or completed documents as may be required under this code.

B. The amount or rate of any permit, license, charge or other fee under this chapter shall be established and/or modified by resolution of the city council. The schedule for the fees shall remain on file and be available in the office of the city clerk.

The City Manager or a designee shall review the fees charged at least once annually and shall recommend changes to the council when appropriate.

5.92.030 Motion Picture and Television Production-Permit-Application Requirements
A. The City Manager or a designee shall prepare and supply a form for application for the permit required by section 5.92.010. The form shall require the following information and shall be signed and dated by the applicant:

1. Full legal name of applicant;

2. Business name of applicant (if different);

3. Business address of applicant;

4. Business telephone of applicant;

5. Location of proposed filming or taping;

6. Dates and times of proposed filming or taping;

7. List of all motor vehicles (by make, type and license number) of applicant, applicant’s agents or employees to be parked on city streets or parking lots during filming or taping;

8. Services of city employees desired or required on location during filming or taping;

98. Description of scene to be filmed or taped;
109. Name of person in charge on location;

11. Detailed site map indicating locations of major equipment and functional areas (filming, staging, base camp, generators, etc.); and
1210. Any other information as the city manager may deem necessary or desirable.

B. An original application submitted for processing and review may be amended or revised before the effective date of the permit. No such original application shall be amended or revised more than twice. Thereafter, a new application shall be filed and another original application fee shall be paid.

5.92.040 Motion Picture and Television Production—Permit—Charges for Use of City Property and Employees
A. A charge is imposed for the use or occupation of city-owned or controlled real property, including public streets, when the proposed use or occupation may be exclusive or otherwise disruptive of the free public use by either motor vehicles or pedestrians, or both, for the purposes designated in section 5.92.010. 221 of 325
88 d
3 2
8 4
B. A charge is imposed for the services of each city officer or employee, including public safety personnel, used for any purpose arising out of or connected with the issuance of a permit under section 5.92.010.

C. A charge is imposed for each inspection by fire division personnel of the location of the proposed filming or taping.

D. A charge is imposed for costs of overhead and administration incurred by the city.

E. A charge is imposed for each item of city-owned or controlled personal property and/or utilities, other than utilities paid for by private service users serviced by the city, used for any purpose arising out of or connected with the issuance of a permit under section 5.92.010. The amount of the charge, if not provided elsewhere in this code, shall be in accordance with a rate schedule to be approved by the City Manager.

F. Any charges imposed in this code are in addition to the permit application and investigation fee required by section 5.92.020(A). Before the City Manager or a designee issues the permit, the applicant shall make a minimum deposit. The minimum deposit shall be the amount of the permit application and investigation fee, together with a sum equal to the estimated total of all charges due or payable under this code for each calendar day for which the permit is in effect. For deposit purposes, each portion of a calendar day shall be counted as a full calendar day or as eight hours, whichever is applicable. Any unearned portion of the deposit shall be returned to the permittee after completion of the authorized activities for which the permit was issued. Any amount due the city in excess of the deposit shall be payable within ten days after receipt of an itemized statement of charges, less the amount of the deposit. The permit application and investigation fee shall be paid and collected at the time the application for the permit is filed. The minimum deposit need not be made until immediately before the permit is issued.

5.92.050 Motion Picture and Television Production—Permit—Conditions of Approval
A. It shall be a condition of the issuance and continued validity of any permit granted under section 5.92.010 that the permittee first take out, pay for and maintain a policy of general liability insurance. Insurance requirements prior to obtaining such permits shall be determined by the City Attorney.The policy shall insure the city, its agents, officers and employees against any liability, or claims of liability, brought or made by or on behalf of any person for property damage or personal injury, including accidental death, occurring during the period and as a result of the activities for which the permit was issued. The policy shall cover damages, injuries or losses caused by or arising out of: (1) any negligent act or omission of the permittee, the permittee’s agents, officers or employees, or of any agent, officer or employee of the city; and (2) the condition of any city-owned or controlled property, whether real or personal. The amount of coverage shall be not less than five hundred thousand dollars as a combined single limit; provided, however, that the city manager shall have authority to require higher limits if, in the city manager’s opinion and discretion, the type of activity permitted is of a nature that warrants greater risk protection. In addition, the policy shall contain a severability of interest clause and provide that the coverage shall be primary for losses 222 of 325
98 d
3 2
8 4
arising out of the permittee’s activities. Neither the city nor any of its insurers shall be required to contribute to any loss.

B. The permittee shall furnish a certificate of insurance countersigned by the insurance carrier on a form of the carrier setting forth the general provisions of the insurance coverage. This countersigned certificate, along with an additional insured endorsement, shall verify that the city, its agents, officers and employees are named as additional insureds under the policy, and further, that this insurance is primary to the coverage of the city. The certificate of insurance shall contain a statement of obligation on the part of the carrier to notify the city of any material change, cancellation or termination of the coverage at least thirty days in advance of the effective date of the change, cancellation or termination.

C. It shall be a condition of the issuance of any permit granted under section

5.92.010 that the permittee shall agree to defend and to hold the city, its agents, officers and employees harmless from any and all liability, claims and actions of any kind whatsoever resulting from or arising out of the city’s issuing the permit.

D. It may be a condition of the issuance of any permit granted under section

5.92.010, if in the City Manager’s opinion and discretion such condition is necessary or desirable in the city’s best interest, that the permittee be required to take out, apply for and maintain policies of insurance, such as auto or fire coverage, and/or faithful performance bonds, in coverage limits and/or penal sums as the City Manager may deem appropriate under the circumstances surrounding the activities permitted.

E. All documents required by section 5.92.030 and this subsection shall be completed by or on behalf of the permittee. All documents shall be reviewed and approved by the City Attorney before the permit is executed by the city manager.

5.92.060 Motion Picture and Television Production—Permit—Issuance or Denial The City Manager or a designee shall issue a permit as required by section

5.92.010 unless the city manager finds that any information or statement contained on the permit application form is untrue or that the public health, safety or welfare will be, or has been, adversely affected to a significant degree by any one or more of the following:

A. Anticipated or actual:

1. Land use contemplated,

2. Disruption or obstruction of traffic, parking or business,

3. Length of time required to conduct specified activity; B. Attitude of neighborhood;
C. Number of permits granted previously for specified location; D. Past performance of permittee in adhering to conditions.

5.92.070 Motion Picture and Television Production—Permit—Exceptions—Fees A. The application and investigation fee set forth in Section 5.92.020(A) and the per day charge set forth in Section 5.92.040(A) shall not be applicable to a public affairs program (as defined by the Federal Communications Commission) under the following circumstances:
223 of 325
108 d
3 2
8 4

1. When the proposed use or occupation is of a public street, provided that the use is not exclusive or otherwise disruptive of the free public use by motor vehicles, pedestrians or both;

2. When the proposed use is of city-owned or controlled real property other than public streets.

B. For nonprofit corporations, organizations or associations (as defined by Revenue and Taxation Code Sections 23701d and 23701(1)), public affairs programs (as defined by the Federal Communications Commission), and for students who are enrolled in a school, college or university (as defined by Business and Professions Code Section 18629) and who are filming or videotaping as part of a class project, any application fee, service charge, or transaction fee for the obtaining of a permit shall be discounted to no more than fifty percent (50%) of standard rates for such permit.the application and investigation fee set forth in Section 5.92.020(A) shall be established by resolution.

SECTION 5. The City Council finds and determines that this ordinance is not subject to the California Environmental Quality Act (“CEQA”) and, therefore, an environmental review is not required under Section 15060(c)(2) [the activity will not result in a direct or reasonably foreseeable indirect physical change in the environment]; Section 15060(c)(3) [the activity is not a project as defined in Section 15378]; and Section 15061(b)(3)[no possibility exists that the activity in question may have a significant effect on the environment] of the CEQA Guidelines, California Code of Regulations, Title 14, Chapter 3.

SECTION 6. Severability. This Ordinance’s provisions are severable. If any portion of this Ordinance or its application to any person or circumstance is held invalid or unconstitutional, that decision does not affect the validity of the Ordinance’s remaining portions and the Ordinance’s application to other persons and circumstances. The City Council declares that it would have passed the remainder of this Ordinance without the invalid or unconstitutional provision.

SECTION 7. Effective Date. This Ordinance shall take effect and be in force beginning on July 07, 2022.

Adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale on the _______ day of ________, 2022.

______________________________
Mayor
ATTEST:
___________________________________
City Clerk
224 of 325
118 d
3 2
8 4

STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES) SS.

CITY OF GLENDALE )
I, Aram Adjemian, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, hereby certify that the foregoing Ordinance was adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, at a regular meeting held on the _______ day of ________________, 2022, and that the same was adopted by the following vote:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:
____________________________
City Clerk
225 of 325
128 d
3 2
8 4
RESOLUTION NO. __________

A RESOLUTION OF THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE

REMOVING CERTAIN FEES IN THE CITYWIDE FEE SCHEDULE RELATED TO

FILM PERMITS

WHEREAS, Chapter 5.92 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, directs the activities related to Motion Picture and Television Production Permit operation of the City; WHEREAS, currently, Chapter 5.92 requires various fees, including application fees, that support the City’s issuance and oversight of motion picture and television production permits;
WHEREAS, the City desires to contract with a third-party consultant, FilmLA, to take over the work of application, issuance, and oversight of filming and film permits within the City;
WHEREAS, FilmLA has its own application and fee structure that will replace the currently-required City fees in this regard and free up the staff time and resources supported by those fees;
WHEREAS, Chapter 5.92 is concurrently being amended to remove the requirement for various fees based on these changes;
WHEREAS, the Council finds there is a need to modify the Citywide Fee Schedule to remove those fees related to film permits that will no longer be required by the Glendale Municipal Code;
WHEREAS, the contract with, and transition to services by, FilmLA will take place on July 1, 2022, and therefore the amendments to Chapter 5.92 and these changes to the Citywide Fee Schedule should occur that same day.

NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:

The Council hereby removes the following fees from the Citywide Fee Schedule in Chapter I – Miscellaneous Charges, Section 2: Filming & Special Event Fees:

1.Filming “No Parking” Signs

2.Filming Application Fee – Low Budget Filming

3.Filming Application Fee All Others

4.Filming Application Fee Amendment/Revision to Application

5.Filming Application Fee Student & Non-Profit Organization

226 of 325
138 d
3 2
8 4
Adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale on this _____ day of ________, 2022, to take effect on July 07, 2022.

Mayor

ATTEST:

________________________________
City Clerk

STATE OF CALIFORNIA )

COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES ) SS

CITY OF GLENDALE )

I, Aram Adjemian, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, certify that the foregoing Resolution No._______________ was adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, at a regular meeting held on the _____________ day of ______________, 2022, by the following vote:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:

227 of 325
148 d
3 2
8 4
________________________________
City Clerk
228 of 325
8d
ORDINANCE NO. ___________

AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA
AMENDING PORTIONS OF CHAPTER 5.92 OF THE GLENDALE MUNICIPAL CODE, 1995,

TO ALLOW FOR THIRD-PARTY ISSUANCE AND OVERSIGHT

WHEREAS, the City of Glendale requires a permit for a person to engage in the business or activity of filming within the City; and

WHEREAS, such permits have historically been applied for, issued by, and administered by the City Manager’s office; and

WHEREAS, the City has initiated plans to contract with a third-party consultant, beginning July 1, 2022, to take on much of the work of application, issuance, and oversight of filming and film permits within the City; and

WHEREAS, such third-party’s actions require some modification to provisions of Chapter 5.92 of the Glendale Municipal Code in regard to Motion Picture and Television Permits;

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA, DOES ORDAIN AS FOLLOWS:

SECTION 1. Recitals. The City Council finds that all of the facts, findings, and conclusions set forth above in this Ordinance are true and correct and hereby incorporate them by this reference.

SECTION 2. Chapter 5.92 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, entitled “Motion Picture and Television Production Permit,” is hereby amended to read as follows:

5.92.010 Motion Picture and Television Production
A. No person shall engage in the business or the activity of filming, taking or producing motion pictures for educational, entertainment or other commercial purposes, other than for news purposes, at any time and at any place other than at or in an established motion picture or television studio in the city and no person shall engage in such business or activity for such purposes, other than for news purposes, anywhere at any time if the services of city employees, or if the rental or other use of city-owned personal property and/or utilities, other than utilities paid for by private service users serviced by the city, is or are involved, unless a permit for such business or activity during such period of time has first been granted by the City Manager or a designee.

B. In no event shall such activities be performed or conducted in excess of the time period for which the permit provided for in subsection A of this section is issued.

5.92.020 Motion Picture and Television Production—Permit—Application—Form and Fees
A. No permit required by section 5.92.010 shall be issued until after: (1) the applicant has first completed, signed and dated an application for the permit on forms 229 of 325
2 5
8 8
3 provided by the City Manager or a designee; (2) the applicant has deposited with the City Manager or a designee a permit application and investigation fee; (3) the applicant has deposited with the City Manager or a designee all other sums of money and/or completed documents as may be required under this code.

B. The amount or rate of any permit, license, charge or other fee under this chapter shall be established and/or modified by resolution of the city council. The schedule for the fees shall remain on file and be available in the office of the city clerk.

The City Manager or a designee shall review the fees charged at least once annually and shall recommend changes to the council when appropriate.

5.92.030 Motion Picture and Television Production-Permit-Application Requirements
A. The City Manager or a designee shall prepare and supply a form for application for the permit required by section 5.92.010. The form shall require the following information and shall be signed and dated by the applicant:

1. Full legal name of applicant;

2. Business name of applicant (if different);

3. Business address of applicant;

4. Business telephone of applicant;

5. Location of proposed filming or taping;

6. Dates and times of proposed filming or taping;

7. List of all motor vehicles (by make, type and license number) of applicant, applicant’s agents or employees to be parked on city streets or parking lots during filming or taping;

8. Services of city employees desired or required on location during filming or taping;

98. Description of scene to be filmed or taped;
109. Name of person in charge on location;

11. Detailed site map indicating locations of major equipment and functional areas (filming, staging, base camp, generators, etc.); and
1210. Any other information as the city manager may deem necessary or desirable.

B. An original application submitted for processing and review may be amended or revised before the effective date of the permit. No such original application shall be amended or revised more than twice. Thereafter, a new application shall be filed and another original application fee shall be paid.

5.92.040 Motion Picture and Television Production—Permit—Charges for Use of City Property and Employees
A. A charge is imposed for the use or occupation of city-owned or controlled real property, including public streets, when the proposed use or occupation may be exclusive or otherwise disruptive of the free public use by either motor vehicles or pedestrians, or both, for the purposes designated in section 5.92.010. 230 of 325
3 5
8 8
3 B. A charge is imposed for the services of each city officer or employee, including public safety personnel, used for any purpose arising out of or connected with the issuance of a permit under section 5.92.010.

C. A charge is imposed for each inspection by fire division personnel of the location of the proposed filming or taping.

D. A charge is imposed for costs of overhead and administration incurred by the city.

E. A charge is imposed for each item of city-owned or controlled personal property and/or utilities, other than utilities paid for by private service users serviced by the city, used for any purpose arising out of or connected with the issuance of a permit under section 5.92.010. The amount of the charge, if not provided elsewhere in this code, shall be in accordance with a rate schedule to be approved by the City Manager.

F. Any charges imposed in this code are in addition to the permit application and investigation fee required by section 5.92.020(A). Before the City Manager or a designee issues the permit, the applicant shall make a minimum deposit. The minimum deposit shall be the amount of the permit application and investigation fee, together with a sum equal to the estimated total of all charges due or payable under this code for each calendar day for which the permit is in effect. For deposit purposes, each portion of a calendar day shall be counted as a full calendar day or as eight hours, whichever is applicable. Any unearned portion of the deposit shall be returned to the permittee after completion of the authorized activities for which the permit was issued. Any amount due the city in excess of the deposit shall be payable within ten days after receipt of an itemized statement of charges, less the amount of the deposit. The permit application and investigation fee shall be paid and collected at the time the application for the permit is filed. The minimum deposit need not be made until immediately before the permit is issued.

5.92.050 Motion Picture and Television Production—Permit—Conditions of Approval
A. It shall be a condition of the issuance and continued validity of any permit granted under section 5.92.010 that the permittee first take out, pay for and maintain a policy of general liability insurance. Insurance requirements prior to obtaining such permits shall be determined by the City Attorney.The policy shall insure the city, its agents, officers and employees against any liability, or claims of liability, brought or made by or on behalf of any person for property damage or personal injury, including accidental death, occurring during the period and as a result of the activities for which the permit was issued. The policy shall cover damages, injuries or losses caused by or arising out of: (1) any negligent act or omission of the permittee, the permittee’s agents, officers or employees, or of any agent, officer or employee of the city; and (2) the condition of any city-owned or controlled property, whether real or personal. The amount of coverage shall be not less than five hundred thousand dollars as a combined single limit; provided, however, that the city manager shall have authority to require higher limits if, in the city manager’s opinion and discretion, the type of activity permitted is of a nature that warrants greater risk protection. In addition, the policy shall contain a severability of interest clause and provide that the coverage shall be primary for losses 231 of 325
4 5
8 8
3 arising out of the permittee’s activities. Neither the city nor any of its insurers shall be required to contribute to any loss.

B. The permittee shall furnish a certificate of insurance countersigned by the insurance carrier on a form of the carrier setting forth the general provisions of the insurance coverage. This countersigned certificate, along with an additional insured endorsement, shall verify that the city, its agents, officers and employees are named as additional insureds under the policy, and further, that this insurance is primary to the coverage of the city. The certificate of insurance shall contain a statement of obligation on the part of the carrier to notify the city of any material change, cancellation or termination of the coverage at least thirty days in advance of the effective date of the change, cancellation or termination.

C. It shall be a condition of the issuance of any permit granted under section

5.92.010 that the permittee shall agree to defend and to hold the city, its agents, officers and employees harmless from any and all liability, claims and actions of any kind whatsoever resulting from or arising out of the city’s issuing the permit.

D. It may be a condition of the issuance of any permit granted under section

5.92.010, if in the City Manager’s opinion and discretion such condition is necessary or desirable in the city’s best interest, that the permittee be required to take out, apply for and maintain policies of insurance, such as auto or fire coverage, and/or faithful performance bonds, in coverage limits and/or penal sums as the City Manager may deem appropriate under the circumstances surrounding the activities permitted.

E. All documents required by section 5.92.030 and this subsection shall be completed by or on behalf of the permittee. All documents shall be reviewed and approved by the City Attorney before the permit is executed by the city manager.

5.92.060 Motion Picture and Television Production—Permit—Issuance or Denial The City Manager or a designee shall issue a permit as required by section

5.92.010 unless the city manager finds that any information or statement contained on the permit application form is untrue or that the public health, safety or welfare will be, or has been, adversely affected to a significant degree by any one or more of the following:

A. Anticipated or actual:

1. Land use contemplated,

2. Disruption or obstruction of traffic, parking or business,

3. Length of time required to conduct specified activity; B. Attitude of neighborhood;
C. Number of permits granted previously for specified location; D. Past performance of permittee in adhering to conditions.

5.92.070 Motion Picture and Television Production—Permit—Exceptions—Fees A. The application and investigation fee set forth in Section 5.92.020(A) and the per day charge set forth in Section 5.92.040(A) shall not be applicable to a public affairs program (as defined by the Federal Communications Commission) under the following circumstances:
232 of 325
5 5
8 8
3 1. When the proposed use or occupation is of a public street, provided that the use is not exclusive or otherwise disruptive of the free public use by motor vehicles, pedestrians or both;

2. When the proposed use is of city-owned or controlled real property other than public streets.

B. For nonprofit corporations, organizations or associations (as defined by Revenue and Taxation Code Sections 23701d and 23701(1)), public affairs programs (as defined by the Federal Communications Commission), and for students who are enrolled in a school, college or university (as defined by Business and Professions Code Section 18629) and who are filming or videotaping as part of a class project, any application fee, service charge, or transaction fee for the obtaining of a permit shall be discounted to no more than fifty percent (50%) of standard rates for such permit.the application and investigation fee set forth in Section 5.92.020(A) shall be established by resolution.

SECTION 5. The City Council finds and determines that this ordinance is not subject to the California Environmental Quality Act (“CEQA”) and, therefore, an environmental review is not required under Section 15060(c)(2) [the activity will not result in a direct or reasonably foreseeable indirect physical change in the environment]; Section 15060(c)(3) [the activity is not a project as defined in Section 15378]; and Section 15061(b)(3)[no possibility exists that the activity in question may have a significant effect on the environment] of the CEQA Guidelines, California Code of Regulations, Title 14, Chapter 3.

SECTION 6. Severability. This Ordinance’s provisions are severable. If any portion of this Ordinance or its application to any person or circumstance is held invalid or unconstitutional, that decision does not affect the validity of the Ordinance’s remaining portions and the Ordinance’s application to other persons and circumstances. The City Council declares that it would have passed the remainder of this Ordinance without the invalid or unconstitutional provision.

SECTION 7. Effective Date. This Ordinance shall take effect and be in force beginning on July 7, 2022.

Adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale on the _______ day of ________, 2022.

______________________________
Mayor
ATTEST:
___________________________________
City Clerk
233 of 325
6 5
8 8
3 STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES) SS.

CITY OF GLENDALE )
I, Aram Adjemian, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, hereby certify that the foregoing Ordinance was adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, at a regular meeting held on the _______ day of ________________, 2022, and that the same was adopted by the following vote:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:
____________________________
City Clerk
234 of 325
RESOLUTION NO. __________

A RESOLUTION OF THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE

REMOVING CERTAIN FEES IN THE CITYWIDE FEE SCHEDULE RELATED TO

FILM PERMITS
WHEREAS, Chapter 5.92 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, directs the activities related to Motion Picture and Television Production Permit operation of the City; WHEREAS, currently, Chapter 5.92 requires various fees, including application fees, that support the City’s issuance and oversight of motion picture and television production permits;
WHEREAS, the City desires to contract with a third-party consultant, FilmLA, to take over the work of application, issuance, and oversight of filming and film permits within the City;
WHEREAS, FilmLA has its own application and fee structure that will replace the currently-required City fees in this regard and free up the staff time and resources supported by those fees;
WHEREAS, Chapter 5.92 is concurrently being amended to remove the requirement for various fees based on these changes;
WHEREAS, the Council finds there is a need to modify the Citywide Fee Schedule to remove those fees related to film permits that will no longer be required by the Glendale Municipal Code;
WHEREAS, the contract with, and transition to services by, FilmLA will take place on July 7, 2022, and therefore the amendments to Chapter 5.92 and these changes to the Citywide Fee Schedule should occur that same day.

NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:

The Council hereby removes the following fees from the Citywide Fee Schedule in Chapter I – Miscellaneous Charges, Section 2: Filming & Special Event Fees:

1.Filming “No Parking” Signs

2.Filming Application Fee – Low Budget Filming

3.Filming Application Fee All Others

4.Filming Application Fee Amendment/Revision to Application

5.Filming Application Fee Student & Non-Profit Organization

235 of 325
2 5
8 8
4 Adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale on this _____ day of ________, 2022, to take effect on July 7, 2022.

Mayor

ATTEST:

________________________________
City Clerk

STATE OF CALIFORNIA )

COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES ) SS

CITY OF GLENDALE )

I, Aram Adjemian, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, certify that the foregoing Resolution No._______________ was adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, at a regular meeting held on the _____________ day of ______________, 2022, by the following vote:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:

________________________________
City Clerk
236 of 325
Exhibit A: FilmLA Service Area
237 of 325
9a

CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA

REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL

AGENDA ITEM
Public Hearing: Consideration of Ordinances Amending the Downtown Specific Plan (DSP) and Title 30 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, Regarding Miscellaneous Clean-Ups and Minor Amendments (General Plan Amendment Case No.

PGPA2205740 and Zoning Code Text Amendment Case No. PZC2205401)

1. Ordinance for Introduction Amending the Downtown Specific Plan (DSP)

2. Ordinance for Introduction Amending Title 30

COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Ordinance for Introduction
Approved for May 24, 2022 calendar

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Ordinances for Introduction regarding miscellaneous clean-ups and minor amendments to the DSP and associated Zoning Code standards related to the DSP. The majority of the code amendments were initiated by City Council in July 2020 as part of staff’s report on pertaining to a requested update of Downtown Specific Plan standards a year following adoption and miscellaneous proposed code clarifications and clean-ups. 238 of 325
29 a
3 2
6 9

COUNCIL PRIORITIES
N/A

RECOMMENDATION
That the City Council review the proposed amendments to the DSP and Title 30 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, and introduce the ordinances as recommended by the Planning Commission.

BACKGROUND
On March 26, 2019, City Council adopted two ordinances: an urgency ordinance to amend the DSP (PGPA 1901560) and an ordinance to amend GMC Chapter 30.32 (PZC 1901561) regarding hotel parking. The DSP amendments were in response to improvements that Council and the public wanted to see in the development pattern of Downtown Glendale. These improvements included, but were not limited to: improved design, better materials, more publicly accessible open space, improved streetscapes and public realm, a greater focus on objective standards in lieu of subjective guidelines, an enhanced Community Benefit System, and a greater diversity in housing unit mix. At the time of adoption, Council requested staff to return after one year to provide an update on the performance of the new DSP standards based on projects that were submitted under the new standards. Staff presented that one-year update to City Council on July 7, 2020.

As part of that one-year update, staff also presented a number of proposed clean-ups and clarifications that would reduce potential conflicts in the code and to address unique or special circumstances that exist. While tracking the necessary clean-ups and clarifications, staff had also identified opportunities for additional improvements, as listed in the July 7th, 2020 staff report. At that meeting, City Council directed staff to proceed with the proposed DSP clean-ups and a number of staff’s proposed considerations. Several of the considerations related to the Design Review process for DSP projects have already been present to and approved by City Council; on October 27, 2020, Council adopted amendments related to the Design Review Stages and Design Review Authority for DSP projects. With a hotel moratorium in place, staff is also proceeding with a hotel study, post-Covid, to evaluate whether the hotel use incentive was still relevant given recent developments of new hotels and necessary for the DSP.

Staff will also be returning to Council with more information on a few other, significant policy considerations, such as Transfer of Development Rights in the DSP.

At this time, staff is presenting the DSP clean-ups and clarifications for ordinance introduction, as recommended by the Planning Commission.

ANALYSIS
Below is a list of DSP proposed amendments, as identified in the July 17, 2020 staff report as necessary clean-ups and clarifications, and discussed during the City Council meeting of that date for introduction:
239 of 325
39 a
3 2
6 9
Clarifications and Clean-Ups
Building Heights & Floor Area ratios (DSP 4.1.2)
Allows for an additional 10-15 feet for elevators and stair shafts only, consistent with other Zoning Code chapters.

Tall Buildings (DSP 4.2.1)
Clarifies that this section applies to all developments greater than 95 feet in height.
Amends the building height for Taller Buildings to be 95 feet, not 85 feet (DSP

4.2.1.A).
Eliminates the reference to Chapter 30.33 for high-rise facades that is obsolete (DSP 4.2.1.D).
Identifies that the tower step-back only applies to sites with lots greater than 150’ in depth. This is on the premise that sites smaller than 150’ in depth will already provide the intended narrow tower façade (DSP 4.2.1.M).

Modulation of Height (DSP 4.2.2)
Clarifies that this section applies to all developments less than 95 feet in height. Identifies that projects incorporating a corner element to fulfill the height modulation requirement (DSP 4.2.2.3) shall comply with the standards set forth in DSP 4.2.12 Corners. Additional clarifications are included in the subsequent Corner section. As it currently reads, it would appear that the corner treatment is the only modulation of height option, instead of the multitude of options provided by the code.

Building Separation (DSP 4.2.4)
Clarifies that this section applies to all developments less than 95 feet in height. Correlates the text that identifies a required building separation for buildings greater than 200 feet in length with the image that identifies a 250-foot minimum length, making them consistent with a 250-foot threshold.

Transitional Massing (DSP 4.2.5)
Clarifies that the transitional massing requirements shall apply to DSP properties directly adjacent to multi-family zones.

Corners (DSP 4.2.12)
Clarifies that this section applies only when a project is utilizing a corner treatment for the required height modulation section.
Clarifies that the corner feature may be differentiated with a 10 feet height differential in either direction; the corner feature need not be greater than 10 feet in height above the building mass.

Balconies (DSP 4.2.14)
Modifies the current DSP standard that calls out that not more than 40% of the balconies may project past the building façade and that the maximum projection shall be 25% of the balcony’s full depth (DSP 4.2.14.A) to accommodate creative design solutions. The standard also identifies the minimum area and width for balconies, consistent with such standards in the other Zoning Code districts. 240 of 325
49 a
3 2
6 9
Corrected References
Correct the publicly accessible open space signage reference on Page 5-8, Section

5.4.1.B.5 from 7.2.4(E) (previous DSP version) to 7.3.1(E) (amended, current DSP).

Publicly Accessible Open Spaces and Drive-Through’s:

In addition to the above clean-ups and clarifications, Council also directed staff to amend the DSP to require covenants for publicly accessible open spaces (PAOS) and to prohibit drive-throughs in the DSP. The covenant amendment ensures that the PAOS areas continue to meet the intent and standards of the open space regulations in perpetuity. The prohibition of drive-throughs is based on the fact that a primary goal the DSP is to encourage walkable environments, while drive-throughs continue to encourage the use of automobiles and are in conflict with the pedestrian-oriented goals of the DSP. The requirement for publicly accessible open space covenants is addressed as an amendment to the DSP Section 4.1.4 Site Planning – Publicly Accessible Open Space, while the amendment prohibiting drive-throughs in the DSP is addressed in the Zoning Code GMC 30.32.090.H. Drive-Through Waiting Lane.

OTHER AMENDMENTS/CLARIFICATIONS
Staff recently came across two additional items for amendment consideration:
A proposed code amendment to the DSP Land Use Chart Table 3-A-1 to include veterinary offices; and
A clean-up regarding a reference to DSP setbacks in GMC 30.14.060 – Mixed Use Districts - DSP setback requirements and exceptions.

Currently, veterinary offices are not permitted by right in any of the DSP districts. The proposed amendment to allow veterinary offices in the DSP as a permitted land use would be consistent with other commercial and mixed-use district zoning. Note: Kennels are a separate land use and would still be prohibited in the DSP. Meanwhile, the proposed setback amendment would make the Zoning Code text consistent with the required setback requirements in the DSP’s Section 4.1.3 Building Setbacks.

PLANNING COMMISSION REVIEW
The proposed amendments were reviewed by the Planning Commission at a regularly scheduled meeting on May 4, 2022. The Planning Commission was supportive of the changes, and voted unanimously to recommend approval of the amendments to City Council.

STAKEHOLDERS/OUTREACH
Public notices consistent with state law and Glendale Municipal Code were provided for the proposed amendments.

FISCAL IMPACT
There is no fiscal impact associated with this report.
241 of 325
59 a
3 2
6 9

ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW (CEQA/NEPA)
The Project has been determined to be exempt from the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) under a Categorical Exemption, pursuant State CEQA Guidelines Section 15305 (Minor alterations in Land Use Limitations), because the Project consists of minor alterations in land use limitations in the DSP area, which has an average slope less than 20%, and which do not result in any changes in land uses generally permitted in the DSP or change the density. The majority of the amendments include the miscellaneous clean-ups and corresponding DSP reference reconciliations regarding design standards in the DSP. The additional minor amendments in the DSP, such as allowing stairwells and elevator shafts to exceed height standards, permitting veterinary offices, prohibiting drive-throughs, and requiring covenants for publicly accessible open space areas, are also considered minor alterations in land use limitations that would not result in significant environmental effects. The exceptions for stairwells and elevator shafts that exceed height limits would not impact the overall density or massing of buildings; medical offices uses are already permitted in the DSP, but not veterinary offices specifically, accordingly the addition of veterinary offices would be a complementary, office use that provides personal services for the residents and employees in the Downtown that is equivalent in impacts to the already permitted personal service and medical office uses in the DSP; the prohibition of drive-throughs would eliminate the conflict with the pedestrian-oriented goals and further the intent of the DSP standards to enhance the pedestrian experience while drive-thoughs would still be permitted in all other commercial, mixed-use and industrial zones throughout the city; and finally, a new requirement for recorded covenants to ensure publicly accessible open space are maintained as approved does not create any environmental impacts and is an appropriate means of guaranteeing such areas continue to meet the intent and standards of the open space regulations in perpetuity.

The Project has also been determined to be exempt from CEQA under Section 15061(b)(3) because the majority of the proposed amendments deal with clarifications and clean-ups to existing DSP design standards, and the minor additional amendments, as described above, do not affect the current development thresholds related to FAR, density and height, and do not have any potential for causing a significant effect on the environment.

CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE
This item is exempt from campaign disclosure requirements.

ALTERNATIVES
Alternative 1: Introduce the ordinances amending the DSP and associated sections in Title 30, as described in this report.

Alternative 2: Do not introduce the ordinances amending the DSP and Title 30, in which case the development standards and guidelines in the DSP and Title 30 will remain as is.
242 of 325
69 a
3 2
6 9
Alternative 3: Introduce the ordinances amending the DSP and Title 30, as described in this report, but with revisions.

Alternative 5: The City Council may consider any other alternative not proposed by staff.

ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:

Vilia Zemaitaitis, AICP, Principal Planner
Reviewed by:

Bradley Calvert, AICP, Assistant Director of Community Development Gillian van Muyden, Chief Assistant City Attorney
Approved by:

Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager

EXHIBITS / ATTACHMENTS

1. Planning Commission’s Recommendation Motion dated May 4, 2022 243 of 325
1 5
7 9
7 ORDINANCE NO. ________________

AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA, AMENDING

DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN (DSP), REGARDING CLARIFICATIONS TO

CERTAIN URBAN DESIGN STANDARDS, AN UPDATE TO THE LAND USE

CHART TO ALLOW VETERINARY OFFICES, AND AN AMENDMENT TO REQUIRE A COVENANT FOR PUBLICLY ACCESSIBLE OPEN SPACE (CASE NO.

PGPA2205740)
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:

SECTION 1. DSP Section 3.3 Land Uses & Permit Requirements - Land Use Chart Table 3-A-1 is hereby amended to include veterinary offices, as shown in Exhibit “A” attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference.

SECTION 2. DSP Chapter 4 – Urban Design, Sections 4.1.4 – Publicly Accessible Open Space, 4.1.2 – Building Heights & Floor Area Ratios, 4.2.1 – Tall Buildings, 4.2.2 – Modulation of Height, 4.2.4 – Building Separation, 4.2.5 – Transitional Massing, 4.2.12 – Corners, 4.2.14 – Balconies, are hereby amended, as shown in Exhibit “B” and incorporated herein by this reference.

SECTION 3. DSP Section 5.4.1 is hereby amended, as shown in Exhibit “C” and incorporated herein by this.

SECTION 4. Severability. This ordinance is adopted under the authority of the Charter of the City of Glendale and State law. If any section, subsection, clause or phrase is declared invalid or otherwise void by a court of competent jurisdiction, it shall not affect any remaining provision hereof. In this regard the City Council finds and declares that it would have adopted this measure notwithstanding any partial invalidity hereof.

SECTION 5. Development or tentative tract map applications which have been deemed complete, approved discretionary entitlements, or ministerial projects submitted to plan check prior to the adoption of this ordinance shall be reviewed under the zoning rules and regulations which were in effect on the day prior to adoption of this ordinance. The foregoing notwithstanding, any applicant may make a request in writing to the Director of Community Development that his or her application be reviewed under the zoning rules and regulations as amended by this ordinance.

Passed by the Council of the City of Glendale on the _______ day of ________, 2022. ______________________________
Mayor
Attest
___________________________________
City Clerk
244 of 325
2 5
7 9
7 STATE OF CALIFORNIA)
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES) SS.

CITY OF GLENDALE)
I, ARAM ADJEMIAN, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, California, certify that the foregoing Ordinance No. ______________ was passed by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, by a vote of four-fifths (4/5ths) of the members thereof, at a regular meeting held on the ________ day of __________, 2022 by the following vote:

Ayes:

Noes:

Absent:

Abstain:
____________________________
City Clerk
245 of 325
3-6 Amended by Reso No. 09-37; Ord No. 5726, 5777, 5819, 5865, 5923, 5943, 5958 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

3.3 LAND USES & PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
TABLE 3-A-1: Land Uses and Permit Requirements TABLE 3-B-1 Land Uses 1, 2 Permit Requirements by District 3
See Standards in GMC Section
Frontage
Req’mts4
Key to Permit Requirements
A = Administrative Use Permit
(see Chapter 30.49)
P = Permitted Use
C = Conditional Use Permit
(see Chapter 30.42)
T = Temporary Use
N = Use Not Allowed
Alex Theatre
Broadway Center
Civic Centers
East Broadway
Galleria
Gateway
Downtown “A & E”
Mid-Orange
Orange-Central
Transitional
Primary Frontage Streets
Entertainment Streets
Residential Streets
Accessory Buildings, Structures and Uses
Accessory buildings and structures
(associated with residential uses) P P P P P P P P P P - N N P Accessory dwelling unit (ADU), and/or
junior accessory dwelling unit (JADU)
on a lot developed with one residential
dwelling unit
P P N P P P P P P P 30.34.080 P P P
Accessory dwelling unit(s) (ADU),
and/or junior accessory dwelling unit
(JADU) on a lot developed with more
than one residential dwelling unit
P P N P P P P P P P 30.34.080 P P P
Accessory uses P P P P P P P P P P - N N P
Antennas (pole type) and flagpoles N P P P P P P P P P - N N N Carts (freestanding, non-motorized
portable type) P P P P P P P P P P 30.34.040 P P P
Dish antennas P P P P P P P P P P 30.34.050 N N N
Home occupation P P N P P P P P P P 30.45 N N P
Home-sharing P P P P P P P P P P 5.110 N N P
Signs P P P P P P P P P P 30.33 P P P
Solar Energy Equipment P P P P P P P P P P - P P P
Education, Public Assembly Uses
Convention Centers P P P N P P P P N N - N P C
Cultural Arts Centers P P P P P P P P P P - P P P
Gyms and health clubs P P N C P P P P P C - N P P
Gyms and health clubs
(existing prior to June 1, 2003) P P N P P P P P P P - P P P Indoor recreation centers P P N C P P P P P C - N P P
Museums P P P P P P P P P P - P P P
Places of worship P P N C P P P P P C - N N P
Places of worship
(existing prior to June 1, 2003) P P N P P P P P P P - P P P Private clubs and lodges P P N C P P P P P C - N P C
Public dances P P P P P P P P P P - P P P
Schools, physical instruction P P N P P P P P P P - N P P Schools, private P P N C P P P P P C - N N P
Schools, private specialized
education / training P P N N P P P P P N - N C P
Theaters P P P N P P P P N N - N P N
See Table 3-A- 2, page 3-7 for Footnotes

EXHIBIT A
246 of 325
3-7 Amended by Reso No. 09-37; Ord No. 5726, 5777, 5819, 5865, 5923, 5943, 5958 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

TABLE 3-A-2: Land Uses and Permit Requirements TABLE 3-B-2 Land Uses 1, 2 Permit Requirements by District 3

See Standards in GMC Section
Frontage
Req’mts4
Key to Permit Requirements
A = Administrative Use Permit
(see Chapter 30.49)
P = Permitted Use
C = Conditional Use Permit
(see Chapter 30.42)
T = Temporary Use
N = Use Not Allowed
Alex Theatre
Broadway Center
Civic Centers
East Broadway
Galleria
Gateway
Downtown “A & E”
Mid-Orange
Orange-Central
Transitional
Primary Frontage Streets
Entertainment Streets
Residential Streets
Industrial, Manufacturing, Processing Uses
Broadcasting studios and indoor
support facilities - production P P N N P P P P P P - N N N Soundstages - production P P N N P P P P P P - N N N
Recreation
Adult Business Uses P P N N P P P P P N 30.34.010 P P P Billiard establishment P P N N P P P P P N 30.34.015 N P N Nightclubs P P N N C C P C C N 30.34.015 N P C
Taverns P P N N C A P A A C 30.34.015 P P C
Residential Uses 5
Domestic violence shelter P P N P P P P P P P - N N P
Live/work units P P N P P P P P P P 30.34.090 N N P
Live / work units with conditionally
permitted uses C C N C C C C C C C 30.34.090 N N C
Mixed Use Development, provided
that all uses are permitted in zone
which the project is located

P

P

N

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

30.34.100

P

P

P
Mixed Use Development, where at
least one use is conditionally permit-
ted

C

C

N

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

30.34.100

C

C

C
Multiple residential dwelling units P P N P P P P P P P - N N P Residential congregate living, Limited C C N C C C C C C C - N N C Residential congregate living,
Non-Medical P P N P P P P P P P - N N P
Senior Housing P P N P P P P P P P - N N P
1 See Glendale Municipal Code Section 30.03.010 regarding uses not listed 2 See Glendale Municipal Code Chapter 30.70 for definitions of the land uses 3 Uses in the Town Center District are subject to the Town Center Specific Plan 4 Frontage Requirements apply only to the first 25 feet of lot depth of the ground floor for those streets designated with Ground Floor Uses on the Land Use Map ( Figure 3-A)
5 Minimum unit size is 540 square feet (for senior or affordable units), 600 square feet (for efficiency and one bedroom units), 800 square feet (for two bedroom units), 1000 square feet (for three-bedroom units) with 90 cubic feet of private storage space(for all units). Projects must comply with Diverse Housing Mix percentages, unit sizes and development standards identified in Chapter 7.3.2. 247 of 325
3-8 Amended by Reso No. 09-37; Ord No. 5726, 5777, 5819, 5865, 5923, 5943, 5958 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

3.3 LAND USES & PERMIT REQUIREMENTS (cont’d)

TABLE 3-A-3: Land Uses and Permit Requirements TABLE 3-B-3 Land Uses 1, 2 Permit Requirements by District 3

See Standards in GMC Section
Frontage
Req’mts 4
Key to Permit Requirements
A = Administrative Use Permit
(see Chapter 30.49)
P = Permitted Use
C = Conditional Use Permit
(see Chapter 30.42)
T = Temporary Use
N = Use Not Allowed
Alex Theatre
Broadway Center
Civic Centers
East Broadway
Galleria
Gateway
Downtown “A & E”
Mid-Orange
Orange-Central
Transitional
Primary Frontage Streets
Entertainment Streets
Residential Streets
Retail Uses
Alcoholic beverage sales A A A A A A A A A A - A A A
Alcoholic beverage sales, in Alex
Theatre, Broadway Center, Art &
Entertainment districts only

w/ Billiard Establishments P P P 30.34.015 N P N w/ Indoor Recreation Centers P 30.34.015 N P N w/ Nightclubs P P P 30.34.015 N P N
w/ Restaurant, full service P P P 30.34.015 P P P w/ Taverns P P P 30.34.015 P P N
w/ Theaters P P P 30.34.015 P P N
Banquet halls C C N N C C C C C N - N C C
Christmas tree sales lots, when
maintained between Nov 1 - Jan 9 T T T T T T T T T T 5.44 T T T Firearms, weapons sales P P N P P P P P P P - N N P
Hardware Stores P P N P P P P P P P - N N P
Jewelry Stores P P N P P P P P P P - P P P
Liquor stores A A N A A A A A A A - A A A
Nurseries and garden supplies P P N P P P P P P P - N N P Paint and wallpaper stores P P N N P P P P P P - N N P
Paint and wallpaper stores, existing
prior to June 1, 2003 P P N P P P P P P P - P P P
Pharmacy P P N P P P P P P P - P P P
Pumpkin sales lots, when maintained
between Oct 15 and Nov 1 T T T T T T T T T T 5.44 T T T Restaurant, counter service w/
limited seating P P N P P P P P P P - P P P
Restaurant, fast food P P N P P P P P P P - P P P
Restaurant, full service P P N P P P P P P P - P P P
Retail stores, general merchandise P P N P P P P P P P - P P P Spas and swimming pools, sales and
service P P N P P P P P P P - N N P
Supermarkets P P N P P P P P P P - C N P
See Table 3-A- 4, page 3-9 for Footnotes
248 of 325
3-9 Amended by Reso No. 09-37; Ord No. 5293, 5726, 5746, 5865, 5869, 5923, 5943, 5958 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

TABLE 3-A-4: Land Uses and Permit Requirements TABLE 3-B-4 Land Uses 1, 2 Permit Requirements by District 3

See Standards in GMC Section
Frontage
Req’mts 4
Key to Permit Requirements

A = Administrative Use Permit
(see Chapter 30.49)
P = Permitted Use
C = Conditional Use Permit
(see Chapter 30.42)
T = Temporary Use
N = Use Not Allowed
W = Wireless Telecommunications
Facilities Permit (see Chapter 30.48)
Alex Theatre
Broadway Center
Civic Centers
East Broadway
Galleria
Gateway
Downtown “A & E”
Mid-Orange
Orange-Central
Transitional
Primary Frontage Streets
Entertainment Streets
Residential Streets
Service, Office Uses
Banks and financial institutions P P N P P P P P P P - P P P Business support services P P N P P P P P P P - N N P
Contractor’s office and / or storage T T T T T T T T T T - T T T Day care centers A A N A A A A A A A - N N A
Hotels and Motels P P N P P P P P P P - P P P
Massage establishment C C N C C C C C C C Chapter 5.64 N N C Medical and dental laboratories P P N N P P P P P N - N N P Medical and dental offices P P N P P P P P P P - N N P
Offices P P N P P P P P P P - N N P
Personal services P P N P P P P P P P - P P P
Pet grooming P P N P P P P P P P - N N P
Repair and maintenance,
consumer products P P N P P P P P P P - N N P
Veterinary offices P P N P P P P P P P N N P
Transportation, Communication Uses
Non-emergency heliports C C C N C C C C C N - N N N
Parking lot / structure facilities P P P N P P P P P N 30.34.120 N N P Utility and transmission facilities C C C C C C C C C C - N N N Wireless telecommunications facilities W W W W W W W W W W 30.48 N N N 1 See Glendale Municipal Code Section 30.03.010 regarding uses not listed 2 See Glendale Municipal Code Chapter 30.70 for definitions of the land uses 3 Uses in the Town Center District are subject to the Town Center Specific Plan 4 Frontage Requirements apply only to the first 25 feet of lot depth of the ground floor for those streets designated with Ground Floor Uses on the Land Use Map ( Figure 3-A)
249 of 325
3-10 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

250 of 325
4-1 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

URBAN DESIGN
4 Downtown Glendale has evolved in the last 50 years from a suburban main street to an urban center with a skyline. The skyline is only a part of Downtown’s urban design quality.

Distinctive districts, streets and places make Downtown a diverse and interesting destination. The urban design concepts build on the best of these characteristics while demonstrating how new development can contribute to
the desired scale, image, and pedestrian -friendliness of Downtown. This chapter includes key urban design policies and development standards that describe how new
development will support the community’s image and the
City’s vision of sustainability for Downtown.

EXHIBIT B
251 of 325
4-2 Amended by Ord. No. 5865, 5923 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN A. URBAN DESIGN POLICIES

4.0.1 Downtown Character and Image
New development shall enhance the overall image of the Downtown as an enticing destination for visitors and Glendale residents.

Development should reflect the pattern of uses, height, and density envisioned by the DSP, as discussed in Chapter Two for each Downtown district.

4.0.2 Context Sensitive Design
New development shall be sensitive to existing patterns and character in Downtown. Where strong existing patterns of height, scale or use are established, new development should reinforce these patterns.

4.0.3 Historic Preservation, Rehabilitation and Adaptive Reuse Reuse and rehabilitate the existing buildings of architectural merit that reflect the spirit and historic significance of Glendale’s past and ensure that these buildings will have their place in the standards for new development.

4.0.4 Views
Protect and enhance significant public views of the Verdugo Mountains, public streets, spaces, and significant architecture, including the Alex Theater and other distinctive buildings.

4.0.5 Gateways and Entries
Use sensitive design to acknowledge or highlight the sense of entry to and/or definition of Downtown.

4.0.6 Edges and Transitions
Be sensitive to the transition between various Downtown districts and the residential neighborhoods immediately surrounding Downtown.

Heights of buildings should step down toward the predominantly 1- to 3-story development of surrounding neighborhoods, particularly

in the transitional blocks at the edge of the Downtown Specific Plan area.
252 of 325
4-3 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.0.7 Taller Buildings and Skyline
Create an attractive and striking skyline for the City. Taller buildings shall be concentrated within the Gateway District of the downtown, with a second, lower high- rise “hill” to the west of the existing office high-rise at Brand and Broadway. Slender residential towers may be permitted between Cent ral and Brand linking these two “hills” in return for substantial public open space or other Community Benefit.

4.0.8 Building Heights and Downtown District Character
Building heights in Downtown should be regulated to create transitions from lower density neighborhoods surrounding Downtown, and to provide a consistent scale within various Downtown districts. While Community Benefit may permit
maximum building heights or allowable FAR, they should not produce buildings which are out of character with the sur rounding neighborhoods unless the building fulfills the goals of the individual Downtown district.

4.0.9 Pedestrian and Open Space Network
New development shall enhance pedestrian activity by improving the physical attractiveness of the street and providing places for relaxation, shopping, living, and dining. The pedestrian experience is enhanced through the pedestrian framework of streets and open spaces (e.g., parks, plazas, paseos, and courtyards) that shape the pedestrian experience in Downtown and reinforce the distinct street typology.

4.0.10 Open Space
Use open space strategically to enhance and protect significant public views of the mountains and create a continuum of public and private open spaces in Downtown.

253 of 325
4-4 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN
B. URBAN DESIGN STANDARDS
The urban design standards are measurable criteria
that have been developed to implement the

4.1 Existing context, building envelope, and
the public realm.
urban design policies. These standards for urban
design reflect the type of site planning, form, and
orientation required for buildings in the eleven
downtown districts as well as criteria for street
edge conditions.

C. URBAN DESIGN FRAMEWORK
The Urban Design Framework describes the physical
vision of the downtown, and establishes the basis
for all subsequent design standards. It consists of
three main sections, each described individually:

4.1 SITE PLANNING
• Historic Preservation/Adaptive Reuse
• Building Heights & Floor Area Ratios
• Building Setbacks
• Publicly Accessible Open Space
(details in Chapter 5)

4.2 BUILDING DESIGN
• Massing and Scale
• Transitional Massing
• Facade Modulation
• Architectural Elements

4.3 THE PEDESTRIAN REALM
• Streetscape Character & Typologies

Applied to a particular site in a linear fashion, the
Urban Design standards will give physical form to a
development project, as illustrated opposite.

Identify historic resources to be preserved or
structures to be reused (Section 4.1.1).

Identify maximum building height
(Section 4.1.2).

Determine maximum building FAR and massing
(Section 4.1.2).

Apply publicly accessible open space and set-
back standards (Section 4.1.3 & 4.1.4).
1 2
3 4
254 of 325
4-5 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN
Articulation, modulation, materials, and
public realm interface.

4.3 Identify and apply elements of
appropriate street typology.

Apply transitional massing standards
(Section 4.2.5).

Apply building massing & modulation standards
(Section 4.2.2, 4.2.3, and 4.2.4).

Apply building frontage, facade, and material
standards (Section 4.2.7 through 4.2.23).

Apply streetscape standards and typology
(Section 4.3).

4.2 5
6 7
8 255 of 325
4-6 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

256 of 325
4-7 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

Several elements influence site layout and the overall
massing of a project. This section of Chapter 4
identifies the standards of these elements that
inform how a site should be planned and how the
building volume and massing should be developed.

URBAN DESIGN FRAMEWORK:

4.1 SITE PLANNING

4.1.1 Historic Preservation/Adaptive Reuse

4.1.2 Building Heights & Floor Area Ratios

4.1.3 Building Setbacks

4.1.4 Publicly Accessible Open Space
257 of 325
4-8 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.1 SITE PLANNING

4.1.1 HISTORIC PRESERVATION / ADAPTIVE REUSE
Glendale’s older buildings are an important part of the streetscapes, contributing to the distinctive character of Downtown. Some of these are historically significant while others reflect good design practices and stylistic trends over many decades. Preservation of these assets as stand -alone projects or as part of larger development sites creates a complex and visually interesting urban fabric that expresses and retains Glendale’s identity. Historic resources (as defined in GMC Chapter 15.20) are expected to keep their existing exterior envelopes and character -defining features, though their rehabilitation for new or enhanced uses, which could include adjacent new construction, is encouraged. Reusing older, non -historic buildings is also encouraged to let our built heritage continue to tell the story of Glendale. Owners of these types of buildings can qualify for public benefit contributions as described in Chapter Seven and will comply with the following:

STANDARDS
A. Rehabilitation of historic resources, including
related adjacent new construction, shall
conform to the Secretary of the Interior’s
Standards for Rehabilitation.

B. Reuse of older buildings that are not historic
resources shall be distinguished from new
construction and shall be defined as the
reuse of the structure’s most distinguishing
architectural features and maintaining at least
50% of the exterior walls and roof of the
existing structu re.

C. High-quality materials shall be used in the reuse
of existing building exteriors in such a way
that the exterior of the building is physically
improved and that the building complements
surrounding structures. All elevations of the
building should be t reated in a consistent
manner.

D. Visual access to the interiors of buildings should
be provided.

E. Unarticulated building walls in non- historic
buildings should be enhanced to mitigate their
undesirable appearance and to create visual
interest. Windows, lighting, artwork, building
materials, and other facade improvements
should be considered in achievin g appropriate
architecture.

ABOVE: Security Trust a & Savings Bank, circa 1924 -
Glendale’s first six-story building. Located at Brand & Broadway on the site of the Glendale Depot of the Los
Angeles Interurban Railway (the Pacific Electric “Red
Cars”).

LEFT: The former Masonic
Temple Building built in
1928 is listed on the
Glendale Register of Historic
Resources.

BELOW: In 2016, a full
restoration and adaptive
reuse of the structure was
completed.

258 of 325
Amended by Ord. No. 5815, 5865, 5923 4-9 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

FIGURE 4-A

HISTORIC STRUCTURES
259 of 325

4.1 SITE PLANNING

4.1.2 BUILDING HEIGHTS & FLOOR AREA RATIOS
Each Downtown district has height and floor area criteria. In the DSP, development density is defined by the Floor Area Ratio (FAR). Provided the urban design standards are met, the maximum by -right height and FAR allowed for each district may be built. A Community Benefits program has been included as part of the DSP that allows for additional height or floor area for qualified projects providing the community benefits identified as priorities to the City’s vision. Projects participating in the Community Benefits program that provide additional public benefits, such as additional publicly access ible open space, greater diversity in housing mix, mobility improvements and public art on -site, may qualify for additional development potential up to the maximum, as discussed in Chapter 7 – Community Benefits.

Alex Theater Area A2

Alex Theater Area B
Broadway Center Area A

Broadway Center Area B
Broadway Center Area C

Civic Centers 3

East Broadway

Galleria
Gateway
Downtown Art & Entertainment
Mid-Orange

Orange Central

Town Center 4

Transitional
Maximum Height / FAR by Right
HEIGHT IN FEET 1 6 35’ 65’ 95’ 185’ 245’ N/A 65’ 80’ 275’ 65’ 65’ 95’ TCSP 65’ PERMITTED FAR 5 2.00 2.00 3.00 5.20 7.00 N/A 2.00` 2.75 7.25 2.00 2.00 3.00 TCSP 2.00 Maximum Height / FAR with Community Benefit
HEIGHT IN FEET 1 6 50’ 95’ 245’ 245’ 305’ N/A 80’ 95’ 380’ 95’ 95’ 245’ TCSP 95’ MAXIMUM FAR 2.25 3.00 5.20 7.00 7.50 N/A 2.75 3.00 7.50 3.00 3.00 5.20 TCSP 3.00 TABLE 4-A: Height / FAR Limits by District

1 For exceptions to height limits for wireless telecommunications facilities, see Chapter 30.48 of the Zoning Code. 2 Properties two lots north and south of the Alex Theater are limited to a maximum of 35 feet. Those parcels on the east side of Brand Boulevard and on the west side of Brand, north of California are limited to a maximum of 50 feet.
3 Civic Centers, as sites for public facilities, are subject to civic planning efforts and public review of proposed projects, rather than Height and FAR Standards.
4 Subject to Town Center Specific Plan (TCSP).
5 FAR, or Floor Area Ratio, is a common measure of building mass, expressed as a ratio of building area to land area. For example: a 20,000 sq ft parcel assigned a FAR of 1.0 may accommodate a maximum of 20,000 sq ft of building floor area, as a 1-story building with 100% lot coverage or a 2-story building with 50% lot coverage, or a 5-story building with 20% lot coverage, or other ratio consistent with the FAR and height standards for the district. Notwithstanding Glendale Municipal Code Chapter 30.70 (Definitions), above grade parking shall not be counted towards FAR if the parking is screened or “wrapped” by active uses such as office, retail, residential or other habitable space on facades fronting public streets, paseos or parks.

6. Enclosed or screened rooftop equipment not exceeding five (5) feet in height above the roof of a building shall not be computed as part of the height of the building. Elevator shafts and roof top stairwells not exceeding fifteen (15) feet in height above the roof of a building shall not be computed as part of the height of the building. See Chapter 30.70 (Definitions).

4-10 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN Amended by Reso. No. 09-37; Ord. No. 5293, 5746, 5777, 5865, 5923 260 of 325
Amended by Reso. No. 09-37; Ord. No. 5738, 5776, 5815, 5923 4-11 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

2 flrs (35’) / 2.00 FAR
3 flrs (50’) / 2.25 FAR (w/ incentives)
4 flrs (65’) / 2.50 FAR
5 flrs (80’) / 2.75 FAR (w/ incentives)
4 flrs (65’) / 2.50 FAR
6 flrs (95’) / 3.00 FAR (w/ incentives)
5 flrs (80’) / 2.75 FAR
6 flrs (95’) / 3.00 FAR (w/ incentives)
6 flrs (95’) / 3.00 FAR
12 flrs (185’) / 5.20 FAR (w/ incentives)
12 flrs (185’) / 5.20 FAR
16 flrs (245’) / 7.00 FAR (w/ incentives)
16 flrs (245’) / 7.00 FAR
20 flrs (305’) / 7.50 FAR (w/ incentives)
18 flrs (275’) / 7.25 FAR
25 flrs (380’) / 7.50 FAR (w/ incentives)
FIGURE 4-B

HEIGHT / FAR LIMITS
BRAND

ARDEN

FIGURE 4-B

0 150

300
N

600ft

HEIGHT / F AR LIMITS

BURCHETT

SR-134 FREEWAY

GATEWAY

MONTEREY

35’ / 2.00 FAR
50’ / 2.25 FAR (w/public benefit)
65’ / 2.00 FAR
80’ / 2.75 FAR (w/public benefit)
65’ / 2.00 FAR
95’ / 3.00 FAR (w/public benefit)
80’ / 2.75 FAR
95’ / 3.00 FAR (w/public benefit)
95’ / 3.00 FAR
245’ / 5.20 FAR (w/public benefit)
185’ / 5.20 FAR
245’ / 7.00 FAR (w/public benefit)
245’ / 7.00 FAR
305’ / 7.50 FAR (w/public benefit)
275’ / 7.25 FAR
380’ / 7.50 FAR (w/public benefit)

Refer to Table 4-A for additional information

ORANGE

CENTRAL

LEXINGTON

MYRTLE

CALIFORNIA

SALEM

MID-
ORANGE

ALEX

THEATRE
B
ALEX

THEATRE
A

TRANSITIONAL

CIVIC
CENTER

WILSON

TRANSITIONAL

B’WAY
CTR
A

B’WAY
CTR
B

B’WAY
CTR
C

MARYLAND

CIVIC CENTER

BROADWAY

GALLERIA

TOWN
CENTER

CIVIC CENTER

EAST BROADWAY

HARVARD

TRANSITIONAL

ELK

ORANGE GROVE

COLORADO

COLUMBUS

CENTRAL
ORANGE

MARYLAND
LOUISE

KENWOOD

JACKSON
ISABEL

PIONEER
DORAN
DORAN
261 of 325
4-12 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.1 SITE PLANNING

4.1.3 BUILDING SETBACKS
Downtown’s image, comfort, and experience are largely determined by the proportions of the pedestrian environment, or setback. They establish a sense of enclosure and well-defined pedestrian zones that support commercial activity, vegetation, and social interaction while providing comfort and protection from vehicle traffic. Creating a comfo rtable and inviting pedestrian environment is essential to promote other means of transportation such as walking, and this experience is directly influenced by the relationship to adjacent buildings, sidewalk width, provision of vegetation, and urban amenities. New projects shall provide setbacks measured from the face of curb that comply with the following (see Chapter 4.3 for design standards):

STANDARDS
A. Overall Setbacks: There shall be a minimum
setback on the ground floor from the face
of curb to the building frontage on public
streets for all new projects (excluding alleys) as
specified in Table 4- B.

1. The setback shall include both public right-
of-way and private property, depending
on the existing curb -to-property line
dimensions.

2. Building projections above the ground floor
shall not extend into the public right-of way
or required sidewalk, and must comply with
the design requirements specified in section

4.3. B. Parkways: There shall be a minimum parkway
width measured from face of curb, as specified
in Table 4-B
C. Sidewalks: Critical for pedestrian movement and
access, sidewalks not only enhance connectivity
and promote walkability, but also serve as
public spaces to activate streets socially and
economically.

1. Width: Where the sidewalk width
requirement exceeds the width of the
public right-of-way, as noted in Table 4 -B,
the development must provide a setback
to achieve the required width. If additional
area is required on private property to
satisfy the minimum requirement, an
easement shall be required.

2. Accessibility: The required sidewalk width as
defined in Table 4 -B shall remain clear of all
obstructions.

D. Building Adjacent Zone: This area exists
between the sidewalk and the building facade
as specified in Table 4-B, and shall be used
for landscaping, seating, and other uses and
services as allowed by the DSP.

ABOVE: Sidewalks must allow pedestrians to move
through a clear walking zone. Street trees and other
amenities are permitted in the parkway along the curb.

A building adjacent zone for dining, seating or planter boxes can be accommodated against the building frontage where minimum sidewalk width has been achieved.

ABOVE: Creative parkway & sidewalk design is encouraged to create a unique and inspiring pedestrian environment. 262 of 325
Amended by Ord. No. 5726, 5865, 5923 4-13 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

FRONTAGE
TOTAL

SETBACK
WIDTH

PARKWAY

SIDEWALK
Building
Adjacent
Zone
(Average)
Primary See Brand Boulevard Streetscape Plan
Mixed-Use*
Commercial

18 ft

5 ft

10 ft minimum

3 ft
Mixed-Use
Residential 16 ft 5 ft 8 ft minimum 3 ft
Residential 15 ft 4 ft 6 ft minimum 5 ft
Entertainment See Downtown Art & Entertainment District Plan Undesignated 4 ft 6 ft minimum
TABLE 4-B: Additional Street Setback Requirements & Restrictions See Section 4.3 The Pedestrian Realm: Street Typologies for complete Standards by street type.

See Figure 4-C for Setback / Frontage Designations
* See Section 4.3.2.L for Frontage Streets.

263 of 325
4-14 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN Amended by Ord. No. 5727, 5776, 5815, 5865, 5923

4.1 SITE PLANNING

FIGURE 4-C

SETBACKS / FRONTAGES

Primary - See Brand Boulevard Plan
Mixed-Use Commercial
Mixed-Frontage

Mixed-Use Residential
Residential
Entertainment - See “A & E” Plan

* Undesignated Streets shall provide a
minimum 4-foot wide parkway and
6-foot wide sidewalk
264 of 325
4-15 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.1.4 PUBLICLY ACCESSIBLE OPEN SPACE
Open space in an urban environment is essential to quality of life and to offer respite from the urban environment. Courtyards, plazas, and paseos create opportunities for gathering, events, and social engagement; and also encourages a vibrant street life. A robust network of open space integrated with the public right-of- way and other parks offers a variety of spaces to satisfy the needs and interests of a diverse urban population.

All publicly accessible open space shall conform to the following standards (see Chapter 5 for design details):

STANDARDS
A. Publicly accessible open space shall make up the
minimum amount and dimensions as defined
in Chapter 5, Table 5- A. Any project that
seeks to develop beyond the by-right FAR and
pursue the maximum development potential
(Table 4-A) shall refer to Chapter 7, Table 7-A
for additionally required amount of publicly
accessible open space.

B. Publicly accessible open space shall comply with
the detailed standards outlined in Chapter 5.

C. All required publicly accessible open space shall
be 100% open to the sky, except as defined in
Chapter 5.

D. Publicly accessible open space shall be oriented
to the street on at least one side, and accessible
from the public right -of-way.

E. Applicants will be required to enter into a
statutory development agreement or covenant
with the City, specifying that that any required
publicly accessible open space area shall comply
with the intent and standards of the open space
regulations.

ABOVE: Flexible spaces for gathering, as well as urban
amenities such as pavilions can be attractive spaces for a diverse range of uses.

ABOVE: High quality materials, programmable spaces, and unique design can create an attractive and unique publicly accessible open space.

10%
Residential
Open
Space

10%
Publicly
Accessible
Open Space

ABOVE: Courtyard publicly accessible open space can
minimize massing scale while creating an intimate sense of enclosure.

ABOVE: Corner publicly accessible open space can create a sense of arrival and acknowledge important intersections.

265 of 325
266 of 325
4-17 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

Building design influences the perception of mass, the
overall aesthetic quality, visual interest, and a
building’s relationship to the public realm. This
section of Chapter 4 defines the elements that are
most important in creating a visually stunning urban
environment and a unique pedestrian experience.

URBAN DESIGN FRAMEWORK:

4.2 BUILDING DESIGN

4.2.1 Massing & Scale: Tall Buildings

4.2.2 Massing & Scale: Modulation of Height

4.2.3 Massing & Scale: Facade Modulation

4.2.4 Massing & Scale: Building Separations

4.2.5 Massing & Scale: Transitional Massing

4.2.6 Massing & Scale: Landmark Architectural Features

4.2.7 Facade Design

4.2.8 Architectural Elements: Materials

4.2.9 Architectural Elements: Storefronts

4.2.10 Architectural Elements: Building Entries & Lobbies

4.2.11 Architectural Elements: Stoops & Ground Level Entries

4.2.12 Architectural Elements: Corners

4.2.13 Architectural Elements: Canopies

4.2.14 Architectural Elements: Balconies

4.2.15 Architectural Elements: Fenestration

4.2.16 Architectural Elements: Fences, Walls & Gates

4.2.17 Architectural Elements: Planters

4.2.18 Architectural Elements: Arcades

4.2.19 Architectural Elements: Porte-Cocheres

4.2.20 Architectural Elements: Garage Entries

4.2.21 Architectural Elements: Utilities

4.2.22 Architectural Elements: Lighting

4.2.23 Architectural Elements: Signage
267 of 325
4-18 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2 Building Design

4.2.1 MASSING & SCALE: TALL BUILDINGS
High-rise buildings can create a dynamic and visually interesting skyline. Well -designed taller buildings can also create civic pride and serve as a landmark in the urban fabric. Additionally, taller and narrower buildings can create opportunities for additional open space at the street level.

This section applies to all developments greater than 95 feet in height.

STANDARDS
A. Buildings above 85 95 feet shall be tall,
slender towers which enhance the skyline
without blocking significant views from other
buildings.

B. The bulk of buildings shall be reduced
through the articulation of building massing
and building facades.

C. Building floorplates above a 200 -foot height
shall be reduced in area by 15%.

D. High-rise facades (as defined in Chapter 30.33
of the Zoning Code) shall provide a substantial
modulation or change of materials every 150
feet in length.

E. View opportunities shall be integrated into the
massing of new development at appropriate
locations.

F. Lighting shall be designed to consider safety
and to reduce glare.

G. To improve the consistency of scale on the
streets, new buildings shall respond to the scale
and placement of design features of earlier
buildings adjacent to them. Such design features
include but are not limited to cornice lines,
colonnades, fenestration, and materials.

H. Where the new building facade is further set
back from the street than the existing adjacent
buildings, the connection between new
construction and adjacent buildings should

be designed to minimize dark corners and
blank walls and create a continuous, attractive,
pedestrian environment.

I. Rooftop design shall prevent unsightly rooftops
as viewed from above, either by screening
mechanical systems from view, creating a
significant top or landmark, or designing the
roof for use.

1. High-rise towers shall be relatively slender.

2. High-rise massing shall be divided to reduce overall bulk and step graciously down towards lower
adjacent structures.

3. Primary building entrances shall be clearly marked.

4. Cornice lines shall be consistent where new
buildings meet existing structures.

5. New buildings shall maintain key views.

6. A building’s top shall be delineated with a change of detail and meet the sky with a thinner form, or
tapered overhang.

7. Curtain walls shall be designed with detail and
texture, while employing the highest quality materials.

268 of 325
4-19 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

J. Design of new construction shall intend to
establish landmark buildings. Massing, facade
articulation, quality of building materials,
signage, lighting, building projections (e.g.,
towers), and other architectural features shall be
considered in establishing a landmark building.

K. Projects built adjacent to historic structures that
are smaller in scale shall step down at the street
wall to align with the existing cornice.

UPPER RIGHT: High-rise curtain walls shall be designed
with the highest quality materials and some texture and surface relief from the glass plane to provide scale and visual interest from either adjacent towers and or as
viewed from a distance.

UPPER LEFT: Towers shall be significantly separated from each other to provide light, air and views between them.

Where new buildings are adjacent to smaller or historic structures, their cornice lines and other facade elements shall be aligned.

L. New development shall step down to a scale
similar to adjacent low -rise residential uses.

M. High-rise facades above 60 feet shall be
stepped back by a minimum of 20 feet. Blank or
utilitarian facades are undesirable. Street-facing
high-rise facades greater than 150 feet in width shall be stepped back by a minimum of 20 feet at or above 60
feet in height from grade. Bland or utilitarian facades are undesirable.

N. Existing views of the mountains and other
local landmarks from nearby buildings shall be
preserved wherever feasible.

ABOVE: Towers shall taper as they reach skyward and
assume forms that represent the most slender and elegant addition to Glendale’s downtown skyline.

LEFT: High-rises and large buildings shall have a lower story base of an appropriate scale that steps down toward the street. The main entrance shall be clearly marked with an architectural canopy or other scaling element.
269 of 325
4-20 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2 Building Design

4.2.2 MASSING & SCALE: MODULATION OF HEIGHT
Modulation of rooflines can add visual interest to the skyline, while reducing the scale of large building masses. Modulation can also minimize the “canyon” effect along streets while creating visual reference points and the appearance of distinct and separate buildings. Similarly, building stepbacks at upper levels can allow for multiple roofline profiles, thereby lessening the imposing appearance of building massing over the public right-of way. This section applies to buildings less than 95 feet in height.

STANDARDS
A. A design proposal shall incorporate at least one
of the following:

1. Modulation: A roofline height modulation
of at least 10 feet for every 150 linear feet;
or

2. Stepback: An upper level stepback, 15 feet
minimum, of all upper floors above 40 feet
in elevation height; or

3. Corner: A prominent corner feature that is
differentiated by height and design features
from the primary massing of the building by
a minimum of 10 feet (see DSP 4.2.12 for
additional development standards ); or

4. Averaging: Height averaging where a
portion of the massing may exceed the
maximum allowed building height, provided
that the entire massing height average is
equal to or does not exceed the maximum
allowed building height.

B. A visible and delineated roofline shall be created
to visually demarcate where the building
silhouette meets the sky. All buildings shall have
a suitable or even dramatic termination at the
roofline. The upper termination of a building
shall be strongly developed in a building with a
flat or slightly sloping roofline.

C. Elevator and stair overruns shall not be counted
as part of the roofline modulation unless it has
been integrated into the overall architectural
design.

ABOVE: A.1. Roofline height modulation

ABOVE: Roofline modulation can create the appearance
of distinct buildings in a single massing while minimizing building scale.

270 of 325
4-21 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

ABOVE: A.2 Upper level stepback above 40’ in elevation.

ABOVE: A.3. Corner feature

ABOVE: A.4. Height averaging

ABOVE: Upper level building stepbacks can reduce the
scale of a building and improve its relationship to the pedestrian realm.

ABOVE: A corner feature can create variation in height
while conveying visual prominence for significant
intersections or gateways.

ABOVE: Height averaging allowed for variations in mass- ing to locate a taller building and corner tower feature addressing a wide, high-traffic street, and stepped down massing facing lower height buildings and a public park.

271 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-22 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.3 MASSING & SCALE: FACADE MODULATION
Modulation in building massing and scale encourages proportions that relate to the human -scale and create visual interest. This modulation can be achieved through the tripartite of a clearly defined base, middle and top in the vertical. Recesses and projections of a building fac ade, in combination with detailing, articulation, and fenestration pattern, can create diversity and visual interest in the horizontal, particularly in its relationship to the pedestrian realm. This section applies to buildings less than 95 feet in height.

STANDARDS
A. A design proposal shall incorporate at least one
of the following:

1. Modulation: A major modulation of the
facade at a minimum of every 150 linear
feet that is at least 24 inches deep and 4
feet in width, and a minor modulation in
facade at a minimum of every 50 linear feet
that is at least 12 inches deep and 2 feet in
width.

2. A clearly delineated base, middle, and top
that can be differentiated by:
a. Change in materials (see Section 4.2.8);
or
b. Distinct design that creates visual
separation; or
c. Upper level stepback of 15 feet
minimum of all floors above 40 feet in
elevation height.

ABOVE: A.1. Major and minor facade modulation.

ABOVE: A.2. Upper level stepback above 40’ in elevation.

272 of 325
4-23 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

ABOVE: Windows that project out to the street, or recess into the building can create visual interest and depth to a building facade, while also diminishing the scale of the massing.

ABOVE: Base-Middle-Top can be established through the
use of materials, strong form lines that diminish scale, and upper level stepbacks.

ABOVE: Major and minor building facade modulations can
create depth and scale.

ABOVE: An upper level stepback can reduce the scale and massing of a building, while reinforcing the pedestrian scale of the public realm.

Base Middle Top
273 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-24 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.4 MASSING & SCALE: BUILDING SEPARATIONS
Building separations can be key to reducing scale, providing opportunities for open space, reinforcing a pedestrian scale pattern, and providing a visual reference to entrances for buildings that occupy large blocks.

Separations allow for visual relief and create the appearance of two, or more, distinct buildings that reinforce a fine-grained pattern on a single block. To achieve this eff ect on the pedestrian realm, it is essential that separations terminate at the ground level, or provide a distinct architectural difference from adjacent massing.

This section applies to buildings less than 95 feet in height.

STANDARDS
A. A design proposal whose facade length exceeds
200 250 feet shall incorporate at least one of the
following:

1. A building separation that extends to the
street level and includes no physical barriers
such as gates, fences, or walls abutting a
public right-of-way; or

2. A building separation that begins at the
second floor, no higher than 16 feet in
elevation above the sidewalk, that provides
a distinct and separate architectural style
from the surrounding massing and is
setback 20 feet from the required setback
zone.

B. A proposal that includes a building separation
shall also include a separation that is a minimum
of 40 feet from building face to building face.

ABOVE: A building separation of at least 40 feet wide and open to the sidewalk, shall be provided for any facade
length of 250’ or greater.

ABOVE AND LEFT: Building separations can provide the
visual appearance of two distinct buildings, or reduce
the scale of a single massing. Entrances to buildings and courtyards can be provided through separations, as well as the provision of publicly accessible open space. Separation at grade can result in a pedestrian level architectural style that is distinct, further reducing the scale of the overall massing.

274 of 325
4-25 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

Vision of a Building Separation through the building to provide an integrated publicly accessible open space.
275 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-26 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.5 MASSING & SCALE: TRANSITIONAL MASSING
Sites located at the edge of the Downtown Specific Plan area are typically adjacent to low-rise residential neighborhoods, consisting largely of 2- and 3-story residential buildings. New development on these sites needs to recognize this change in scale and character from Downtown through transitional massing and other buffers. All new development and retrofitting of existing buildings directly adjacent to multi-family residential zones will be evaluated according to the following standards for buffers between Downtown and residential zones outside of the Downtown.

STANDARDS
A. A 10-foot interior setback shall be required
in a DSP zoned development where it abuts
a R-3050, R-2250, R-1650, or R-1250 zone.

Landscaping and emergency access can be
provided within the setback. The setback shall
be designed for safety, including lighting and
visual access.

B. An upper level stepback of 20 feet shall be
required with an elevation height no more
than 40 feet, or alternatively provide an interior
setback of 20 feet. See diagrams on opposit e
page.

C. Any required interior setback shall not count
towards any required publicly accessible open
space.

D. A decorative masonry wall designed as a buffer
shall be required between non -residential uses
(including parking) and any residential zones
adjacent to the DSP area.

1. A decorative masonry wall shall not be less
than 6 feet in height.

2. A wall next to a driveway shall be set back
from the sidewalk to ensure safe visual
access for cars and space for landscaping.

3. Walls should incorporate landscaping to
soften the appearances.

E. Parking structures facing residential zones
adjacent to the DSP area shall have all walls
designed as facades, compatible with the
context, including residential and human -scaled
materials.

F. For larger developments, the portion adjacent
to residential zones shall be designed to appear
as a separate building, with different setbacks,
massing, height, and architectural character
from the Downtown facing portion.

G. For larger developments, a change of
architectural style may be appropriate where
projects face or abut residential zones. The style
and materials should relate to the predominate
characteristics of the residential neighborhood.

H. Grading measures, such as sunken parking
areas or landscaped berms, should be used as
a means to screen parking lots from adjacent
residential zones and/or elevation change.

ABOVE: A park-like paseo acts as a buffer to transition massing and allows for through block connectivity.

ABOVE: A mixed-use building with greater height and
mass than its adjacent building steps down and steps back for compatibility.
276 of 325
4-27 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

Required publicly accessible open space
located directly adjacent to a multi-family zone.

Mininmum 10’ setback
from interior property line

20’ stepback

Maximum height of 40’
directly adjacent to a
multi-family zone.

Property line

ABOVE: Transitional Massing Options for Standard B

277 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-28 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.6 MASSING & SCALE: LANDMARK ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES Various sites in the downtown, such as terminated vistas and corners at primary intersections that mark entries to downtown, are ideal locations for landmark architectural features. These may include towers, prominent building entries, specialized signage or public art. Landscaped setbacks and public pocket parks may also be used to identify these locations. Additionally, East Broadway is designated a Civic Promenade, where the architectural style, massing and character of new development shall defer to existing civic buildings such as City Hall and Central Post Office. Finally, the Open Space Network (see Chapter Five) identifies

various potential pedestrian and/or vehicle passages to augment existing alleys and paseos. These passages represent opportunities to create intimate, pedestrian-scaled walkways through the downtown. Such features (identified in Figure 4- D) help provide visual landmarks and enhance the image of Downtown.

TOP: Entry corner at Brand & Broadway indicated by
primary entrance at architectural rotunda
BOTTOM: Entry corner indicated by architectural tower
and primary entrance
TOP: Street vista terminated by a prominent building
entrance
ABOVE LEFT: Entry corner indicated by architectural tower ABOVE RIGHT: Entry corner indicated by signage
278 of 325
Amended by Ord. No. 5815, 5865, 5923 4-29 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

FIGURE 4-C

ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES

ARDEN

FIGURE 4-D

0 150 300

N

600ft

ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES

BURCHETT

MONTEREY

Entry Location
Terminated Vista
SR-134 FREEWAY Civic Promenade

Paseo / Passage (see Chapter 5)

Civic and Historic Landmarks

10 LEXINGTON

MYRTLE

1 - Glendale YMCA
2 - Alex Theatre
3 - Glendale Central Post Office
4 - Huntley-Evans Building
5 - Masonic Temple
6 - Security Trust and Savings Bank
7 - City Hall
8 - Municipal Power & Light Building
9 - F.W. Woolworth Building
10 - Glendale Federal Savings & Loan
11 - Municipal Services Building
12 - Central Library
13 - Old Police Headquarters
14 - County Courthouse
15 - Perkins Building
16 - Municipal Garage
17 - Police Headquarters
18 - Adult Recreation Center

CALIFORNIA

SALEM

WILSON
2 9
1 13

17 16
6 3

8 7 11

15 BROADWAY
14 4

12 5 18

HARVARD

ELK
DORAN

COLORADO

PIONEER

COLUMBUS

CENTRAL
ORANGE
BRAND

MARYLAND
LOUISE

KENWOOD

JACKSON
ISABEL
DORAN

ORANGE GROVE
279 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-30 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN Amended by Ord. No. 5865, 5923

4.2.7 ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS
Buildings shall address the street in a manner that reinforces pedestrian activity and engagement. All development shall be designed to enhance ground level architectural elements for a human- scale. Entry conditions, building materials, canopies, display windows, lighting and well-designed signage can all contribute to conditions ideal for creating a vibrant and unique pedestrian environment. All new development and facade remodels shall comply with the following design standards:

STANDARDS
A. The building facade shall use architectural
solutions (e.g., building materials, texture,
offset building massing, repetition of columns,
recessed entries, windows, and awnings)
to avoid the creation of impenetrable, un-
articulated building facades.

B. Facades shall be constructed in a manner
to appear substantial, avoiding low -quality
building materials and construction details

that contribute to the perception of a facade
as flimsy, or inconsistent with the intended
materials and architectural style.

C. No ground level parking, except for the parking
entry shall be visible from any street frontage.

Any parking at ground level shall have active
retail or other habitable ground floor uses
facing the sidewalk.

D. New development, or the retrofitting of
existing development, shall address the public
sidewalk. Design of the street level facade shall
be incorporated into the design of the overall
building.

E. Ground level facades shall be augmented with
streetscape or open space improvements that
improve the pedestrian environment.

F. Large expanses of glass shall be subdivided into
smaller units.

G. Differentiation shall be provided at the base and
the top of windows.

H. Ground level floors shall be visually separated
from floors above through the use of
architectural elements that could include
awnings, canopies or lintels, or additionally by
recessing the ground-floor level from the floor
above.

I. Landscaping is require d to provide additional
texture and planted features at the ground
level elevation for the pedestrian, but should
increase the level of pedestrian interest rather
than separating pedestrians from views into
buildings.

J. For streets with ground floor use restrictions
or requirements as described in Chapter Three,
certain frontages are also required or restricted.
280 of 325
Amended by Ord. No. 5726, 5865, 5923 4-31 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

Architectural Elements include:

1. Canopy separating ground floor from floors above

2. Subdivided glass at large windows

3. Planted feature at street level

4. Street trees and streetscape enhancements

5. Column articulation

6. Recessed balconies

7. Facade modulation

8. High-quality street-level materials

9. Activated street frontage

10. Active building adjacent zone

11. Visible residential entrances

12. Pedestrian-oriented and visible signage

PRIMARY

FRONTAGE

MIXED-USE

COMMERCIAL

MIXED-USE

RESIDENTIAL

ENTERTAINMENT

FRONTAGE

RESIDENTIAL

FRONTAGE
Arcade Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed Allowed Not Allowed Storefront Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Not Allowed
Stoop Not Allowed Allowed Allowed Not Allowed Allowed
Porte-Cochere Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed Allowed Not Allowed TABLE 4-C: Frontage Design Standards

8 8
12 11
9 10

281 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-32 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.8 ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS: MATERIALS
MATERIALS are a significant feature of design. They assist in establishing a unique aesthetic quality while creating and reinforcing character. Materials are also essential to diminishing the scale of the overall building massing, and reinforcing the base -middle-top principles of quality design. Materials at the lower level, or base, should reinforce the pedestrian character of the public realm and employ materials that are of a human- scale. As building height increases, larger scale materials may be appropriate. All materials for new projects and facade remodels shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. Durable, human-scaled materials shall be used
on all street level facades.

B. Materials such as EIFS, stucco, or monolithic
concrete panels shall not be used within the first
20 feet of a building elevation on facades facing
public streets or at massing transitions.

C. Street level materials shall be human -scaled
such as brick, block, wood, stone, and others to
provide a high-quality aesthetic and diversity i n
building design.

D. Above street level (minimum 20 feet), no more
than 60% of the building elevation shall be clad
with EIFS or stucco.

E. All building elevations, including alley facing
elevations, shall be treated equally with high-
quality and human-scaled materials to provide
depth and contrast in color.

F. All projects shall avoid creating a monotone
color palette.

G. Materials on alley facades shall create a more
human-scaled texture through the incorporation
of scoring or artistic installations (murals).

H. Materials and corresponding designs shall
wrap the corners of all facades including alleys,
terminating at a logical location.

ABOVE: The scale of materials should relate to the public realm on lower portions of a building elevation, increasing in scale as a building grows in height.

ABOVE: Materials that represent a human-scale such as
masonry, wood, or appropriately scaled panels can create a more engaging and visually interesting street frontage.

LEFT: Larger-scale materials and glazing are more
appropriate at upper levels.

Base Middle Top
282 of 325
Amended by Ord. No. 5865, 5923 4-33 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.9 STOREFRONTS
STOREFRONTS are one of the most important features of an active urban environment. They present an opportunity to engage the street level by generating activity and transparency between the pedestrian realm and businesses, while creating a memorable experience. Storefronts can engage the streetscape in various manners including operable storefronts to encourage indoor activi ty to connect with the public realm. All new storefronts shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. All facades that include storefronts shall provide
a minimum of 75% transparency including
access and structural supports.

B. Materials shall conform to Section 4.2.8 of this
Chapter.

C. The design of storefronts shall reinforce the
concept of base -middle-top as identified in
Section 4.2.3 of this Chapter.

D. All non-residential storefronts shall have a
minimum floor-to-ceiling height as defined in
Section 4.3 of this Chapter.

E. Use storefronts such as doors and windows that
swing upward or out to open, to engage uses
such as eating and drinking establishments with
the public realm.

F. Pedestrian-oriented signage shall be provided
consistent with Section 4.2.23 of this Chapter.

G. Pedestrian-scaled lighting shall be provided on
all storefronts.

H. Canopies and marquees shall be provided on a
minimum of 50% of the entire facade. Refer to
Section 4.2.13 for design details.

I. Storefronts and entrances shall provide recesses
from the building facade to create depth and
contrast.

ABOVE: Doors and windows that fold and swing can create a unique aesthetic in an urban environment. They engage the public realm with commercial and retail activities by creating permeability in the facade and opportunities for engagement between patrons and passersby.

ABOVE: Engaging storefronts that create high levels of
visibility can support an active and vibrant street life.

LEFT: A diversity of entries from the streetscape provides identity and encourages interaction between commercial
and retail services with the public realm.
283 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-34 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.10 ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS: BUILDING LOBBIES & ENTRIES BUILDING LOBBIES & ENTRIES provide visual queues to building entrances and landmarks for pedestrians. They can also offer a unique means to create visual interest and modulation in a building facade.

Lobby entrances shall be carefully designed to create landmark visual reference points and the importance of the building entrance.

STANDARDS
A. Exterior building lobbies shall incorporate the
following aesthetic features:

1. Significant design feature such as a canopy,
marquee, or other form of weather
protection that creates visual prominence.

2. A material application that creates
continuity with the overall building design
but also creates a distinct and identifiable
aesthetic quality.

3. A recess or projection to delineate the
building lobby from the balance of the
facade.

4. Paving materials incorporated to
differentiate the primary entrance path that
is distinct and unique from the adjacent
paving materials.

B. For commercial uses, a building’s primary
entrance, defined as the entrance which
provides the most direct access to the building’s
lobby and remains unlocked during business
hours, shall be located on a public street or on
a usable public open space that is visible and
connected to a public street.

ABOVE: Marquees and canopies that are unique to the
building entry can serve as visual reference points for pedestrians.

ABOVE: Vibrant colors and unique materials framing a
lobby or building entrance can create visual interest.

ABOVE: Recessed entries can create modest open spaces
and differentiation in the street frontage.
284 of 325
Amended by Ord. No. 5865, 5923 4-35 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.11 STOOPS & GROUND LEVEL ENTRIES
STOOPS present a unique opportunity to engage residential entries with the public realm, creating activation, opportunities for engagement, and safety. Additionally, stoops create a design aesthetic that supports a residential character on appropriate urban streets. All stoops shall conform to the following design standards:

STANDARDS
A. Stoops shall be required for ground level
residential units on all streets, regardless of
typology.

B. Stoops shall be designed to address the street to
provide the most direct access path and allow
for the greatest amount of landscaping.

C. Stoop or storefront access shall be required
for all ground level live-work units, where the
street frontage of the building exceeds 100

feet, unless otherwise explicitly approved by the
design review authority, provided an alternative
accessible path is included.

D. Stoops shall be elevated a maximum of 36
inches above grade or sidewalk.

E. Stoop porches, not including stairs, shall be a
minimum of 20 square feet.

F. Stoops shall correspond directly to the building
entry and be at least 4 feet wide.

G. Stoops and/or adjacent entry porches shall
not be enclosed with solid walls or railings, or
vegetation that creates a visual obstruction
between the stoop/porch and the public realm
in order to maintain a sense of openness.

H. Stoops may have an over-hanging roof or
awning no wider than the stoop.

I. Planter or porch walls parallel to the sidewalk
and taller than 18 inches shall have an irrigated
18 inch planting bed at its base.

ABOVE: Landscaping can soften the hardscape around
residential entries while providing modest privacy for
residents.

ABOVE: Raised entries and porches can create visual
interest and engaging street frontages.

ABOVE: On-street residential entries can increase safety as well as activity on residential-oriented streets.
285 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-36 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.12 ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS: CORNERS
CORNER FEATURES present a unique opportunity to enhance the aesthetic quality of a signature building, visual terminus, or prominence at a primary entrance. In addition to creating variation in building massing, an enhanced corner can create a sense of place within the public realm by incorporating key design features. All corner elements shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. Corner features shall be located at the
intersection of two public rights-of-way, and
not located near alleys, or mid -block.

B. Corner features shall be greater off-set in height
than the overall building mass by a minimum of
10 feet in either direction.

C. Corner features shall have a distinct but
complimentary design from the overall mass of
the building.

D. Unique or distinct paving shall be provided at a
corner feature to emphasize its prominence and
importance within the public realm.

E. Enhanced canopies or marquees shall be
provided to help create a sense of enclosure
within the public realm.

F. Plazas may also be used to create a unique
corner feature and shall be developed per the
standards outlined in Chapter 5 for publicly
accessible open space.

ABOVE: Corner features can be used to create visual
prominence for a building at key or gateway intersections.

ABOVE & BELOW: Corner features that are greater in
height than the primary massing can create modulation in the building roofline.

ABOVE: Corner features can also be created by a change in materials or design.
286 of 325
4-37 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.13 CANOPIES
CANOPIES function as an extension of the public sidewalk, providing shelter from inclement weather, shade, and a sense of enclosure to the public realm. They can also provide a visual reference to entrances or other important facade elements. All new canopy installations shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. Canopies shall be installed a minimum of 9 feet
above grade, and a maximum of 14 feet above
grade.

B. A minimum of 50% of the street elevation shall
include canopies or marquees.

C. Materials and colors of all canopies and
marquees shall be complimentary with the
overall building aesthetic and material palette.

ABOVE: Canopies can serve as sun shading devices, or
decorative features that create human-scaled frontages.

ABOVE: Canopies, when combined with other features
such as plantings can create a room or enclosure effect for outdoor activities such as eating and drinking
establishments.

ABOVE: Canopies can provide shade for outdoor activities such as eating and drinking establishments.

ABOVE: A shading device and architectural element that
adds detail and richness to the urban streetscape.
287 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-38 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.14 ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS: BALCONIES
BALCONIES provide important outdoor private space for residential units. When designed well, they can provide visual interest to facade designs, in addition to depth and rhythm. Alternatively, balconies can also create a negative repetitive quality when they are designed identically or have the appearance of being “added-on” to a facade. All new balconies shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. All balconies shall have a minimum forty (40)
square feet and a minimum length or width of
four (4) feet and shall be directly accessible and
an integral part of the dwelling unit which it
serves. No more than 40 75% of balconies on a
project shall extend bey ond the facade of the
building; and the maximum projection shall be
25% of the balcony’s full depth. All other
balconies shall be recessed into the building
facade.

B. No balconies shall overhang into the public
right-of-way or sidewalk as identified in Section

4.4.3, not including the portion of the building
setback behind the existing property line.

C. No balconies can overhang the area of the
building setback, behind the property line,
within the first 20 feet of the building elevation.

D. Materials of all balcony components, including
floors and railings shall be aesthetically
compatible with the overall building design.

E. Balconies shall assist in creating a dynamic and
visually interesting facade, and avoid creating
repetition.

ABOVE: Partially recessed balconies, when combined
with major facade modulations can create breaks in large building masses to reduce the overall building scale.

ABOVE: A mix of recessed and partially recessed balconies can create visual interest and articulation in facades.

ABOVE: Recessed balconies can be incorporated into a
facade design to create a unique pattern or form.
288 of 325
4-39 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.15 FENESTRATION
FENESTRATION patterns can create an identifiable character and when properly detailed can enhance a quality design. Window designs can also improve facade modulation, scale, or a change of materials. All fenestration patterns shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. A variety of window sizes shall be provided to
create visual complexity and reflect the different
internal uses of a building facade. Windows
shall also coordinate with the architectural
design of the building including materials and
scale.

B. At the ground level, unarticulated glass curtain
walls shall be avoided, unless their design
is considered of exceptional quality while
allowing full transparency into an attractive,
active interior use. Facades of buildings shall be
divided into individual storefronts or entries.

C. Large expanses of glazing shall be subdivided
into smaller units.

D. Differentiation shall be provided at the base and
top of windows.

ABOVE: Fenestration patterns that change and respond to form and orientation can enhance modestly designed or
flat facades.

ABOVE: Fenestration patterns that correspond with a
change in material or depth can create visual interest, complexity in design, and reduce the overall scale of
massing and facades.
289 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-40 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.16 ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS: FENCES, WALLS & GATES
FENCES, WALLS & GATES help define and screen yards, walkways, and outdoors areas. As such, the de - sign of such barriers must be considered when addressing the streetscape experience. All fences, walls, and gates shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. All exterior security gates or fences shall be
located behind the building face of the adjacent
building and directly in line with the adjacent
facade plane.

B. Design of all fences and gate shall be integrated
with the overall building and site design with
high levels of transparency.

C. Fences, walls, and gates shall be designed in a
style, material, and color that compliments the
overall building and site design. Plantings shall
be utilized instead of walls and fences wherever
possible.

D. Security grilles and roll down doors for
storefronts shall be located behind the building
face.

ABOVE: Fences or gates should be compatible with the
overall building and streetscape design.

ABOVE: Incorporating elements such as seating, art, or
wayfinding can soften the visual appearance of enclosures.

ABOVE: Entry gates should promote visual access and
permeability while remaining modest in scale.
290 of 325
4-41 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.17 PLANTERS
PLANTERS and ground level landscaping can either enhance open space along the streetscape or they can create formidable and undesirable barriers, privatizing such space. Planters shall be integrated into the overall open space and landscape design and shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. Planters at the ground level such as those in
publicly accessible open space and abutting the
public right-of-way shall not exceed a height of
18 inches above grade within the first 10 feet of
the street facing property line.

B. Planter ledges should provide a minimum depth
of 12 inches to also serve as seating.

C. Planter boxes shall not exceed 25% of all project
landscaping within the publicly accessible open
space.

D. Materials of any raised planters shall compliment
those of the overall project design.

E. Any development that substitutes planter
boxes for originally approved landscaping shall
not receive their certificate of occupancy until
original approved design is completed.

ABOVE: Seating incorporated with a whimsical design sense can create a unique space that encourages public use.

ABOVE: Planters can include a variety of planting types and seating.
291 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-42 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN Amended by Ord. No. 5865, 5923

4.2.18 ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS: ARCADES
ARCADES function as an extension of the public sidewalk, providing shelter from the sun and offering ex- panded opportunities for design on narrow lots. These will be encouraged on the sunny sides of designated pedestrian-oriented streets. Examples in Downtown Glendale include the Brand frontage of the City Center building. All covered sidewalk arcades will conform to the following design standards.

STANDARDS
A. Arcades shall not be constructed within the
required setback per the street typologies
defined in Section 4.1.3 and 4.3.

B. Arcades shall be accessible to pedestrians and
have a minimum depth of 8 feet.

C. Minimum interior height for sidewalk arcades
shall be 12 feet above the finished grade.

D. The arcade shall be no more than two stories
high, or a maximum of 30 feet.

E. Pavement patterns shall be consistent with
patterns regulated by the City and shall provide
adequate drainage.

ALL: Arcades can serve
various purposes such as
screening from inclement
weather and shade,
outdoor seating and dining
areas, and a sense of scale
along street frontages for
tall buildings.

F. At all sites adjoining an existing arcade,
a similarly proportioned arcade shall be
considered for new construction.

G. An arcade shall be designed to function as an
extension of the public sidewalk.

H. Priority locations for arcades are to extend an
existing system of arcades within a single block,
or to provide shade and weather protection on
Primary Frontage streets.

I. An arcade shall be covered with a flat or sloping
roof. When there is no second floor over the
arcade, the roof of an arcade may be utilized

as an open-air terrace or a space for outdoor
dining.

J. A landscaped planter with a minimum width of
one foot shall be located in front of the columns
of the arcade. This planter shall contain climbing
vegetation which is capable of reaching a
height of 15 feet or more and connected to an
irrigation system.

K. Design of an arcade shall be consistent along
its entire length and shall be integrated into the
design of the building as a whole.

L. The columns of the arcade shall be substantially
thick, and the openings between columns shall
be vertically proportioned.

M. Connections shall be made between the arcade
and the properties adjacent to it.

N. Storefronts located along the arcade shall
comply with all applicable storefront design
guidelines.

O. To ensure proper penetration of daylight, the
projection roof over an arcade shall not be
deeper than it is tall.

292 of 325
Amended by Ord. No. 5865, 5923 4-43 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.19 PORTE- COCHERES
PORTE -COCHERES are recessed vehicle entry courts within a storefront or arcade frontage. Porte-cocheres are commonly used for vehicular drop- off or utility off-loading, but may also accommodate gardens, dining, and retail storefronts. This frontage shall be used sparingly. All porte-cocheres shall conform to the following design standards:

STANDARDS
A. Porte-cocheres shall not be more than 40 feet
deep from the facade.

B. The porte-cochere may be enclosed with a roof
or other overhead structure for protection from
the sun and rain.

C. The materials and architectural detailing of the
porte-cochere shall be consistent with the street
facade of the building.

D. A covered passage or arcade may be located
over the entrance to the porte-cochere from the
sidewalk.

E. Vehicle entrances to the porte-cochere shall
be narrow, to minimize the disruption of the
dominate frontage pattern.

ALL: Porte-Cocheres provide convenient and covered access and drop-off for patrons.
293 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-44 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.20 ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS: GARAGE ENTRIES

GARAGE ENTRIES provide necessary access to parking for developments. However, garage entries can create conflicts with pedestrians, while being aesthetically incompatible with the streetscape and building design. Garage entries should support the overall building design while not detracting from the streetscape and pedestrian realm and shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. No ground level parking, except for the parking
entry shall be visible from any street frontage.

Parking located at ground level must have
active retail, residential entry, or other habitable
ground floor uses facing the sidewalk, and
subject to the design standards established in
Sections 4.2.9 and 4.2.11.

B. Where alleys are adequate, per Public Works
standards and approval regarding width and
capacity, new developments shall locate all
parking garage entries on the all ey.

C. When parking garage entries are located on the
street, all entries shall conform to the following:

1. Utilities shall not be visible from the street
frontage. Projects shall provide screening,
dropped ceilings, or locate utilities away
from areas visible from the pedestrian level.

2. Garage doors or gates shall be set back
from the face of building.

3. A unique or enhanced paving pattern
shall be provided on the driveway, equal
to the width of the garage entry to
create visual separation and acknowledge
potential conflicts with other modes of
transportation.

4. The width of the garage opening shall be as
narrow as possible.

ABOVE: Narrow garage entry widths encourage slower
movement of automobiles reducing potential conflicts
with other modes of transportation.

ABOVE: Garage entries shall be well designed to mitigate the aesthetic impact on the pedestrian realm. Creative
and artistic elevations can establish visual interest while integrating the overall design of the garage entry with the surrounding architectural style. Elements such as screening

or drop ceilings can mitigate the visual impact of necessary utility infrastructure.
294 of 325
4-45 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.21 UTILITIES

UTILITIES are necessary to the function and operation of any building. They can also, when not properly integrated, detract from the aesthetic quality of an urban environment or pose hazards to pedestrians. All utility installations shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. All above grade utility boxes shall be stainless
steel or wrapped with an artistic application.

B. No utilities shall protrude into the public right-
of-way, including the portion dedicated as
sidewalk and located behind the property line.

C. Per Glendale Water and Power, all other utilities
shall be integrated into the building facade and
not freestanding.

D. Electrical transformers shall be located so that
access is achieved from the alley, where feasible.

If located adjacent to a public sidewalk, they
shall be screened and incorporated into the
building to provide the visual appearance of a
storefront.

E. Electrical transformers, mechanical equipment,
and other utility -oriented equipment shall
not be located within 50 feet of any building
corner, or located within a designated publicly
accessible open space.

ABOVE: When utilities must project from the building
facade at the pedestrian level, they shall be enclosed with an architecturally compatible surround to prevent tripping hazards and to improve the aesthetic impact.

ABOVE: Utilities such as standpipes, fire department
connections, and utility boxes are essential to building operations. Utilities shall be incorporated into the building design to the greatest extent feasible, including wall
mounted devices, to avoid freestanding obstructions in or near the right-of-way, or visual clutter within landscaped areas or setbacks.

ABOVE: Utilities shall not interrupt the design of planters or other building elements, unlike the photo above. They shall be gracefully integrated into the overall design and shall be accounted for early in the design process to avoid negative visual impacts.
295 of 325

4.2 Building Design
4-46 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.22 ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS: LIGHTING

LIGHTING can create a unique aesthetic and enhance the design of a building. It also provides necessary Illumination for business operation, and safety for pedestrians and other users and shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. Lighting shall be directed away from
surrounding development and shielded to
minimize spillover on adjacent properties.

B. No light shall be directed at the windows of a
residential unit within or adjacent to a project.

C. Reflective materials or other sources of glare,
such as polished metal surfaces, shall result
in visual glare or measurable heat gain on
surrounding windows.

D. Significant architectural features such as corners
or unique cornices should be illuminated and
enhanced by a comprehensive lighting design.

E. Building lighting should be adjustable, and
prior to Certificate of Occupancy a test may be
requireded to calibrate proper illumination levels
to the satisfaction of the Urban Design Studio
staff.

ABOVE: Building lighting shall compliment and accent the overall design, including changes in materials, fenestration, or modulation.

RIGHT: Pathway and open space lighting shall be creative and compliment the overall open space and public realm
design.

ABOVE: Building and open space design shall include
a diversity in lighting, including building uplighting, pathway lighting, and lighting that activates gathering areas.

ABOVE: Illumination at cornices and corner features can support the intent of creating visual prominence for
significant building features.

296 of 325
4-47 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.2.23 SIGNAGE

SIGNAGE is essential to any urban environment. It signifies businesses, building names, and other key features. Properly scaled and located signage can grea tly enhance the pedestrian experience along commercial streetscapes. All signage elements shall conform to the following standards:

STANDARDS
A. All signs shall comply with GMC Chapter 30.33.

B. All building signage below 20 feet in elevation
height shall be wall mounted and not surface
applied, flush with the wall.

C. Storefront signs shall be located below 14
feet in elevation height, measured from the
sidewalk, to avoid conflict with canopies and
mature trees, while maintaining visibility for
pedestrians.

D. Any development that provides publicly
accessible open space shall provide the standard
signage identified in Chapter 5.

ABOVE: Laser cut projecting signs identify businesses and add an architectural design element to the building.

ABOVE: Signage shall include other elements important
to the overall urban environment such as parking, bicycle parking, or wayfinding to significant public or civic assets.

ABOVE: Personalized signage compatible with the architec- tural character of the building.
297 of 325
4-48 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

298 of 325
4-49 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

The scale of the pedestrian realm and its relationship to the surrounding built environment directly affects the
experience of all users. Additionally, street typologies create distinct characters and districts that reinforce the urban identity.

URBAN DESIGN FRAMEWORK:

4.3 THE PEDESTRIAN REALM

4.3.1 Primary Street

4.3.2 Mixed-Use Commercial Street

4.3.3 Mixed-Use Residential Street

4.3.4 Residential Street

4.3.5 Entertainment Street
299 of 325
4-50 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.3 THE PEDESTRIAN REALM
A. STREETSCAPE REQUIREMENTS
Beautiful sidewalks with comfortable and attractive paving, generous landscape, shade trees, and attractive and functional lighting create a pleasant experience for Downtown pedestrians.

New construction and major remodels of buildings 10,000 square feet or more may be required to install streetscape elements as follows:

STANDARDS
A. Install sidewalk paving pattern and materials as
specified by the City.

B. Plant street trees and street landscaping as
specified by the City, spaced a minimum of 25
feet apart or as required by the City.

C. Install light standards as specified by the City.

D. Install pedestrian curb extensions on designated
pedestrian-oriented streets as required by the
City.

E. Install sidewalk furniture (benches, drinking
fountains, trash receptacles, etc.) as required by

the City and defined by the street typologies.

F. Projects may install sidewalk elements, such
as commemorative plaques or artwork, as
approved by the City, at the primary entrance to
the building.

RIGHT: A sidewalk with patterned paving features large
canopy street trees in planted parkways, pedestrian-scaled light fixtures with banners as district markers, public event noticing or holiday public art.

ABOVE: Streetscapes shall incorporate sidewalks with
sufficient width and a diverse range of urban amenities.

300 of 325
4-51 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

ABOVE: Intersections are important gateways to streets, districts, and significant projects and shall be treated as such with special features such as enhanced paving, and ample room for pedestrian waiting.

ABOVE: Special paving, accents or features may be
appropriate for significant streets to indicate important features such as building entries.

RIGHT: Create seamless transitions from public to private space.

ABOVE: Urban amenities such as cafe seating, transit
facilities and trash receptacles are designed to support an active street scene without obstructing the required clear sidewalk width.

301 of 325

4.3 THE PEDESTRIAN REALM
4-52 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

B. STREETSCAPE TYPOLOGIES
The treatment of sidewalks, setbacks and building facades vary, based on the different streets with their different uses, functions and scales. Downtown’s image and comfort largely are determined by proportions of the different streets and public rights -of-way, as defined by facing buildings, their frontages, setbacks, parkways and the streets themselves. Collectively, these shape the pedestrian experience by creating a sense of enclosure and well -defined pedestrian zones. As such, the street and setback dimensions directly affect the quality and pace of the pedestrian experience. In order to enhance and regulate the streetscapes and pedestrian experience, the DSP establishes a set of street types with different design considerations.

Street types are defined street width, land use context, and transportation/pedestrian characteristics. The classifications are meant to serve as a guide for designing appropriates streetscape environments. The types also build upon those ground floor use frontage restrictions noted in Chapter 3 – Land Use. The street typologies and their specific requirements can be found in the following sections:

• 4.3.1 Primary Street
• 4.3.2 Mixed-Use Commercial Street
• 4.3.3 Mixed-Use Residential Street
• 4.3.4 Entertainment Street
• 4.3.5 Residential Street
302 of 325
Amended by Ord No. 5727, 5776, 5815, 5865, 5923 4-53 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

FIGURE 4-C

SETBACKS / FRONTAGES

Primary - See Brand Boulevard Plan
Mixed-Use Commercial
Mixed-Frontage

Mixed-Use Residential
Residential
Entertainment - See “A & E” Plan

* Undesignated Streets shall provide a
minimum 4-foot wide parkway and
6-foot wide sidewalk
303 of 325

4.3 THE PEDESTRIAN REALM
4-54 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.3.1 PRIMARY STREET

The southerly half of Brand Boulevard, the City’s primary north-south street, is identified as having a Primary Street Frontage. Brand Boulevard is one of the City’s widest streets with a landscaped center median with street trees, two -lanes of vehicular traffic in each direction, as well as angled parking and a substantial public right-of-way setback. Brand is also one of the City’s signature, pedestrian -oriented streets, lined with active, ground floor commercial uses (retail, restaurants and services). New infill development must uphold this pedestrian orientation and shopping experience.

STANDARDS
A. The Primary Street designation shall follow
the streetscape plan established for Brand
Boulevard unless otherwise specified.

ABOVE: Large canopy shade trees provide protection from the sun and add to the character of the street.

ABOVE: View of Brand Boulevard streetscape with its
distinctive sidewalk paving.

ABOVE: Primary streets shall incorporate enhanced
urban amenities such as seating, special vegetation,
and illumination that creates a unique and identifiable experience.
304 of 325
4-55 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

Vision for a Primary Street

Primary Streets typically include the following:

1. Streets that integrate pedestrian, bike, transit, and vehicle use

2. Signalized mid-block crossings

3. Enhanced streetscape of wide sidewalks with accent paving

4. Large canopy street trees

5. Public and semi-public outdoor space such as plazas & courtyards

6. Active street level uses and building facades that address the street

7. Well designed building entries and lobbies

8. The highest level of transit amenities

9. Pedestrian-scaled lighting, signage and wayfinding

10. Public Art

305 of 325

4.3 THE PEDESTRIAN REALM
4-56 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN

4.3.2 MIXED -USE COMMERCIAL STREET

Central Avenue, Broadway, and Colorado Avenue are Mixed-Use Commercial transit streets, also identified as secondary commercial streets, and typically feature wide roadway widths, higher traffic volumes carrying transit vehicles, two travel lanes in each direction, and on-street parking. Within the Downtown, these streets are fronted by the newer residential and mixed -use projects, as well as existing commercial buildings.

STANDARDS
A. All parkways shall be a minimum of 5 feet in
width from face of curb and provide a 4 foot
wide paved area every 20 feet to allow for
unloading of vehicles.

B. Sidewalks shall be a minimum 10 feet wide with
no overlapping use by urban amenities such as
cafe seating, trash receptacles and signage.

C. The building adjacent zone shall be a minimum
3 feet in depth and used for a minimum of 50%
outdoor seating. The balance shall be used for
landscaping or residential stoops.

D. The ground floor of the building frontage
shall be a minimum of 16 feet in height and a
maximum of 20 feet.

E. Retail and neighborhood services are preferred
uses along Mixed-Use Commercial streets and
shall comprise more than 50% of the entire
project frontage.

F. Commercial storefronts shall follow the
standards established in Section 4.2.9.

G. Commercial entries shall be provided every 50
linear feet at a minimum.

ABOVE: Pockets of landscaping, street furnishings and
pedestrian-scaled amenities such as lighting, signage and banners can visually activate areas that may otherwise be less inviting

H. 75% of the street elevation shall be transparent.

I. Residential uses on Mixed -Use Commercial
streets should be less than 50% of the street
frontage and shall follow the standards
established in Section 4.2.11.

J. Seating shall be provided at a ratio of one seat
for every 50 linear feet in the parkway zone.

K. Public art may be located within the parkway
zone.

L. Frontage Streets shall include the same
standards as Mixed-Use Commercial with the
following exceptions:

1. Parkways shall be 8 feet wide; no paved
area for unloading of vehicles is required.

2. Sidewalk widths shall be 6 feet wide.

3. Retail and neighborhood services shall
comprise no more than 25% of the entire
project frontage.

4. 50% of the ground floor facade or
elevation shall be transparent.

ABOVE: Maximum street level transparency provides
interest and personal safety for passersby and pedestrians. 306 of 325
4-57 GLENDALE DOWNTOWN SPECIFIC PLAN